Upload
sulaiman-sabikan
View
303
Download
18
Embed Size (px)
DESCRIPTION
Fakulti Teknologi Kejuruteraan ACADEMIC HANDBOOK 20112012 Universiti Teknikal Malaysia Melaka
Citation preview
UNIVERSITI TEKNIKAL MALAYSIA MELAKAACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY (FTK)
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
2
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
3
2
Welcome to FTK 5 UTeM Mission 6 UTeM Vision 6 UTeM Motto 6 UTeM Objectives 7 UTeM Administration 8 FTK Mission 10 FTK Vision 10 FTK Motto 10 FTK Objectives 11 FTK Programme Educational Objectives 11 FTK Administration 12 Courses Offered 13 Course Duration 14 Grading System 14 Academic Classification 15 Academic Advisory System 15 GPA & CGPA Calculation 18 Award 19 Curriculum Structures 22 Summary of Subjects 54 Faculty Staffs 206 Maps & Locations 219 Credits 223
CONTENTS
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
4
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
5
3
WELCOME TO FTK
Assalamualaikum & Salam 1Malaysia, Welcome to the Faculty of Engineering Technology (FTK)! It is my pleasure to welcome you as a student of this
faculty. You are joining a multidisciplinary community of more than 70 staffs comprising of administrative staffs and academicians.
Joining FTK, you will benefit immensely from an academically rich environment supported by advanced equipment technology and assisted by highly technical trainers and teaching engineers. As graduates from FTK, you will be equipped with sound knowledge and skills relevant to the needs of multi-faceted indus- tries, such as manufacturing, construction, industrial, maintenance and management. Graduates can also work in entry-level positions such as product design, testing, development, system developments, field engin-eering, technical operations, and quality control.
FTK aims to support the nation’s need for highly skilled workforce towards achie- ving the vision to be a high-income nation by year 2020. It is a unique faculty since all the programs offered are application oriented based on current industrial needs and taught by lecturers with industrial experiences. The faculty’s strong link with industries will also be beneficial for the students to be exposed to the actual industrial environment. The ready- to-practice engineering technologists are not only trained to be creative and innovative with high ethical values but with emphasis on the soft skills such as communication, team work and leadership as required by the industries. This handbook is designed to provide valuable information about our academic programs and we hope that you find it useful. It is important that you consult regularly with your academic advisor particularly when it is time to register for your courses. An education in any area is a challenging prospect, but developing your creativity, skills and resour- cefulness in such a fast changing discipline in this new millennium has many benefits in technological practices and many other future careers.
At FTK, we are committed to creating a productive, efficient and friendly atmosphere within the faculty and welcome your partnership in this noble endeavor. We are pleased that you have chosen FTK and we are committed to the notion that you will continue to strive towards excellence throughout your tenure at FTK.
Associate Professor MOHD RAHIMI BIN YUSOFF Dean, Faculty of Engineering Technology
Assalamualaikum & Salam 1Malaysia,
Welcome to the Faculty of Engineering Technology (FTK)! It is my pleasure to welcome you as a student of this faculty. You are joining a multidisciplinary community of more than 70 staffs comprising of administrative staffs and academicians.
Joining FTK, you will benefit immensely from an academically rich environment supported by advanced equipment technology and assisted by highly technical trainers and teaching engineers. As graduates from FTK, you will be equipped with sound knowledge and skills relevant to the needs of multi-faceted industries, such as manufacturing, construction, industrial, maintenance and management. Graduates can also work in entry-level positions such as product design, testing, development, system developments, field engin-eering, technical operations, and quality control.
FTK aims to support the nation’s need for highly skilled workforce towards achieving the vision to be a high-income nation by year 2020. It is a unique faculty since all the programs offered are application oriented based on current industrial needs and taught by lecturers with industrial experiences. The faculty’s strong link with industries will also be beneficial for the students to be exposed to the actual industrial environment. The ready-to-practice engineering technologists are not only trained to be creative and innovative with high ethical values but with emphasis on the soft skills such as communication, team work and leadership as required by the industries. This handbook is designed to provide valuable information about our academic programs and we hope that you find it useful. It is important that you consult regularly with your academic advisor particularly when it is time to register for your courses. An education in any area is a challenging prospect, but developing your creativity, skills and resour-cefulness in such a fast changing discipline in this new millennium has many benefits in technological practices and many other future careers.
At FTK, we are committed to creating a productive, efficient and friendly atmosphere within the faculty and welcome your partnership in this noble endeavor. We are pleased that you have chosen FTK and we are committed to the notion that you will continue to strive towards excellence throughout your tenure at FTK.
ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR MOHD RAHIMI BIN YUSOFFDEAN, FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY3
WELCOME TO FTK
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
6
4
To produce highly competent professionals through quality and world class technical university education based on application-oriented teaching, learning and research with smart university-
industry partnership in line with the national aspiration.
To be one of the world’s leading innovative and creative technical university.
Excellence Through Competency
UTeM MISSION
UTeM VISION
UTeM MOTTO
4
To produce highly competent professionals through quality and world class technical university education based on application-oriented teaching, learning and research with smart university-
industry partnership in line with the national aspiration.
To be one of the world’s leading innovative and creative technical university.
Excellence Through Competency
UTeM MISSION
UTeM VISION
UTeM MOTTO
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
7
5
To become a creative and innovative learning and knowledge organization that offers practice and application oriented academic programmes in the fields of engineering and technology.
To lead in research, development, innovation, commercialisation and consultancy activities based on the needs of the industry.
To produce competent graduates with high moral values who will be the preferred choice by the industry.
To have competent and highly qualified staff with vast practical experiences.
To play an effective role as the main impetus to the industrial development of the nation.
To establish cooperation and smart partnership between the university and the industries.
To provide infrastructure and conducive environment to generate and maintain excellence.
To implement comprehensive and extensive usage of ICT in both academic activities and management of the university.
UTeM OBJECTIVES
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
8
6
PROF. DATUK DR. AHMAD YUSOFF BIN HASSAN
VICE CHANCELLOR
DATO' PROF. DR. MOHD NOR BIN HUSAIN
DEPUTY VICE CHANCELLOR (ACADEMIC & INTERNATIONAL)
PROF. DATO' DR. MOHAMAD KADIM BIN SUAIDI
DEPUTY VICE CHANCELLOR (RESEARCH & INNOVATION)
UTeM ADMINISTRATION
Senior Management
6
PROF. DATUK DR. AHMAD YUSOFF BIN HASSAN
VICE CHANCELLOR
DATO' PROF. DR. MOHD NOR BIN HUSAIN
DEPUTY VICE CHANCELLOR (ACADEMIC & INTERNATIONAL)
PROF. DATO' DR. MOHAMAD KADIM BIN SUAIDI
DEPUTY VICE CHANCELLOR (RESEARCH & INNOVATION)
UTeM ADMINISTRATION
Senior Management
6
PROF. DATUK DR. AHMAD YUSOFF BIN HASSAN
VICE CHANCELLOR
DATO' PROF. DR. MOHD NOR BIN HUSAIN
DEPUTY VICE CHANCELLOR (ACADEMIC & INTERNATIONAL)
PROF. DATO' DR. MOHAMAD KADIM BIN SUAIDI
DEPUTY VICE CHANCELLOR (RESEARCH & INNOVATION)
UTeM ADMINISTRATION
Senior Management
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
9
7
ENGR. PROF. DR. MARIZAN BIN SULAIMAN
ASSISTANT VICE CHANCELLOR (STUDENT AFFAIRS & ALUMNI)
PROF. DR. MUHAMMAD GHAZIE BIN ISMAIL
ASSISTANT VICE CHANCELLOR (INDUSTRY & COMMUNITY NETWORK)
HASAN BIN SIRUN
Registrar
KHAIRUL BIN TAIB
Bursar
FARIDAH BINTI HJ MD AMIN
Chief Librarian
REGISTRAR BURSAR CHIEF LIBRARIAN
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
10
8
To provide quality programmes in engineering technology that will drive students toward achieving their educational objectives, professional goals and an engagement to life-long learning.
Our vision is to be one of the best engineering technology educational providers, well recognized locally, nationally and internationally for its achievements.
Towards Engineering Technology Educational Excellence
FTK MISSION
FTK VISION
FTK MOTTO
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
11
9
1. To provide high quality and demanding engineering technology programme that meet current need of industry and society.
2. To produce highly skilled and competence workforce that is recognized by professional bodies nationally and internationally.
3. To implement modern and innovative approaches in our teaching and learning environment. 4. To establish network, good relationship and collaboration with universities and industries. 5. To participate in activities that supports the intellectual and economic development of
business, industry, government and stakeholders.
1. To produce engineering technologist who is competent and able to apply principles of science and engineering for solving current problems in engineering technology fields.
2. To produce engineering technologist who is responsible to the Creator, nation and society, ethical in discharging their duties and have high moral values.
3. To produce engineering technologist who is creative and innovative in research and development to meet the needs of the nation.
4. To produce engineering technologist who can function in team environments, communicate effectively and demonstrate leadership qualities.
5. To produce engineering technologist who is able to exhibit a desire for life-long learning through continuous technical training and professional development.
FTK OBJECTIVES
FTK PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEO)
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
12
10
ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR MOHD RAHIMI BIN YUSOFF
Dean
AHMAD ZUBIR BIN JAMIL
Deputy Dean (Academic)
ROHANA BINTI ABDULLAH
Deputy Dean (Research & Industry Network)
ENGR. ASRI BIN DIN Head of Department
(Electric)
ROSTAM AFFENDI
BIN HAMZAH Head of Department
(Electronic &
NUR RASHID BIN MAT
NURI @ MD DIN Head of Department
(Mechanical)
ENGR. ZOLKARNAIN
BIN MARJOM Head of Department
(Manufacturing)
AZHAR BIN MOHD
SALLEH Principal Assistant
Registrar
FTK ADMINISTRATION
ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR MOHD RAHIMI BIN YUSOFFDEAN
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
13
11
Computer)
FTK currently offers the following Bachelor’s Degree programmes:
No Programme Name Short Code 1 Bachelor's Degree in Electrical Engineering Technology
(Industrial Power) with Honours BTEK
2 Bachelor's Degree in Electrical Engineering Technology (Industrial Automation & Robotics) with Honours
BTEA
3 Bachelor's Degree in Electronics Engineering Technology (Telecommunications) with Honours
BTNT
4 Bachelor's Degree in Electronics Engineering Technology (Industrial Electronics) with Honours
BTNE
5 Bachelor's Degree in Computer Engineering Technology (Computer Systems) with Honours
BTCS
6 Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Automotive Technology) with Honours
BTMA
7 Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Systems) with Honours
BTMH
8 Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Maintenance Technology) with Honours
BTMT
9 Bachelor's Degree in Manufacturing Engineering Technology (Process and Technology) with Honours
BTPP
10 Bachelor's Degree in Manufacturing Engineering Technology (Product Design) with Honours
BTPD
COURSES OFFERED
11
Computer)
FTK currently offers the following Bachelor’s Degree programmes:
No Programme Name Short Code 1 Bachelor's Degree in Electrical Engineering Technology
(Industrial Power) with Honours BTEK
2 Bachelor's Degree in Electrical Engineering Technology (Industrial Automation & Robotics) with Honours
BTEA
3 Bachelor's Degree in Electronics Engineering Technology (Telecommunications) with Honours
BTNT
4 Bachelor's Degree in Electronics Engineering Technology (Industrial Electronics) with Honours
BTNE
5 Bachelor's Degree in Computer Engineering Technology (Computer Systems) with Honours
BTCS
6 Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Automotive Technology) with Honours
BTMA
7 Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Systems) with Honours
BTMH
8 Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Maintenance Technology) with Honours
BTMT
9 Bachelor's Degree in Manufacturing Engineering Technology (Process and Technology) with Honours
BTPP
10 Bachelor's Degree in Manufacturing Engineering Technology (Product Design) with Honours
BTPD
COURSES OFFERED
11
Computer)
FTK currently offers the following Bachelor’s Degree programmes:
No Programme Name Short Code 1 Bachelor's Degree in Electrical Engineering Technology
(Industrial Power) with Honours BTEK
2 Bachelor's Degree in Electrical Engineering Technology (Industrial Automation & Robotics) with Honours
BTEA
3 Bachelor's Degree in Electronics Engineering Technology (Telecommunications) with Honours
BTNT
4 Bachelor's Degree in Electronics Engineering Technology (Industrial Electronics) with Honours
BTNE
5 Bachelor's Degree in Computer Engineering Technology (Computer Systems) with Honours
BTCS
6 Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Automotive Technology) with Honours
BTMA
7 Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Systems) with Honours
BTMH
8 Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Maintenance Technology) with Honours
BTMT
9 Bachelor's Degree in Manufacturing Engineering Technology (Process and Technology) with Honours
BTPP
10 Bachelor's Degree in Manufacturing Engineering Technology (Product Design) with Honours
BTPD
COURSES OFFERED
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
14
12
The Bachelor’s Degree duration is within minimum of 4 years and up to maximum of 6 years.
A student’s achievement for each subject is based on the grades which are illustrated in Table 1.
Marks Grade Points Achievements
80 – 100 75 – 79 70 – 74 65 – 69 60 – 64 55 – 59 50 – 54 47 – 49 44 – 46 40 – 43 0 – 39
A A- B+ B B- C+ C C- D+ D E
4.0 3.7 3.3 3.0 2.7 2.3 2.0 1.7 1.3 1.0 0.0
Distinction Distinction
Merit Merit Merit Pass Pass
Conditional Pass Conditional Pass Conditional Pass
Fail
Table 1: Marks, Grades and Points Awarded
COURSE DURATION
GRADING SYSTEM
12
The Bachelor’s Degree duration is within minimum of 4 years and up to maximum of 6 years.
A student’s achievement for each subject is based on the grades which are illustrated in Table 1.
Marks Grade Points Achievements
80 – 100 75 – 79 70 – 74 65 – 69 60 – 64 55 – 59 50 – 54 47 – 49 44 – 46 40 – 43 0 – 39
A A- B+ B B- C+ C C- D+ D E
4.0 3.7 3.3 3.0 2.7 2.3 2.0 1.7 1.3 1.0 0.0
Distinction Distinction
Merit Merit Merit Pass Pass
Conditional Pass Conditional Pass Conditional Pass
Fail
Table 1: Marks, Grades and Points Awarded
COURSE DURATION
GRADING SYSTEM
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
15
13
A student’s achievement is evaluated based on Grade Point Average (GPA) and Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA). A student’s academic status will be provided at the end of each semester based on CGPA as shown in Table 2.
STATUS CGPA
Good (KB) CGPA ≥ 2.00
Conditional (KS) 1.70 ≤ CGPA < 2.00
Fail (KG) CGPA < 1.70
Table 2: Academic Status Classification
(Note: KB = Kedudukan Baik, KS = Kedudukan Bersyarat, KG = Kedudukan Gagal)
Students are free to take subjects offered by the faculty at any semester based on their capability, as long as it complies with the rules and regulations set up by the faculty and university academic board. Students need to plan their own study carefully and the faculty shall appoint an academic advisor to guide them during their duration of study in the university.
Characteristics of the Semester System: Students are free to take any subjects offered in each semester based on their ability; and
conditions of subject selection are determined by the faculty and university’s academics regulations.
Students should plan their study and learning appropriately or as advised by their academic advisor.
ACADEMIC CLASSIFICATION
ACADEMIC ADVISORY SYSTEM
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
16
14
The Importance of Academic Advisor: Students need to be guided in term of subjects taken under the semester system, where they are
free to determine the number of subjects to be taken based on their capability or in case the student obtained a Conditional Position (KS) in the previous semester. They need to plan carefully to take subjects which are suitable for them to carry and fully aware on its implication to their whole study period in the university.
Semester system is a flexible system for a student with high, moderate or less capability to complete their study based on their own capability whilst complying with the maximum study period set up by the university.
The academic advisor is able to provide an advice not only in the academic matter, but also in the aspects of how the students can adapt themselves to the semester system, culture shock of studying in the university, time management and private matters that may affect the students’ study performance.
In the condition where the student is not with the same batch of other students during the study period due to difference in the subjects taken, difficulty may be expected for him/her to discuss on the matter of study with the others. Thereby, the role of academic advisor is important.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
17
15
Roles and Responsibilities of student and academic advisor in the Academic Advisory System are as follows:
Academic Advisor Student
Conduct a meeting with students at least twice every semester.
Always be open-minded when meeting with the academic advisor.
Make sure to student understand the academic system in UTeM.
Attend meetings conducted by the academic advisor.
Guide and make sure student’s subjects registration is based on his/her current academic result.
Regard the academic advisor as a mentor and seek advice on the academic matters from them.
Supervise the student study progress and provide guidance in making a good study planning.
Learn to have a good understanding of the academic system.
Inspire students so that they will always be motivated in their study.
Provide a copy of examination result to the academic advisor for each semester.
Ensure the student’s record and file is always updated – make sure no subject is missed to fulfill the requirement for the award of a Bachelor’s Degree.
Get the certification of registration form, copy of certificates and reference letter from the academic advisor.
Refer the student to certain department/centre for further action if necessary.
Keep records on all subjects that have already been taken during the period of study to prevent missed subject and fulfill the requirement for degree award.
15
Roles and Responsibilities of student and academic advisor in the Academic Advisory System are as follows:
Academic Advisor Student
Conduct a meeting with students at least twice every semester.
Always be open-minded when meeting with the academic advisor.
Make sure to student understand the academic system in UTeM.
Attend meetings conducted by the academic advisor.
Guide and make sure student’s subjects registration is based on his/her current academic result.
Regard the academic advisor as a mentor and seek advice on the academic matters from them.
Supervise the student study progress and provide guidance in making a good study planning.
Learn to have a good understanding of the academic system.
Inspire students so that they will always be motivated in their study.
Provide a copy of examination result to the academic advisor for each semester.
Ensure the student’s record and file is always updated – make sure no subject is missed to fulfill the requirement for the award of a Bachelor’s Degree.
Get the certification of registration form, copy of certificates and reference letter from the academic advisor.
Refer the student to certain department/centre for further action if necessary.
Keep records on all subjects that have already been taken during the period of study to prevent missed subject and fulfill the requirement for degree award.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
18
16
A student’s overall achievement is based on Grade Point Average (GPA) obtained for a particular semester and Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) for the semesters that have been completed. Grade Point Average (GPA): GPA is the grade point average obtained in a particular semester. It is based on the following calculations:
Total Points, JMN = k1m1 + k2m2 + ........knmn
Total Calculated Credits, JKK = k1 + k2 + ........kn
GPA = JMN / JKK = [k1m1 + k2m2 + ........knmn] / [k1 + k2 + ........kn]
Where : kn = Credit for n subject
mn = Points from the n subject Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) : CGPA is the cumulative grade point average obtained for the semesters that have been completed. It is based on the following calculations:
CGPA = [JMN1 + JMN2 + ........JMNn] / [JKK1 + JKK2 + ........JKKn] Where : JMNn = Total points obtained in n semester JKKn = Total credits in n semester
GPA & CGPA CALCULATION
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
19
17
A Bachelor’s Degree shall be awarded if all the following conditions are fulfilled by the student: 1. Must get Good (KB) status in the final semester. 2. Pass all the subjects required as listed in the course curriculum. 3. Apply for the award of the degree, approved by the faculty and certified by senate. 4. Pass MUET according to the university directive. 5. Meet all the other university requirements.
AWARD
17
A Bachelor’s Degree shall be awarded if all the following conditions are fulfilled by the student: 1. Must get Good (KB) status in the final semester. 2. Pass all the subjects required as listed in the course curriculum. 3. Apply for the award of the degree, approved by the faculty and certified by senate. 4. Pass MUET according to the university directive. 5. Meet all the other university requirements.
AWARD
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
20
CURRICULUM STRUCTURE
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
22
19
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 1
BTES 1113 Linear Algebra P 3
BTEU 1114 Digital Electronics & Systems K 4
BTEU 1112 Computer Aided Design K 2
BTEU 1123 Electric Circuit I K 3
BTEA 1113 Measurement K 3
BLHW 1013 Foundation English
W 3
OR
BLHL 1xx2 Third Language
BKKx xxxx Co-Curriculum I W 1
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
SEMESTER 2
BTES 1213 Calculus P 3
BTEU 1231 Engineering Seminar I P 1
BTEU 1211 Electrical Workshop I K 1
BTEP 1213 Electric & Magnetism K 3
BTEE 1213 Electronic Devices K 3
BTEU 1213 Electric Circuit II K 3
BTIG 1213 Computer Programming K 3
BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
CURRICULUM STRUCTURE
BTEK Bachelor's Degree in Electrical Engineering Technology (Industrial Power) with Honours
19
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 1
BTES 1113 Linear Algebra P 3
BTEU 1114 Digital Electronics & Systems K 4
BTEU 1112 Computer Aided Design K 2
BTEU 1123 Electric Circuit I K 3
BTEA 1113 Measurement K 3
BLHW 1013 Foundation English
W 3
OR
BLHL 1xx2 Third Language
BKKx xxxx Co-Curriculum I W 1
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
SEMESTER 2
BTES 1213 Calculus P 3
BTEU 1231 Engineering Seminar I P 1
BTEU 1211 Electrical Workshop I K 1
BTEP 1213 Electric & Magnetism K 3
BTEE 1213 Electronic Devices K 3
BTEU 1213 Electric Circuit II K 3
BTIG 1213 Computer Programming K 3
BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
CURRICULUM STRUCTURE
BTEK Bachelor's Degree in Electrical Engineering Technology (Industrial Power) with Honours
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
23
20
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 3
BTES 2313 Engineering Mathematic P 3
BTEU 2312 Electrical Workshop II K 2
BTCG 2313 Static & Thermodynamic K 3
BTEP 2314 Electrical Technology K 4
BTEE 2313 Analog Electronics K 3
BLHW 2403 Technical English W 3
BKKx xxxx Co-Curriculum II W 1
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
SEMESTER 4
BTES 2413 Statistics & Applications P 3
BTEA 2424 Embedded System K 4
BTEE 2413 Electric Machine K 3
BTEP 2413 Power Engineering I K 3
BTEA 2413 Instrumentation System K 3
BLHW 1732 Malaysian Sosio-Economic Development
W 2
OR
BLHW 1722
Philosophy of Science & Technology
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 5
BLHW 3403 English for Professional Communication
W 3
BTEA 3513 Control System I K 3
BTEE 3513 Power Electronics K 3
BTEP 3513 Power Engineering II K 3
BTEA 3524 PLC & Application K 4
BTEP 3523 Power Distribution System Design K 3
BTEU 3531 Engineering Seminar II P 1
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
24
21
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 6
BTEU 3612 Industrial Safety & Health K 2
BTEU 3613 Final Year Project I K 3
BLHW 2712 Ethnic Relations W 2
BLHC 4032 Compulsory Elective Subject W 2
BTEE 3613 Electrical Actuators & Drives K 3
BTEP 3613 Energy Efficiency K 3
BTEU 3513 Communication System K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 7
BTEU 4713 Engineering Ethics P 3
BTEP 4713 Power System Operation & Automation
E 6
OR
BTEU 4733 Quality Improvement Tools
OR
BTEP 4733 High Voltage Technology
BTEU 4725 Final Year Project II K 5
BPTU 1032 Techno Entrepreneurship W 2
BLHC 4062 Project Management W 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 8 BTEU 4810 Industrial Training K 10
BTEU 4812 Industrial Training Report K 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 12
TOTAL CREDITS 143
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
25
22
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 1
BLHW 1013 OR
BLHL 1xxx
Foundation English OR Third- Language THIRD LANGUAGE
W 3
BKKx xxxx Co-Curriculum I W 1
BTES 1113 Linear Algebra P 3
BTEU 1112 Computer Aided Design K 2
BTEU 1123 Electric Circuit I K 3
BTEU 1114 Digital Electronics & Systems K 4
BTEA 1113 Measurement K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
SEMESTER 2
BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2
BTES 1213 Calculus P 3
BTEU 1231 Engineering Seminar I P 1
BTEU 1211 Electrical Workshop I K 1
BTEP 1213 Electric & Magnetism K 3
BTEU 1213 Electric Circuit II K 3
BTEE 1213 Electronic Devices K 3
BTIG 1213 Computer Programming K 3 TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
BTEA Bachelor's Degree in Electrical Engineering Technology (Industrial Automation & Robotics) with Honours
22
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 1
BLHW 1013 OR
BLHL 1xxx
Foundation English OR Third- Language THIRD LANGUAGE
W 3
BKKx xxxx Co-Curriculum I W 1
BTES 1113 Linear Algebra P 3
BTEU 1112 Computer Aided Design K 2
BTEU 1123 Electric Circuit I K 3
BTEU 1114 Digital Electronics & Systems K 4
BTEA 1113 Measurement K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
SEMESTER 2
BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2
BTES 1213 Calculus P 3
BTEU 1231 Engineering Seminar I P 1
BTEU 1211 Electrical Workshop I K 1
BTEP 1213 Electric & Magnetism K 3
BTEU 1213 Electric Circuit II K 3
BTEE 1213 Electronic Devices K 3
BTIG 1213 Computer Programming K 3 TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
BTEA Bachelor's Degree in Electrical Engineering Technology (Industrial Automation & Robotics) with Honours
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
26
23
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 3
BLHW 2403 Technical English W 3
BKKx xxxx Co-Curriculum II W 1
BTES 2313 Engineering Mathematic P 3
BTEU 2312 Electrical Workshop II K 2
BTEE 2313 Analog Electronics K 3
BTEP 2314 Electrical Technology K 4
BTCG 2313 Static & Mechanics K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
SEMESTER 4
BLHW 1732 OR
BLHW 1722
Malaysian Socio-Economic Development OR Philosophy of Science & Technology
W 2
BTES 2413 Statistics & Applications P 3
BTEA 2424 Embedded System K 4 BTEA 2413 Control Systems I K 3 BTEE 2413 Electrical Machines K 3
BTCG 2413 Fluid Mechanics K 3 TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 5
BLHW 3403 English for Professional Communication
W 3
BTEU 3531 Engineering Seminar II P 1 BTEA 3513 Control Systems II K 3
BTEU 3523 Data Communications & Computer Network
K 3
BTEA 3524 PLC & Application K 4 BTEA 2413 Instrumentation Systems K 3
BTEP 3513 Power Engineering I K 3 TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
27
24
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 6
BLHW 2712 Ethnic Relations W 2
BLHC 4xxx Compulsory Elective Subject W 2
BTEU 3612 Industrial Safety & Health P 2
BTEA 3613 Industrial Robotic K 3 BTEE 3613 Electrical Actuators & Drives K 3
BTEA 3623 Pneumatic & Hydraulic K 3 BTEU 3613 Final Year Project I K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 7
BPTU 1032 Techno-Entrepreneurship W 2
BLHC 4062 Project Management W 2 BTEU 4713 Engineering Ethics P 3
BTEA 4713 OR
BTEA 4733
Flexible Manufacturing System OR Industrial Process Control
E 3
BTEA 4723 OR
BTEA 4743
Machine Vision OR Distributed Control System
E 3
BTEU 4715 Final Year Project II K 5 TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 8 BTEU 4810 Industrial Training K 10
BTEU 4812 Industrial Training Report K 2 TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 12
TOTAL CREDITS 143
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
28
25
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 1
BLHW 1013 Foundation English W 3
BLHW 1722 Philosophy of Science & Technology W 2
BLHW 2712 Ethnic Relations W 2
BKKx xxxx Co-Curriculum I W 1
BTNH 1263 Algebra & Calculus P 3
BTNH 1123 Technical Physics P 3
BTNT 1013 Electric Circuit I P 3
BTNE 1013 Engineering Workshop I P 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
SEMESTER 2
BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2
BTNH 1273 Differential Equation P 3
BTCS 1213 Programming Fundamentals P 3
BTNE 1023 Engineering Workshop II P 3 BTNE 1013
BTNT 1023 Electric Circuit II P 3 BTNT 1013
BTNE 1113 Electronic I P 3
BTNE 2323 Electrical Technology P 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
BTNT Bachelor's Degree in Electronics Engineering Technology (Telecommunications) with Honours
25
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 1
BLHW 1013 Foundation English W 3
BLHW 1722 Philosophy of Science & Technology W 2
BLHW 2712 Ethnic Relations W 2
BKKx xxxx Co-Curriculum I W 1
BTNH 1263 Algebra & Calculus P 3
BTNH 1123 Technical Physics P 3
BTNT 1013 Electric Circuit I K 3
BTNE 1013 Engineering Workshop I K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
SEMESTER 2
BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2
BTNH 1273 Differential Equation P 3 BTNH 1263
BTCS 1213 Programming Fundamentals K 3
BTNE 1023 Engineering Workshop II K 3 BTNE 1013
BTNT 1023 Electric Circuit II K 3 BTNT 1013
BTNE 1113 Electronic I K 3
BTNE 2323 Electrical Technology K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
BTNT Bachelor's Degree in Electronics Engineering Technology (Telecommunications) with Honours
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
29
26
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 3
BLHW 2403 Technical English W 3
BKKx xxxx Co-Curriculum II W 1
BTNE 1123 Electronic II K 3 BTNE 1113
BTCS 2134 Digital Electronic K 4
BTNE 2223 Control Principles K 4
BTNT 2033 Continuous Signal & System K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 4
BTNH 2123 Statistics & Numerical Methods P 3
BTNE 2114 Electronic III K 4 BTNE 1123
BTCS 2113 Fundamental of Microprocessor & Microcontroller
K 3
BTNT 2084 Data Communication & Networking K 4
BTNT 2053 Communication Principle K 3
BTNT 2063 Discrete Signal & System K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
SEMESTER 5
BLHW 3403 English for Professional Communication
W 3
BLHC 4052 Technopreneurship P 2
BTNE 4713 Quality Management P 3
BTNT 3073 Telecommunication System K 3
BTNT 3043 Telecommunication Electronic K 3
BTNT 3093 Digital Signal Processing K 3
BTNT 3103 Electromagnetic K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
30
27
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 6
BLHL xxxx Third Language W 2
BLHC 4062 Project Management P 2
BTNT 3123 Digital Communication K 3
BTNT 3113 Telecommunication Switching System
K 3
BTNU 3804 Final Year Project I K 4
BTNT 3134 RF Technique & Microwave K 4
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 7
BLHW 4032 Critical & Creative Thinking W 2
BTNU 4843 Engineering Technology Ethics P 3
BTNU4814 Final Year Project II K 4
BTNT xxxx Elective I* E 3
BTNT xxxx Elective II* E 3
BTNT xxxx Elective III* E 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 8 BTNU 4826 Industrial Training P 6
BTNU 4836 Industrial Training Report P 6
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 12
TOTAL CREDITS 146
*For Elective I, II and III students may choose any 3 subjects from the list below:
No. Subject Code Subject Name 1 BTNT 4403 Satellite Communication 2 BTNT 4413 Mobile Communication 3 BTNT 4423 Optical Communications & Optoelectronic 4 BTNT 4433 Antenna Engineering
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
31
28
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT HOUR
PRE-REQUISITE
SEMESTER 1
BLHW 1013 Foundation English W 3
BKKx xxxx Co-Curriculum I W 1
BLHW 1722 Philosophy of Science & Technology W 2
BTNH 1263 Algebra & Calculus P 3
BTNH 1123 Technical Physics P 3
BTNE 1013 Engineering Workshop I K 3
BTNT 1013 Electric Circuit I K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 2
BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum II W 1
BLHH 1032 Industrial Psychology & Organisation W 2
BTNH 1273 Differential Equation P 3 BTNH 1263
BTNE 1023 Engineering Workshop II K 3 BTNE 1013
BTNT 1023 Electric Circuit II K 3 BTNT 1013
BTNE 1113 Electronic I K 3
BTCS 1213 Programming Fundamental K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 3
BLHW 2403 Technical English W 3
BTNH 2123 Statistics & Numerical Methods P 3 BTNH 1273
BTCS 1223 Advanced Programming K 3
BTNE 1123 Electronic II K 3 BTNE 1113
BTCS 2134 Digital Electronic K 4
BTNE 2033 Engineering Drawing K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
BTNE Bachelor's Degree in Electronics Engineering Technology (Industrial Electronics) with Honours
28
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT HOUR
PRE-REQUISITE
SEMESTER 1
BLHW 1013 Foundation English W 3
BKKx xxxx Co-Curriculum I W 1
BLHW 1722 Philosophy of Science & Technology W 2
BTNH 1263 Algebra & Calculus P 3
BTNH 1123 Technical Physics P 3
BTNE 1013 Engineering Workshop I K 3
BTNT 1013 Electric Circuit I K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 2
BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum II W 1
BLHH 1032 Industrial Psychology & Organisation W 2
BTNH 1273 Differential Equation P 3 BTNH 1263
BTNE 1023 Engineering Workshop II K 3 BTNE 1013
BTNT 1023 Electric Circuit II K 3 BTNT 1013
BTNE 1113 Electronic I K 3
BTCS 1213 Programming Fundamental K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 3
BLHW 2403 Technical English W 3
BTNH 2123 Statistics & Numerical Methods P 3 BTNH 1273
BTCS 1223 Advanced Programming K 3 BTCS 1213
BTNE 1123 Electronic II K 3 BTNE 1113
BTCS 2134 Digital Electronic K 4
BTNE 2033 Engineering Drawing K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
BTNE Bachelor's Degree in Electronics Engineering Technology (Industrial Electronics) with Honours
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
32
29
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT HOUR
PRE-REQUISITE
SEMESTER 4
BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2
BLHW 2712 Ethnic Relations W 2
BLHH 1032 Project Management P 2
BTNT 2053 Communication Principle K 3
BTNE 2114 Electronic III K 4 BTNE 1123
BTNE 2224 Control Principles K 4
BTNE 2323 Electrical Technology K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
SEMESTER 5
BLHW 3403 English for Professional Communication W 3
BTNE 3234 Industrial Control K 4
BTCS 3134 Microprocessor & Microcontroller Technology
K 4
BTNE 3454 Process Instrumentation K 4
BTNE 3714 Data Acquisition & Sensors K 4
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
SEMESTER 6
BLHL xxxx Third Language W 2
BLHC 4052 Technopreneurship P 2
BTNE 3424 Industrial Pneumatics K 4
BTNE 3724 Embedded System K 4
BTNU 3804 Final Year Project I K 4
BTNE xxxx Elective I* E 4
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
SEMESTER 7
BLHW 4032 Critical & Creative Thinking W 2
BTNU 4843 Engineering Technology Ethics P 3
BTNE 4434 Industrial Automation K 4
BTNE 4713 Quality Management K 3
BTNU 4814 Final Year Project II K 4 BTNU 3804
BTNE xxxx Elective II** E 4
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
33
30
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT HOUR
PRE-REQUISITE
SEMESTER 8 BTNU 4826 Industrial Training P 6
BTNU 4836 Industrial Training Assessment P 6
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 12
TOTAL CREDITS 146
*For Elective I students may choose any ONE (1) subject from the list below:
No. Subject Code Subject Name 1 BTNE 3354 Power Electronic 2 BTCS 4324 Computer Interfacing
**For Elective II students may choose any ONE (1) subject from the list below:
No. Subject Code Subject Name 1 BTNE 4344 Electric Drives & Control 2 BTNE 4454 Industrial Robotic
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
34
31
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT HOUR
PRE-REQUISITE
SEMESTER 1
BLHW 1013 Foundation English W 3
BLHW 1722 Philosophy of Science & Technology W 2
BTNH 1263 Algebra & Calculus P 3
BTNH 1123 Technical Physics P 3 BTCS 1113 Basic Electronics K 3
BTCS 1003 Computer Engineering Workshop I K 3
BTCS 1213 Programming Fundamental K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
SEMESTER 2
BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2
BKKx xxxx Co-Curriculum I W 1
BLHW 2712 Ethnic Relations W 2
BTNH 1273 Differential Equation P 3 BTNH 1263
BTNT 1013 Electric Circuit K 3
BTCS 1013 Computer Engineering Workshop II K 3 BTCS 1003
BTCS 1313 Database Management System K 3
BTCS 1223 Advanced Programming K 3 BTCS 1213
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
BTCS Bachelor's Degree in Computer Engineering Technology (Computer Systems) with Honours
31
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT HOUR
PRE-REQUISITE
SEMESTER 1
BLHW 1013 Foundation English W 3
BLHW 1722 Philosophy of Science & Technology W 2
BTNH 1263 Algebra & Calculus P 3
BTNH 1123 Technical Physics P 3 BTCS 1113 Basic Electronics K 3
BTCS 1003 Computer Engineering Workshop I K 3
BTCS 1213 Programming Fundamental K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
SEMESTER 2
BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2
BKKx xxxx Co-Curriculum I W 1
BLHW 2712 Ethnic Relations W 2
BTNH 1273 Differential Equation P 3 BTNH 1263
BTNT 1013 Electric Circuit K 3
BTCS 1013 Computer Engineering Workshop II K 3 BTCS 1003
BTCS 1313 Database Management System K 3
BTCS 1223 Advanced Programming K 3 BTCS 1213
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
BTCS Bachelor's Degree in Computer Engineering Technology (Computer Systems) with Honours
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
35
32
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT HOUR
PRE-REQUISITE
SEMESTER 3
BLHW 2403 Technical English W 3
BKKx xxxx Co-Curriculum II W 1
BTNH 2123 Statistics & Numerical Methods P 3 BTNH 1273
BTCS 2223 Data Structure & Algorithm K 3 BTCS 1223
BTNT 2053 Communication Principle K 3
BTNT 2143 Signal & Systems K 3
BTNE 2323 Electrical Technology K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
SEMESTER 4
BLHL xxxx Third Language W 2
BTCS 2313 Computer Organization & Architecture K 3
BTCS 2173 Computer Network & System K 3
BTCS 2123 Internet Technology & Multimedia K 3
BTCS 2213 Operating Systems K 3
BTCS 2134 Digital Electronics K 4
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 5
BLHW 3403 English for Professional Communication W 3
BLHC 4072 Engineering Management P 2
BTCS 3123 Discrete Mathematics K 3 BTNH 2123
BTCS 3323 Computer System Engineering K 3
BTCS 3423 Computer Network & Security K 3 BTCS 2173
BTCS 3134 Microprocessor & Microcontroller Technology
K 4 BTCS 2134
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
36
33
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT HOUR
PRE-REQUISITE
SEMESTER 6
BLHC 4052 Technopreneurship P 2
BTNU 3804 Final Year Project I K 4
BTCS 4213 Software Engineering K 3
BTCS 3133 Digital Signal Processing K 3 BTNT 2143
BTCS xxxx Elective I* E 4
BTCS xxxx Elective II* E 4
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
SEMESTER 7
BLHW 4032 Critical & Creative Thinking W 2
BTNU 4843 Engineering Technology Ethics P 3
BTNU 4814 Final Year Project II K 4 BTNU 3804
BTNE 4713 Quality Management K 3
BTCS 3313 Embedded System K 3
BTCS xxxx Elective III* E 4
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
SEMESTER 8 BTNU 4826 Industrial Training P 6
BTNU 4836 Industrial Training Assessment P 6
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 12
TOTAL CREDITS 146
*For Elective I, II and III students may choose any 3 subjects from the list below:
No. Subject Code Subject Name 1 BTCS 4314 Real Time Systems 2 BTCS 4324 Computer Interfacing 3 BTCS 4334 VLSI Design & Fabrication 4 BTCS 4344 Image & Video Processing
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
37
34
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 1
BTMU 1132 Physics P 2
BTMU 1142 Chemistry P 2
BTMU 1172 Mechanical Engineering Mathematics
P 2
BTMU 1213 Engineering Graphics P 3
BTMU 1323 Materials Science P 3
BTMU 1543 Principle of Electric And Electronic P 3
BLHW 1013 Foundation English W 3
BLHL xxx2 Third Language W 2
BKKX xxx1 Co-Curriculum 1 W 1
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
SEMESTER 2
BTMU 1162 Numerical Method P 2
BTMU 1223 Engineering Design P 3
BTMU 1313 Statics P 3
BTMU 1413 Technology Workshop P 3
BTMU 1512 Experiment Method P 2
BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2
BLHW 1732 Malaysian Socio-Economic Development
W 2
BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum 2 W 1
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
BTMA Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Automotive Technology) with Honours
34
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 1
BTMU 1132 Physics P 2
BTMU 1142 Chemistry P 2
BTMU 1172 Mechanical Engineering Mathematics
P 2
BTMU 1213 Engineering Graphics P 3
BTMU 1323 Materials Science P 3
BTMU 1543 Principle of Electric And Electronic P 3
BLHW 1013 Foundation English W 3
BLHL xxx2 Third Language W 2
BKKX xxx1 Co-Curriculum 1 W 1
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
SEMESTER 2
BTMU 1162 Numerical Method P 2
BTMU 1223 Engineering Design P 3
BTMU 1313 Statics P 3
BTMU 1413 Technology Workshop P 3
BTMU 1512 Experiment Method P 2
BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2
BLHW 1732 Malaysian Socio-Economic Development
W 2
BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum 2 W 1
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
BTMA Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Automotive Technology) with Honours
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
38
35
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 3
BTMU 2123 Microprocessor Technology P 3
BTMU 2423 Manufacturing Process P 3
BTMU 2613 Thermodynamics P 3
BTMU 2623 Fluid Mechanics P 3 BTMU 1313
BLHW 2403 Technical English W 3
BLHW 2712 Ethnic Relations W 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 17
SEMESTER 4
BTMU 2113 Computer Programming P 3
BTMU 2142 Statistics P 2
BTMU 2152 Differential Equation P 2
BTMU 2233 Modeling & Computer Analysis P 3 BTMU 1213
BTMU 2333 Solid Mechanics P 3
BTMU 2523 Dynamics & Mechanics of Machine P 3 BTMU 1313
BLHL xxx2 Compulsory Elective Subject W 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SHORT SEMESTER 1
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER
SEMESTER 5
BTMU 3523 Control & Instrumentation P 3 BTMU 1543
BTMA 3714 Engine Technology K 4
BTMA 3723 Automotive Electric & Electronic System
K 3 BTMU 1543
BTMA 3733 Vehicle Dynamics K 3
BTMA 3813 Vehicle Brake System K 3
BTMA 3823 Vehicle Design and Testing K 3 BTMU 2523
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
39
36
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 6
BTMA 3743 Automotive HVAC K 3
BTMA 3754 Vehicle Engine and Transmission System
K 4 BTMA 3714
BTMA 3763 Powertrain Management System K 3
BTMA 3833 Automotive Ergonomic K 3
BTMA 3883 Automotive Project 1 K 3
BLHW 3403 English for Professional Communication
W 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
SHORT SEMESTER 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER
SEMESTER 7
BTMU 4922 Engineering Ethics & OSHA P 2
BTMU 4952 Techno Entrepreneur P 2
BTMA 4843 Vehicle Suspension System K 3
BTMA 4854 Vehicle Transmission System K 4
BTMA 4863 Automotive Safety & Comfort System
K 3 BTMA 3723
BTMA 4873 Design And Simulation Vehicle System
K 3
BTMA 4893 Automotive Project 2 K 3 BTMA 3883
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
SEMESTER 8 BTMU 4936 Industrial Training K 6
BTMU 4946 Industrial Training Report K 6
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 12
TOTAL CREDITS 142
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
40
37
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 1
BTMU 1132 Physics P 2
BTMU 1142 Chemistry P 2
BTMU 1172 Mechanical Engineering Mathematics
P 2
BTMU 1213 Engineering Graphic P 3
BTMU 1413 Technology Workshop P 3
BTMU 1512 Experimental Method P 2
BLHW 1013 Foundation English W 3
BLHL xxx2 Third Language W 2
BLHW 2712 Ethnic Relations W 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
SEMESTER 2
BTMU 1162 Numerical Methods P 2
BTMU 1223 Engineering Design P 3
BTMU 1313 Statics P 3
BTMU 1323 Materials Science P 3
BTMU 1543 Principle Of Electric & Electronic P 3
BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2
BLHW 1732 Malaysian Socio-Economic Development
W 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
BTMH Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Refrigeration & Air-Conditioning Systems) with Honours
37
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 1
BTMU 1132 Physics P 2
BTMU 1142 Chemistry P 2
BTMU 1172 Mechanical Engineering Mathematics
P 2
BTMU 1213 Engineering Graphic P 3
BTMU 1413 Technology Workshop P 3
BTMU 1512 Experimental Method P 2
BLHW 1013 Foundation English W 3
BLHL xxx2 Third Language W 2
BLHW 2712 Ethnic Relations W 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
SEMESTER 2
BTMU 1162 Numerical Methods P 2
BTMU 1223 Engineering Design P 3
BTMU 1313 Statics P 3
BTMU 1323 Materials Science P 3
BTMU 1543 Principle Of Electric & Electronic P 3
BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2
BLHW 1732 Malaysian Socio-Economic Development
W 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
BTMH Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Refrigeration & Air-Conditioning Systems) with Honours
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
41
38
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 3
BTMU 2123 Microprocessor Technology P 3
BTMU 2423 Manufacturing Process P 3
BTMU 2523 Dynamics & Mechanics Of Machine P 3 BTMU 1313
BTMU 2613 Thermodynamics P 3
BTMU 2623 Fluid Mechanics P 3 BTMU 1313
BLHW 2403 Technical English P 3
BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum 1 W 1
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
SEMESTER 4
BTMU 2113 Computer Programming P 3 BTMU 2142 Statistics P 2 BTMU 2152 Differential Equation P 2 BTMU 2233 Modeling & Computer Analysis P 3 BTMU 1213 BTMU 2333 Solid Mechanics P 3
BTMH 2713 Fundamental Of HVAC & Refrigeration
K 3
BLHL xxx2 Compulsory Elective Subject W 2 BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum 2 W 1
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
SHORT SEMESTER 1
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 0
SEMESTER 5
BTMU 3523 Control & Instrumentation P 3 BTMU 1543
BTMH 3723 Basic Components of Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration
K 3
BTMH 3733 Classification of Air Conditioning System
K 3
BTMH 3753 Heating & Cooling Load K 3 BTMH 3813 Maintenance Of HVAC System K 3
BLHW 3403 English for Professional Communication
W 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
42
39
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 6
BTMH 3623 Heat Transfer K 3
BTMH 3823 Air Distribution System K 3
BTMH 3773 Transportation Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration
K 3
BTMH 3763 HVAC Software & CFD K 3
BTMH 3883 HVAC Project 1 K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 15
SHORT SEMESTER 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 0
SEMESTER 7
BTMU 4922 Engineering Ethics & OSHA P 2
BTMU 4952 Techno Entrepreneur P 2
BTMH 4893 HVAC Project 2 K 3 BTMH 3883
BTMH 4843 Green Technology HVAC K 3
BTMH 4863 Applied Acoustic & Vibration for HVAC
K 3
BTMH 4873 Electrical & Control System for HVAC K 3 BTMG 1543 BTMU 3523
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 16
SEMESTER 8 BTMU 4936 Industrial Training K 6
BTMU 4946 Industrial Training Report K 6
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 12
TOTAL CREDITS 136
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
43
40
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 1
BTMU 1132 Physics P 2
BTMU 1142 Chemistry P 2
BTMU 1172 Mechanical Engineering Mathematics
P 2
BTMU 1213 Engineering Graphics P 3
BTMU 1313 Statics P 3
BTMU 1543 Principle of Electric and Electronic P 3
BLHW 1013 Foundation English W 3
BLHL xxx2 Third Language W 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 2
BTMU 1162 Numerical Method P 2
BTMU 1223 Engineering Design P 3
BTMU 1323 Materials Science P 3
BTMU 1512 Experimental Method P 2
BTMU 1413 Technology Workshop P 3
BTMU 2613 Thermodynamics P 3
BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2
BLHW 1732 Malaysian Socio-Economic Development
W 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
BTMT Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Maintenance Technology) with Honours
40
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 1
BTMU 1132 Physics P 2
BTMU 1142 Chemistry P 2
BTMU 1172 Mechanical Engineering Mathematics
P 2
BTMU 1213 Engineering Graphics P 3
BTMU 1313 Statics P 3
BTMU 1543 Principle of Electric and Electronic P 3
BLHW 1013 Foundation English W 3
BLHL xxx2 Third Language W 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 2
BTMU 1162 Numerical Method P 2
BTMU 1223 Engineering Design P 3
BTMU 1323 Materials Science P 3
BTMU 1512 Experimental Method P 2
BTMU 1413 Technology Workshop P 3
BTMU 2613 Thermodynamics P 3
BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2
BLHW 1732 Malaysian Socio-Economic Development
W 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
BTMT Bachelor's Degree in Mechanical Engineering Technology (Maintenance Technology) with Honours
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
44
41
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 3
BTMU 2333 Solid Mechanics P 3 BTMU 2423 Manufacturing Process P 3 BTMU 2623 Fluid Mechanics P 3 BTMU 1313 BTMT 2433 Machine Tool Technology K 3 BTMT 2553 Dynamic K 3 BTMU 1313 BLHW 2403 Technical English W 3 BLHW 2712 Ethnic Relations W 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
SEMESTER 4
BTMU 2142 Statistics P 2 BTMU 2152 Differential Equation P 2
BTMT 2443 Fundamental of Machine Components
K 3
BTMT 2533 Basic Control Engineering Technology
K 3
BTMT 2633 Pneumatic & Hydraulic Technology K 3 BTMT 2643 Basic Tribology K 3
BTMT 2712 Introduction To Maintenance K 2 TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SHORT SEMESTER 1
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 0
SEMESTER 5
BTMT 3723 Maintenance Technology & Asset Management
K 3
BTMT 3813 Transmission Technology K 3
BTMT 3823 Maintenance Diagnostic and Troubleshooting
K 3
BTMT 3833 Industrial Motor K 3 BTMT 3843 Mechanical Machine Maintenance K 3
BLHW 3403 English for Professional Communication
W 3
BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum 1 W 1
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
45
42
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 6
BTMT 3733 Condition Based Maintenance K 3
BTMT 3743 Vibration Analysis And Monitoring K 3
BTMT 3863 Instrument Calibration K 3
BTMT 3873 Plant Inspection K 3
BTMT 3883 Maintenance Project 1 K 3
BLHL xxx2 Compulsory Elective Subject W 2
BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum 2 W 1
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SHORT SEMESTER 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 0
SEMESTER 7
BTMU 4922 Engineering Ethics & OSHA P 2
BTMU 4952 Techno Entrepreneur P 2
BTMT 4763 Reliability, Maintainability & Risk K 3
BTMT 4773 Building Maintenance K 3
BTMT 4783 Oil & Wear Debris Analysis K 3
BTMT 4852 Maintenance Awareness in Design K 2
BTMT 4893 Maintenance Project 2 K 3 BTMT3883
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 8 BTMU 4936 Industrial Training K 6
BTMU 4946 Industrial Training Report K 6
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 12
TOTAL CREDITS 143
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
46
43
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 1
BLHW 1722 Philosophy of Science & Technology W 2
BLHW 1013 Foundation English W 3
BTPM 1113 Engineering Mathematics P 3
BTPU 1123 Engineering Statics P 3
BTPU 1114 Engineering Drawing & CAD P 4
BTPU 1133 Manufacturing Practices P 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 2
BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2
BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum I W 1
BTPM 1213 Differential Equation P 3
BTPU 1213 Strength of Materials P 3
BTEG 1213 Principles of Electric & Electronic P 3
BTIG 1213 Computer Programming P 3
BTPU 1223 Manufacturing Processes P 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 3
BLHW 2403 Technical English W 3 BLHW 2712 Ethnic Relations W 2 BTPM 2113 Statistics & Probabilities P 3 BTPU 2133 Engineering Materials P 3 BTPU 2144 Product Design & Development P 4 BTPU 2123 Mechanics of Machine P 3 BTPU 2112 Occupational Safety & Health
Management P 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
BTPP Bachelor's Degree in Manufacturing Engineering Technology (Process & Technology) with Honours
43
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 1
BLHW 1722 Philosophy of Science & Technology W 2
BLHW 1013 Foundation English W 3
BTPM 1113 Engineering Mathematics P 3
BTPU 1123 Engineering Statics P 3
BTPU 1114 Engineering Drawing & CAD P 4
BTPU 1133 Manufacturing Practices P 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 2
BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2
BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum I W 1
BTPM 1213 Differential Equation P 3
BTPU 1213 Strength of Materials P 3
BTEG 1213 Principles of Electric & Electronic P 3
BTIG 1213 Computer Programming P 3
BTPU 1223 Manufacturing Processes P 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 3
BLHW 2403 Technical English W 3 BLHW 2712 Ethnic Relations W 2 BTPM 2113 Statistics & Probabilities P 3 BTPU 2133 Engineering Materials P 3 BTPU 2144 Product Design & Development P 4 BTPU 2123 Mechanics of Machine P 3 BTPU 2112 Occupational Safety & Health
Management P 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
BTPP Bachelor's Degree in Manufacturing Engineering Technology (Process & Technology) with Honours
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
47
44
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 4
BLHC 4032 Critical & Creative Thinking W 2 BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum II W 1
BTPU 2213 Quality Control P 3
BTPU 2223 Control Systems P 3
BTPP 2214 CAD CAM K 4
BTPP 2233 Material Selection K 3
BTPP 2223 Measurement & Instrumentation K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
SHORT SEMESTER 1
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 0
SEMESTER 5
BLHW 3403 English for Professional Communication
W 3
BTPU 3114 Industrial Engineering P 4
BTPU 3123 Thermo Fluid P 3
BTPP 3114 Advanced Machining K 4
BTPP 3123 Materials Testing & Fracture Analysis K 3
BTPP 3133 Advanced Manufacturing Processes K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
SEMESTER 6
BTPU 3214 Bachelor Degree Project I P 4
BTPG 3212 Technopreneurship P 2
BTPP 3213 Jigs & Fixtures K 3
BTPP 3223 Plastics Technology K 3
BTPP 3233 Joining Technology K 3
BTPP 3243 Lean Manufacturing K 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SHORT SEMESTER 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 0
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
48
45
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 7
BLHL xxx2 Third Language W 2 BTPU 4134 Bachelor Degree Project II P 4
BTPU 4112 Engineering Ethics P 2
BTPU 4123 Sustainable Development P 3
BTPP 4113 Sheet Metal Technology K 3
BTPP 4xx4 Elective K 4
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 8 BTPU 4246 Industrial Training P 6
BTPU 4256 Industrial Training Report P 6
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 12
TOTAL CREDITS 143
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
49
46
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 1
BTPM 1113 Engineering Mathematics P 3 BTPU 1123 Engineering Statics P 3 BTPU 1114 Engineering Drawings & CAD P 4 BTPU 1133 Manufacturing Practices P 3 BLHW 1013 Foundation English W 3 BLHW 1722 Philosophy of Science & Technology W 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 2
BTPM 1213 Differential Equation P 3 BTPU 1213 Strength of Materials P 3 BTEG 1213 Principle of Electric & Electronic P 3 BTIG 1213 Computer Programming P 3 BTPU 1223 Manufacturing Processes P 3 BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2 BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum I W 1
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 3
BTPM 2113 Statistics & Probabilities P 3 BTPU 2133 Engineering Materials P 3 BTPU 2144 Product Design & Development P 4 BTPU 2123 Mechanics of Machine P 3 BTPU 2112 Occupational Safety & Health
Management P 2
BLHW 2403 Technical English W 3 BLHW 2712 Ethnic Relations W 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
BTPD Bachelor's Degree in Manufacturing Engineering Technology (Product Design) with Honours
46
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 1
BTPM 1113 Engineering Mathematics P 3 BTPU 1123 Engineering Statics P 3 BTPU 1114 Engineering Drawings & CAD P 4 BTPU 1133 Manufacturing Practices P 3 BLHW 1013 Foundation English W 3 BLHW 1722 Philosophy of Science & Technology W 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 2
BTPM 1213 Differential Equation P 3 BTPU 1213 Strength of Materials P 3 BTEG 1213 Principle of Electric & Electronic P 3 BTIG 1213 Computer Programming P 3 BTPU 1223 Manufacturing Processes P 3 BLHW 1702 Islamic & Asian Civilizations W 2 BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum I W 1
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 3
BTPM 2113 Statistics & Probabilities P 3 BTPU 2133 Engineering Materials P 3 BTPU 2144 Product Design & Development P 4 BTPU 2123 Mechanics of Machine P 3 BTPU 2112 Occupational Safety & Health
Management P 2
BLHW 2403 Technical English W 3 BLHW 2712 Ethnic Relations W 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 20
BTPD Bachelor's Degree in Manufacturing Engineering Technology (Product Design) with Honours
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
50
47
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 4
BTPU 2213 Quality Control P 3 BTPU 2223 Control System P 3 BTPD 2213 Computer Aided Manufacturing K 3 BTPD 2224 Advanced Engineering Graphics &
CAD K 4
BTPD 2233 Ergonomics Design K 3 BLHC 4032 Critical & Creative Thinking W 2 BKKx xxx1 Co-Curriculum II W 1
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19 SHORT
SEMESTER 1
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 0
SEMESTER 5
BTPU 3114 Industrial Engineering P 4 BTPU 3123 Thermo Fluid P 3 BTPD 3113 CNC Technology K 3 BTPD 3123 Design for Manufacturing &
Assembly K 3
BTPD 3133 Rapid Manufacturing K 3 BLHW 3403 English for Professional
Communication W 3
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19
SEMESTER 6
BTPU 3214 Bachelor Degree Project I P 4 BTPG 3212 Technopreneurship P 2 BTPD 3213 Production Tool Design K 3 BTPD 3223 Industrial Design K 3 BTPD 3233 Design of Machine Element K 3 BTPD 3244 Design Project K 4
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 19 SHORT
SEMESTER 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 0
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
51
48
SEMESTER CODE SUBJECT CATEGORY CREDIT PRE-
REQUISITE
SEMESTER 7
BTPU 4134 Bachelor Degree Project II P 4 BTPU 4112 Engineering Ethics P 2 BTPU 4123 Sustainable Development P 3 BTPD 4113 CAE K 3 BTPD 4xx4 Elective K 4 BLHL xxx2 Third Language W 2
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 18
SEMESTER 8 BTPU 4246 Industrial Training P 6 BTPU 4256 Industrial Training Report P 6
TOTAL CREDITS THIS SEMESTER 12 TOTAL CREDITS 143
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
52
SUMMARY OF SUBJECTS
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
54
50
SEMESTER 1 BTES 1113 LINEAR ALGEBRA LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. describe the graphs of linear equations and relate graphs of
functions to their equations. 2. express the system of linear equations into a matrix
system. 3. use the matrices methods in solving system of linear
equations. 4. solve the trigonometric equations. 5. apply the properties and the operations of complex
numbers. 6. apply the knowledge of algebra in solving engineering
problems. SYNOPSIS This course will discuss about the functions, graphs, analytic geometry, trigonometry, complex numbers and matrices. REFERENCES 1. Abd. Wahid et al, Intermediate Mathematics, UTM, 2009. 2. Robert Blitzer, Algebra and Trigonometry, Prentice Hall,
2001. 3. Earl W. Swokowski and Jeffrey A. Cole, Algebra and
Trigonometry with Analytic Geometry, 11th Edition, Brooks/Cole, 2005.
BTEU 1112 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. distinguish different engineering drawing format and types. 2. produce geometric, orthographic, isometric, section cut
and detail drawing by using CAD. 3. create in terms of 2D and basic 3D solid modeling using
standard CAD software command tool. 4. recommend an accurate engineering drawing based on
given problem. SYNOPSIS The course concentrates on Computer Aided Drafting (CAD) software. CAD software is being used to produce engineering drawing. The students will be exposed to CAD interface, editing commands, coordinate system, template preparation and layer in order to produce various types of engineering drawing. 3D drawing will also be covered. REFERENCES 1. Mohd Ramzan Zainal, Badri Abd Ghani dan Yahya Samian,
2000, Lukisan Kejuruteraan Asas, UTM, Skudai. 2. Yarwood, A., 2002, An Introduction To AutoCAD 2002,
Prentice Hall, London. 3. McFarlane, R., 1994, Introducing 3D AutoCAD, Edward
Arnold, London. 4. Mark Dix, Paul Riley, 2004, Discovering AutoCAD, Prentice
Hall, New York. 5. Mohd Rizal Alkahari, 2009, Modul Lukisan Berbantu
Komputer, Penerbit Universiti Teknikal Malaysia Melaka, Melaka.
SUBJECT DETAILS FOR JTKE PROGRAMMES
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
55
51
BTEU 1123 ELECTRIC CIRCUITS I LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. understand the fundamental Ohm’s Law and Kircchoff’s
Laws. 2. analyze DC and AC (Steady state) circuits using Mesh and
Nodal analysis. 3. analyze DC and AC (Steady state) circuits using
Superposition, Thevenin, Norton and Maximum Power Transfer Theorems.
4. simulate the operation of electric circuit using computer simulation software.
5. assemble electrical components correctly and measure electrical quantities for DC circuits.
SYNOPSIS This subject introduces the students to Ohm’s Law, Kircchoff’s Laws and use them to calculate current, voltage and power in DC / AC (steady state) circuits. Following this the students will learn the analytical methods namely mesh and nodal analysis. The use of theorems like Thevenin, Norton, Superposition and the Maximum Power Transfer will follow next. The applications of the above tools will cover both dc and ac circuits. This subject will be supported by laboratory works to impart to the students some basic practical skills. REFERENCES 1. K.A. Charles,N.O. Sadiku, Fundamentals of Electric
Circuits,3rd Ed. McGraw Hill 2. Robbins and Miller, Circuit Analysis and Practice, 3rd.Ed.,
Thomson and Delmar. 3. Nilsson and Riedel, Electric Circuits, Prentice Hall.
BTEU 1114 ELECTRONIC DIGITAL & SYSTEM LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completing this subject, students should be able to: 1. describe the common forms of number representation in
digital electronics circuits and differentiate between digital and analog representations.
2. implement simple logic operations using combinational logic circuits.
3. identify, formulate, and solve the logical operation of simple arithmetic and other MSI (Medium Scale Integrated Circuit).
4. apply the concepts of synchronous state machines using flip flop.
5. design and analyze sequential systems in terms of state machines
SYNOPSIS This subject discusses about number systems & codes, Boolean algebra, logic families and the characteristic of logic gates, combinational logic, analysis and design, MSI combinational logic circuit, flip-flops, counter and shif-register, synchronous and asynchronous sequential circuit. Analysis and design of adder, decoder, encoder, multiplexer and demultiplexer. PLD devices such as ROM, PAL, counter and register. REFERENCES 1. Thomas L. Floyd, Digital Fundamentals, Prentice Hall, 8th
Ed. 2. Ronald J. Tocci, Neals Widmer & Gregory L.Moss, Digital
Systems: Principles and Applications, Prentice Hall, 9th Ed. 3. Michael A.M. Digital Devices and Systems with PLD
Applications. Delmar Publisher. 4. Terry L.M.Bartelt, Digital Electronics: An Integrated
Laboratory Approach, Prentice Hall.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
56
52
BTEA 1113 MEASUREMENT LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. define various measurement and instrument applications
and standards. 2. use the dc/ac meter to measure current, voltage,
resistance, inductance and capacitance. 3. use the oscilloscope to display and calculate the waveforms
of electrical signals. 4. evaluate several functions of sensors/transducers for
instrumentation applications. 5. practice the knowledge profesionally and ethically SYNOPSIS This subject discusses about measurement standard and calibration, unit and dimension, measurement and error, use voltmeter and ammeter using PMMC, AC voltmeter design, analog and digital meters, measurement using oscilloscope, measurement using DC or AC bridges, sensors and transducers, signal and data acquisition. REFERENCES 1. David A. Bell, Electronics Instrumentation and
Measurements, Prentice-Hall, 1994. 2. HS Kalsi, Electronic Instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill,
1995. Copyright 2004. 3. Thomas E. Kissell, Industrial Electronics, Prentice Hall,1997. 4. Stanley Wolf and Richard F.M Smith, Student Reference
Manual for Electronic Instrumentation Laboratories 2nd edition, Prentice-Hall, 2004.
BLHW 1013 FOUNDATION ENGLISH LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. infer information from various oral texts of different
complexity levels. 2. respond to stimuli and justify reasons individually and in
group discussions on a wide range of contemporary issues. 3. apply information in cloze texts based on passages from
various sources. 4. produce an extended writing and a report based from non-
linear sources.
SYNOPSIS This course is designed to help students improve their proficiency in English language and to communicate effectively in both spoken and written forms. It is tailored to the four components, namely Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing of the Malaysian University English Test (MUET). Grammar component is taught in an integrated approach to build confidence among the learners to become efficient speakers of English in their tertiary education and workplace environment. The Cooperative Learning approach is incorporated in this course. REFERENCES 1. Choo, W.Y., Yeoh, W.T., Yee, S.F. & Nyanaprakasan, S.
(2008). Ace ahead MUET. Selangor : Oxford Fajar. 2. Gaudart, H., Hughes, R., Michael, J. (2007). Towards better
English grammar. Selangor: Oxford Fajar Sdn. Bhd. 3. Koh, S. L (2009). MUET model tests. Selangor: Penerbit
Ilmu Bakti Sdn Bhd. 4. Ponniah, A.L.S.M., Foziah Shaari, Noraini Ahmad Basri,
Noor Azhana Mohamad Hamdan, Doreen Azlina Abdul Rahman.(2009). Stride ahead: Focus on English. Selangor: Pearson Malaysia Sdn.Bhd.
5. Richards, C., Kaur, B. , Ratnam, P. & Rajaretnam, T. (2008). Text MUET: A strategic approach. Selangor: Longman.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
57
53
BLHL 1012 BAHASA MELAYU KOMUNIKASI 1 LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. respond to information from oral texts and face-to-face
interactional activities. (P3) 2. relate the basic sounds of Bahasa Melayu in terms of
grammar, phonology and oral communication skills related to oneself, family, university and daily activities. (C4, CS)
3. discuss conversational topics in groups.(A2, TS) 4. construct sentences and communicate well in Bahasa
Melayu. (C3)
SYNOPSIS This course introduces the grammar of the language . Students will be exposed to the aspects of grammar, clause, terminology, sentence construction, collective nouns and literature. It is hoped that students will be able to use correct Malay grammar. REFERENCES 1. Daftar Ejaan Rumi Bahasa Malaysia, (2006), Kuala Lumpur,
DBP 2. Daftar Istilah Majlis Bahasa Indonesia-Malaysia, (2005),
Kuala Lumpur, DBP 3. Syed Hussin Al-Attas, (1986) Kesusasteraan Melayu dan
Islam, Kuala Lumpur, Sarjana Enterprise. 4. Umar Junus (1980), Perkembangan Puisi Melayu Moden,
Kuala Lumpur.
BLHL 1112 BAHASA ARAB 1 LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. respond to information from oral texts and face-to-face
interactional activities (P3). 2. relate the basic sounds of Arabic in terms of grammar,
phonology and oral communication skills related to oneself, family, university and daily activities (C3).
3. discuss conversational topics in groups (A2, CS, TS). 4. construct sentences and communicate well in Arabic (C3). SYNOPSIS This basic Arabic course adopts the communicative approach and introduces the phonology, grammar, vocabulary and writing system. Students will be exposed to basic reading materials in the languages. REFERENCES 1. Abdul Masih, G. M. (2001). Mu’jam Kawaid Al-Lugatul
Arobiah Fi Jadawal Walauhat.Maktabah Lubnan. 2. Abdul Rahim (2004). Pembelajaran bahasa Arab bagi
golongan yang bukan Arab, (NO. 1). Kuliah Bahasa Arab Universiti Islam Madinah, Saudi Arabia.
3. Mohd. Rejab I. (2000). Kursus bahasa Arab. Yayasan Dakwah Islamiah Malaysia (YADIM).
4. Yaakob, A. B. (2000). Mausuah An-Nahwu Wassorp Wali’raf. Beirut, Lubnan : DarulIlmi Lilmalayin.
5. Yaakob, M., Mohd Salleh, A. H. & Mahpol, S. (2003). Al-ibtikar, (NO. 1). Sepang, Selangor : Penerbitan Salafi.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
58
54
BLHL 1212 BAHASA MANDARIN LEVEL 1 LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. master the Mandarin phonetics, vocabulary, basic
conversation, reading and writing skills and the basics of grammar (C3, CS).
2. respond to information from oral texts (P3). 3. communicate in groups based on daily topics and activities
(A2, CS, TS). 4. form and write simple sentences (C3). SYNOPSIS This course is designed for students who do not have any background in Mandarin. It provides students with the knowledge to enable them to understand and communicate in the oral and written forms. This course encompasses the listening, speaking, reading and writing components. This course aims to help students to obtain enough exposure of the Mandarin phonetics (han yu pin yin).The grammar introduced is related to the language used daily by Chinese. Particular care is also taken to ensure that the complexity of the dialogues is gradually developed using simple to complex sentences. REFERENCE 1. Ang Lay Hoon, Ooi Bee Lee(2008). Basic Chinese For
Everyone. Selangor: Pelanduk Publications.
BLHL 1312 JAPANESE LEVEL 1 LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. use grammar and be able to pronounce correctly and know
the features of Japanese phonology correctly (C3). 2. respond to information from oral texts and participate in
face-to-face interactional activities (P3). 3. communicate in groups based on daily topics and activities
(A2, CS, TS). 4. form and write sentences as well as the basic forms of
Japanese writing in printed form, i.e. Hiragana and Katakana (A3).
SYNOPSIS This course is designed for students who do not have any background in Japanese. It provides students with the knowledge to enable them to understand and communicate in the oral and written forms. This course encompasses the listening, speaking, reading and writing components. The grammar introduced is related to the language used daily by the Japanese. In addition, two types of Japanese language writing systems; Hiragana and Katakana are also introduced. Students are also exposed to elementary reading materials. REFERENCES 1. (1998), Minna no Nihongo 1, 3A Corporation. 2. (1998) Japanese for Young People 1 Kana Workbook,
Association for Japanese-Language Teaching. 3. (1998), Shin Nihongo No Kiso 1 English Translation Asian
Edition. Association for Japanese –Language Teaching. 4. Shin Nihongo No Kiso 1 Grammatical Notes in English (1992
Association for Japanese-Language Teaching.) 5. Srienetwork (1998), Minna no Nihongo 1, Translation &
Grammatical Notes, 3A Corporation, Tokyo. 6. The Association for Overseas Technical Scholarship (AOTS)
(1998), Shin Nihongo no Kiso 1-English Translation, Asian Edition.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
59
55
SEMESTER 2 BTES 1213 CALCULUS LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. find derivatives of algebraic, trigonometric, logarithmic,
and exponential functions. 2. find integrals of some algebraic and exponential functions. 3. use derivative and integrals to solve engineering problems. 4. find the domain and range for multivariable function. 5. use partial derivative to solve mathematical problems. SYNOPSIS This course will discuss about Differentiation, the Application of Differentiation, Integration and Application of Integration, Multivariable function and Partial Derivative. REFERENCES 1. Cochran et. al, Calculus Early Transcendentals, Pearson
Education Inc., 2010. 2. Abd Wahid et. al, Calculus for Science and Engineering
Students, Penerbit UTHM, 2009. 3. Smith& Minton, Calculus (Basic Calculus for Science and
Engineering), Mc.Graw Hill, 2007. 4. Howard Anton et. al, Calculus 8th Edition, John Wiley &
Sons Pte. Ltd, 2006. 5. Ron Larson et. al, Calculus An Applied Approach,
Brooks/Cole Cengage Learning, 2009.
BTEU 1231 ENGINEERING SEMINAR I LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. adopt the nature of engineering technologists prior to the
commencement of engineering technology studies. 2. aware the important of engineering technologists in
industries. 3. aware current issue in electrical engineering industries. 4. contribute creative idea to the engineering technologists’
community. 5. exhibit good communication skills and engineering
conduct. SYNOPSIS In this subject, students will be equipped with several session of engineering seminar given by the industrialists as well as by professional member of engineering bodies. The context of the seminar will be the general engineering issues and career path for engineering technologists. REFERENCES None
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
60
56
BTEU 1211 ENGINEERING WORKSHOP I LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. familarise with basic electrical components and testing
equipments 2. explain basic concept of electrical wiring, contactor ,relay
and timer control. 3. read and construct circuit from a given domestic wiring and
relay control schematic drawing. 4. present the project results technically in written form or
verbally. 5. abide with the electrical regulation and safety in
performing task SYNOPSIS This subject is required students to carry out practical works in Electrical Workshop in order to gain learning experience in electrical installation works and electronic soldering works. Students will experience the electrical installation works such as constructing circuits layout drawing, electrical components, testing equipments, domestic wiring circuit, relay control circuit and soldering work as well as instilling the moral and ethical values throughout the practical works. Students are also emphasized on the safety and regulatory requirements. Assessment will be conducted on student ability in the functionality, wiring, testing, safety awareness, discipline while carry out the practical tasks. REFERENCES 1. Ir Md Nazri, Aminuddin Aman, Md hairul Nizam,
Engineering Practice: Wiring System & Motor Starter, 2007 2. Md Nasir, Panduan Pendawaian Elektrik, IBSbuku, 2006. 3. Mohd Nazi, Teknologi Pemasangan Elektrik, DBP 4. Akta Bekalan Elektrik (447 pindaan 2001) 5. Ahmad Zaki Shukor, Engineering Practice: Electronics, 2007
BTEE 1213 ELECTRONIC DEVICES LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. explain the concept of semiconductor devices such as
Diode, BJT, JFET MOSFET and Op Amp. 2. analyze and demonstrate the operation of Diode, BJT, JFET,
MOSFET and Op Amp. 3. simulate the operation of semiconductor devices using
simulation software. 4. demonstrate practical competence on semiconductor
devices application circuits. SYNOPSIS Semiconductor devices and pn junction like conductive characteristics, semiconductor carrier, p type, n type and pn junction biasing. Semiconductor diode characteristics, pn junction, Schottky diode, Photodiode, operation of bipolar junction transistor (BJT); common base, common collector and common emitter configurations. Transistor JFET and MOSFET characteristics and biasing. Oeprational amplifier; comparator,inverting, noninverting, summing, differential and integral. Simulation modelling of the diode, BJT, JFET using PSPICE. REFERENCES 1. Thomas Floyd, Electronic Devices, 6th, Edition Prentice Hall,
2005. 2. Bolysted, R., Nashelsky, L., Electronic Devices and Circuit
Theory, 9th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2005. 3. Ali Aminian,M Kazimierczuk, Electronic Devices A Design
Approach, Prentice Hall, 2004. 4. Dhir, S.M., Electronic Components and Materials:
Principles, Manufacture and Maintenance, McGraw Hill, 2000.
5. Reddy S.R., Electronic Devices and Circuits, Alpha Science, 2004.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
61
57
BTEU 1213 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT II LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completing this subject, the student should be able to: 1. describe first order for RL and RC circuits transient
analysis. 2. describe second order for RLC circuits transient analysis. 3. convert time domain into s-domain using Laplace
transforms method and analyze its frequency response. 4. conduct experiments on frequency response of R,L and C
circuits and the characteristics of RLC filters. 5. determine the parameters of two-port network connected
in series, parallel or cascade. SYNOPSIS This subject exposes students to the application of several tools in analyzing electrical circuits, such as the Laplace transform and two ports network . The students are required to use the tools to analyze transient and frequency response in electrical circuit. REFERENCES 1. K.A. Charles, N.O. Sadiku, Fundamentals of Electrical
Circuits, 2nd Ed., McGraw Hill 2. Robbins & Miller, Circuit Analysis Theory and Practice, 3rd
Ed., Thomson & Delmar 3. Nilsson & Riedel, Electric Circuits, Prentice Hall.
BTIG 1213 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. describe and convert the problems into the appropriate
solutions 2. solve problems using software engineering principles 3. produce code by applying suitable programming structures SYNOPSIS Throughout the course, students will be introduced with basic principles of computers and software development methodology. The course also consists of basic programming principles such as syntax semantic, compiling, and linking. Programming techniques using C++ such as data type and operator, selection, repetition, function, array, file, and pointer are learnt towards the end of this course. REFERENCES 1. Daniel Liang, Y, (2007) Introduction to Programming with
C++, Pearson Education 2. Diane Zak, (2008), An Introduction to Programming with
C++, 5th Ed. 3. Malik, D.S, (2004), C++ Programming: From Problem
Analysis to Program Design, Thomas Online Technology 4. John R.Hubbard, (2007), Programming with C++, McGraw
Hill.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
62
58
BTEP 1213 ELECTRIC & MAGNETISM LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. explain the basic concept and the engineering applications
of electromagnetic theory 2. explain the concepts of electrostatics, magnetostatics and
plane-wave propagation. 3. identify the characteristics of Maxwell Equation. 4. solve simple electromagnetic engineering problem. SYNOPSIS This course will discuss mainly about the theory and analysis of some basic electromagnetic waves and fields. It deals with topics regarding vector calculus including transformation of coordinate systems. It is then followed by electrostatics and magnetostatics characteristics such as their static equations, field, potential and boundary conditions. After that, it is continued with Maxwell’s equations and wave propagation; Faraday’s law, uniform plane waves, and skin depth. Finally, the course will be ended with some transmission line topics: Matching, transient, and Smith chart. REFERENCES 1. Ulaby, F., Electromagnetics for Engineers, Pearson
Education, 2005 2. Hayt, W. and Buck, J., Engineering Electromagnetics, 6th
Edition, McGraw Hill International Edition, 2001. 3. Sadiku, M.N.O., Elements of Electromagnetics, 3rd Edition,
Oxford University Press, 2001. 4. Raju, G.S.N., Electromagnetic Field Theory and
Transmission Lines, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, 2006. 5. Paul, C, Whites, K, and Nasar, S., Introduction to
Electromagnetic Fields, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill,1998.
BLHW 1702 ISLAMIC & ASIAN CIVILIZATIONS (TITAS) LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. explain the concept of civilization studies in order to face
global development in relation to religion, race and nation. 2. elaborate on issues related to world civilization via group
presentations. 3. interrelate the history of the advancement of world
civilizations like the Islamic, Chinese and Indian civilizations via group work.
SYNOPSIS This course provides knowledge on various civilizations. It introduces Islamic civilization as the basis for the Malay and Malaysian civilization. Additionally, issues related to the Chinese and Indian civilizations together with current and future issues of various world civilizations are also discussed. REFERENCES 1. Osman Bakar. (2009). Modul Pengajian Tamadun Islam &
Tamadun Asia. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbit Universiti Malaya. 2. Sazelin Arif, Ahmad Ridzwan Mohd Noor, Mahadi Abu
Hassan, Nooraini Sulaiman & Ali Hafizar Mohammad Rawi. (2007). Tamadun Islam dan Tamadun Asia. Kuala Lumpur: Mc Graw-Hill (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.
3. Hashim Musa. (2005). Pemerkasaan Tamadun Melayu Malaysia Menghadapi Globalisasi Barat. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbit Universiti Malaya. (TITAS)
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
63
59
SEMESTER 3 BEKS 2313 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. find the multivariable function together with its domain
and range 2. evaluate the integrals of the function with double and
triple integral by using various techniques 3. use the techniques of integration to calculate the area and
the volume of the region 4. evaluate vector-valued function 5. apply the knowledge of vector-valued function in physical
and engineering fields SYNOPSIS This course consists of three chapters: Functions of Several Variables, Multiple Integrals and Vector-valued Functions. The syllabus is developed by introducing the concepts of the functions with severable variables, integration and also vector-valued function, followed by learning various techniques in solving the problems and its application in physical and engineering fields. REFERENCES 1. Finney R.L., Weir M.D. and Giordano F.R.,THOMAS’S
CALCULUS 10th Ed,Pearson 2001 Anton H., CALCULUS, 8th Edition, John Wiley 1992.
2. Smith R.T. and Minton R.B., MULTIVARIABLE CALCULUS, McGraw-Hill 2002.
3. Steward J., CALCULUS- CONCEPTS AND CONTEXTS, Brooks/Cole, 2nd Edition, 2001
4. Stroud K.A., ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS, 5th Edition, Palgrave Macmillan 2001
5. Muzalna, et. al., ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS 2nd Ed, Pearson 2009
BTEU 2312 ENGINEERING WORKSHOP II LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. familarise with electrical components and testing
equipments 2. explain basic concept of electrical wiring and motor starter. 3. read and construct circuit from a given industrial wiring and
motor starter schematic drawing. 4. able to carry out troubleshooting procedure 5. present the project results technically in written form or
verbally. SYNOPSIS This subject is required students to carry out practical works in Electrical Workshop in order to gain learning experience in three phase wiring system and construct motor starter circuit. Students will experience in wiring and constructing circuit layout drawing, industrial wiring, motor starter and troubleshooting. Students are also emphasized on the safety and regulatory requirements. Assessment will be conducted on student ability in the functionality, wiring, testing, safety awareness, discipline while carry out the practical tasks. REFERENCES 1. Ir Md Nazri, Aminuddin Aman, Md hairul Nizam,
Engineering Practice: Wiring System & Motor Starter 2. Md Nasir, Panduan Pendawaian Elektrik, IBSbuku, 2006. 3. Mohd Nazi, Teknologi Pemasangan Elektrik, DBP 4. Akta Bekalan Elektrik (447 pindaan 2001) 5. Brian Saddan, IEE wiring regulations 3rd edition, Inspection,
Testing and Certification, Newnes, 2001.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
64
60
BTEE 2313 ANALOG ELECTRONICS LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Explain the concept of BJT amplifier, active filter, voltage
regulator, oscillator and power amplifier. 2. Analyze the operation and characteristics of BJT amplifier,
active filter, power amplifier and power supply. 3. Simulate the operation of BJT amplifier, active filter and
oscillator using simulation software. 4. Conduct experiments and analyze data of BJT amplifier and
oscillator. SYNOPSIS This course is about the basic principle of analog electronic circuits mostly performing the concepts of amplification. The course subjects contain the concepts of amplifier, BJT as one of devices usually used in amplifiers, small signal amplifier, power amplifiers (class A and class AB), oscillator, active filters and voltage regulators (shunt and series). REFERENCES 1. Bolysted, R., Nashelsky, L., Electronic Devices and Circuit
Theory, 8th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2002. 2. Floyd, T., Electronic Devices, 6th, Edition Prentice Hall,
2002. 3. Aliminian, A., Kazimierczuk, M. K., Electronic Devices: A
Design Approach, 1st Edition, Prentice Hall, 2004. 4. Russell, L. M., Robert, D., Foundations of Electronics
Circuits and Devices, 4th Edition, Thomson Delmar Learning, 2003.
BTEP 2314 ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. describe the principle of ac voltage and current generation,
RMS and Average values for single and three phases system.
2. explain and analyze the phasor representation for sinusoidal quantity for ac circuits in single and three phases system.
3. demonstrate leading, lagging and unity power-factor concepts through the resistive, inductive and capacitive elements.
4. utilize power-triangle concept in power measurement for balanced and unbalanced load in three phase power system.
5. apply the basic magnetic circuit properties in determining the parameters and performance of single-phase transformer
SYNOPSIS This subject introduces students to topics such as alternating current circuit analysis, phasor representation, RMS value, average power, reactive power, active power, apparent power power factor and power factor correction. Magnetic circuit, construction and operation of transformer, generation of three phase voltage, balanced and unbalanced three phase load and also voltage, current, power and power factor calculation. REFERENCES 1. Hughes, Electrical Technology, 10th ed., Prentice Hall,
2008. 2. Bird, J.O., Electrical Circuit Theory and Technology,
Newnes, 1997. 3. Huges, E.,Teknologi Elektrik, Longman Malaysia, 1994. 4. M.Hendra, Electrical Technology Solution Manual, UTeM,
2008
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
65
61
BTCG 2313 STATIC & MECHANICS LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. State the basic concept of force and material mechanics. 2. Analyze the force on a mechanical system. 3. Understand and elaborate the forces on a mechanical
system. SYNOPSIS Statics: Introduction to basic concepts in statics and mechanics as a study of physical sciences, system of units, scalars and vectors, free body diagram, forces system resultants and moments, equilibrium of a particle, equilibrium of a rigid body, structural analysis, center of gravity and centroid. Mechanics: Introduction to various type of structures, type of supports, concepts and definition of stress, strain, torsion, shear force and bending moment, theory on axial loading, torsion, pure bending and beam deflection, and combination of loads. REFERENCES 1. Hibbeler R. C., 2004, Statics and Mechanics of Materials, SI
Edition, Prentice Hall, New York. 2. Riley W. F, Sturges L. D. Morris, D. H., 2002, Statics and
Mechanics of Materials: An Integrated Approach, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York.
3. Hibbeler, R. C., 2004, Engineering Mechanics- Statics, 3rd SI Edition, Prentice Hall, New York
4. Meriam J.L and Kraige L. G., 2003, Engineering Mechanics-Statics SI Version, 5th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York.
5. Gere J. M., 2004, Mechanics of Materials, Thompson. 6. Hibbeler R. C., 2004, Mechanics of Materials, SI Edition,
Prentice Hall.
BLHW 2403 TECHNICAl ENGLISH LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. At the end of the course, students should be able to: 2. distinguish the use of tenses, run-ons, fragments, modifiers
and parallelism. 3. summarise and paraphrase main ideas. 4. write a proposal as well as progress and project reports in a
group. 5. organise and present project report in groups. SYNOPSIS This course is content-based in nature and aims to equip students with the necessary language skills required to write various reports. As this course prepares students for the mechanics of the different genres of writing, the emphasis is on proposal, progress and project reports by employing Student-Centred Learning approach. It also introduces students to the elements of presentation as well as provides them with the necessary grammar skills in writing. REFERENCES 1. Indra Devi, S. & Zanariah Jano. (2008). Technical report
writing. Kuala Lumpur: Pearson Prentice Hall. 2. Anderson, P.V. (2007). Technical communication: A reader-
centred approach (6th ed.). California: Wadsworth Publishing.
3. Finkelstein, L. J. (2007). Pocket book of technical writing for engineers and scientists (3rd ed.) New York: McGraw Hill.
4. Hart, H. (2008). Introduction to engineering communication (2nd ed.). London: Prentice Hall.
5. Krishnan, L.A., Jong. R., Kathpalia, S.S. & Tan, M.K. (2006). Engineering your report: From start to finish (2nd ed.). Singapore: Prentice Hall.
6. Sharimllah Devi, R., Indra Devi, S. & Nurlisa Loke Abdullah. (2011). Grammar for technical writing. Selangor:Pearson Hall.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
66
62
SEMESTER 4 BEKS 2413 STATISTICS AND APPLICATIONS LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Create and interpret different distribution graphs including
histograms, ogives, and scatter plots by using real data from engineering experiments.
2. Conduct hypothesis testing for population means and proportions for a single population.
3. Find the most suitable sample size that can be applied in order to test the reliability of a engineering product.
4. Find the relationship between independent and dependent variables that involve in engineering process using the concept of regression and correlation.
5. Construct the Control Charts for Variables and Attributes as one of the Statistical Process Control (SPC) tools.
6. Solve statistical problems that are involved in engineering field.
SYNOPSIS In this subject the connection between statistics and the distribution parameters can be used to solve problems in particle size distribution for missile fuel, measurement errors in engineering problems, time to failure for manufactured machines, the production of a products or the failure in systems of electronic components. The real data from the engineering experiments will be used to measure the reliability and capability of a product by using statistical approach for example SPC such as the measure of central tendency and the measure of dispersion. In the topic of regression and correlation, the nature of linear models can be applied to see the relationship between the parameters involve in engineering process. REFERENCES 1. K. M. Ramachandran and Chris P. Tsokos, Mathematical
Statistics with Applications, Elsavier Academic Press, 2009. 2. Dennis Wackerly, William Mendenhall, , Emeritus ,Richard
L. Scheaffer, Mathematical Statistics with Applications, International Edition 7e, BrooksCole, 2008.
3. Prem S.Mann, Introductory Statistics Using Technology, 5th Edition, John Wiley.
4. Johannes L., Robert V. Hogg, Applied Statistics for Engineers and Physical Scientists, 3rd Edition, Pearson, Prentice Hall.
BTEA 2424 EMBEDDED SYSTEM LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Describe and explain a microcontroller’s (PIC16F877A)
architecture, peripherals subsystem and its operations. 2. use programming software to modify internal registers,
perform input/output tasks and compile programming codes.
3. conduct and control mechatronic components such as DC Motor and sensors.
4. simulate the programs built with a simulation software and determine the success of the program
5. develop a microcontroller based system and integrate the program with hardware and troubleshoot the software and hardware issues.
6. function in team effectively as well as leadership knowledge
SYNOPSIS Basic concept of microcontroller and the difference between microcontroller and microprocessor. Microcontrollers memory map, compiler, programming language and software. Stack, subrutines, interrupt and reset. Application of programming with input and outputs such as switches and ‘Light Emitting Diodes’, DC motors, stepper motors and photosensors. Students will apply microcontroller with simple mechatronic system. REFERENCES 1. Peatman, J.B., Design with PIC microcontrollers, 8th ed.,
Prentice Hall, 1998. 2. http://www.mikroe.com/eng/chapters/view/1/introductio
n-world-of-microcontrollers/ (online PIC book) 3. Milan Verle., PIC Microcontroller, Mikroelektronika 4. Milan Verle., PIC Microcontroller – Programming in C,
Mikroelektronika 5. Iovine, J.,PIC Microcontroller Project Book, McGraw-Hill,
USA 2000. 6. Mazidi, A. M., McKinlay, R. D. and Causey, D., PIC
Microcontroller and Embedded Systems: Using Assembly and C for PIC18, Pearson Education, 2008
7. Datasheet PIC16F877 & PIC16F877A available at www.microchip.com
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
67
63
BTEA 2413 CONTROL SYSTEM I LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. describe the basic features and configuration of control
systems. 2. apply the mathematical model for electrical, mechanical
and electromechanical linear time invariant systems. 3. apply appropriate techniques to perform block diagram
reduction of multiple subsystems in order to obtain its transfer function.
4. Analyze the transient and steady state performance in time domain for first and second order systems.
5. Apply the Routh Hurtwitz criterion to determine stability of a system.
6. Apply other resources and ideas to complete the task given SYNOPSIS This subject will discuss about the concepts in control system; open and closed loop system; transfer function; signal flow graphs; feedback control system; hydraulic and pneumatic process control systems; modeling for electrical system, mechanical system, electromechanical system, speed control system and process control system such as current, temperature and flow; using MATLAB and Simulink. REFERENCES 1. Nise, S Norman, Control Systems Engineering, 3th Edition,
John Wiley & Sons Inc., United State of America, 2000. 2. Ogata, Katsuhiko, Modern Control Engineering, 4th Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2002. 3. Bishop, Dorf, Modern Control Systems, 10th Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2005. 4. Gopal, M, Control Systems: Principles and Design, 2nd
Edition, Mc Graw Hill, 2003.
BTEE 2413 ELECTRICAL MACHINE LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Understand basic type of electrical machines, physical
construction and equivalent electrical circuit diagrams. 2. Identify the difference of physical construction and working
principles between dc machines and ac machines; and synchronous machines and asynchronous machines.
3. Run some specific test for electrical and mechanical parameters determination.
4. Investigate the performance of electric machines. SYNOPSIS Introduction to DC and AC type of electrical machines which cover physical construction and equivalent electrical circuit diagrams. The machine performances like torque, speed and efficiency are investigated. The starting and control techniques are also investigated for a better machine selection of appropriate application. REFERENCES 1. Stephen J. Chapman, Electric Machinery Fundamentals, 4th
ed., McGraw-Hill, 2005. 2. B.S. Guru, H.R.Hiziroglu, Electric Machinery And
Transformers, Oxford University Press, 2001. 3. Charles I. Hubert, Electric Machines: Theory, Operation,
Applications, Adjustment, and Control, 2nd ed., Prentice Hall, 2002.
4. Fitzgerald, Kingsley, Umans, Electric Machinery, 6th ed., McGraw-Hill, 2003.
5. Theodore Wildi, Electric Machines, Drives & Power System, 5th ed., Prentice Hall, 2002.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
68
64
BTCG 2413 FLUID MECHANICS LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. define fluid and its properties. 2. apply fluid mechanics equations in solving fluid statics and
dynamics problems. 3. analyze stability of an object submersed in a fluid. 4. respond to the procedure that has been given in laboratory 5. practice fluid mechanic concepts, analyse and interpret
data accordingly and to report the results. SYNOPSIS Introduction to this subject is about the basic physical properties of fluids. Then it covers the definition of pressure and head. Next it followed by derivation of hydrostatic equation and its application in pressure measurement, static forces analysis on immersed surface and buoyancy analysis. For fluid dynamics, it started with introduction to fluid dynamics and fluid flow analysis. Then it is continued by derivation of flow equations, the application of energy equation and Bernoulli equation in the calculation of flow velocity, discharge, and head lost in piping systems. The last topic for this subject is dimensional analysis and its application. REFERENCES 1. Yuan, C.S., 2006, Fluid Mechanics I, Pearson Prentice Hall,
Malaysia. 2. Munson, B. R., Young D. F. and Okiishi, T. H., 2006,
Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics, 5th Ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc, Asia.
3. Som, S. K. and Biswas, G., 2004, Introduction to Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines, 2nd Ed., Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
4. Douglas, J. F., Gasiorek J. M. and Swaffield, J. A., 2001, Fluid Mechanics, 4th Ed., Prentice Hall, Spain.
5. Cengel, Y. A. and Cimbala, J. M., 2006, Fluid Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications, International Edition, McGraw-Hill, Singapore.
6. Streeter, V. L. and Wylie, E. B., 1983, Fluid Mechanics, First SI Metric Ed., McGraw-Hill, Singapore.
7. Potter, M.C. and Wiggert, D.C. with Hondzo, M. and Shih, T.I-P. , 2001, Mechanics of Fluids, 3rd ed., Brooks/Cole, Pacific Grove, CA USA.
BLHW 1732 MALAYSIAN SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. interrelate the social process with economic
transformation in the national development agenda. 2. practice the qualities of truthworthy leadership in group
activities. 3. reflect on the role and responsibilities of national
development for human well-being via group work. SYNOPSIS This course discusses the process of social and economic changes in the Malaysian development agenda. The awareness of this developmental aspect is important to ensure that Malaysia is capable of addressing global challenges. At the same time, it also aims to develop quality human capital and mindset. REFERENCES 1. Siti Rohana Omar, Mohd Taib Dora, Nor Fazilah Abd Hamid,
Anidah Robani, Norliah Kudus, Hanipah Hussin &Izaidin Abd Majid. (2009). Modul Pengajaran Transformasi Sosioekenomi Malaysia: Dimensi dan Cabaran. Cetakan Dalaman UTeM
2. Kassim Thukiman. (2007). Malaysia Perspektif Sejarah dan Politik. Skudai: Penerbit UTM.
3. Ahmad Shukri Mohd. Nain & Rosman Md Yusoff. (2007). Konsep, Teori, Dimensi dan Isu Pembangunan. Skudai: Penerbit UTM.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
69
65
BLHW 1722 PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. explain the concept of science and technology in ancient
and current civilizations as well as their impact on the development of philosophy of science and technology via group presentations.
2. elaborate the concept of knowledge, philosophy of science and technology from the Islamic perspective appropriately.
3. interrelate the principles, influences and impact of science and technology in the context of Islamic civilization and nation development via group activities.
SYNOPSIS This course discusses the concept of knowledge, philosophy of science and technology according to the perspectives of Muslim and Western scholars. The concept and achievements of Islamic civilization are also disscussed because science and technology is a phenomenon which develops in line with the development of society and its environment. REFERENCES 1. Radzuan Nordin, Ahmad Ridzwan Mohd Noor, Norliah
Kudus, Nor Azilah Ahmad, Shahrulanuar Mohamed, Ali Hafizar Mohamad Rawi, Ismail Ibrahim & Mahadi Abu Hassan. (2008). Modul Falsafah Sains dan Teknologi. Cetakan Dalaman UTeM.
2. Yahaya Jusoh & Azhar Muhammad. (2007). Pendidikan Falsafah Sains Al-Quran. Skudai: Penerbit UTM Press.
3. Osman Bakar. (2008). Tauhid dan Sains: Perspektif Islam Tentang Agama dan Sains Edisi Kedua. Bandung: Pustaka Hidayah.
SEMESTER 5 BTEU 3531 ENGINEERING SEMINAR II LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Upon completing this subject, the student should be able
to 2. identify the route and process to professional engineer
correctly . 3. recognize the conception of sustainability engineering and
practice in electrical field suitably. 4. apply the concept of sustainable development in working
field responsibly. 5. expose to the new requirement of manufacturing practice
and process in electrical field properly. 6. exhibit the soft skill such as communication skill. SYNOPSIS This subject presents the procedure and process of route to professional engineer. The students will expose to the concepts an idea of renewable energy and also concepts of sustainability development of electrical engineering and its practice. The subject covered the idea of new requirement of manufacturing process and practice in order to expose student the basic knowledge to apply in real working field. There are various issues of sustainable engineering will be covered and discussed. REFERENCES None
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
70
66
BTEA 3513 CONTROL SYSTEM II LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. interpret the knowledge of basic control systems. 2. use the root locus technique in solving control system
problems. 3. design PI, PD, PID, Lag, Lead and Lag-Lead controller via
root locus technique. 4. use frequency response technique in solving control system
problems. 5. design Lag, Lead and Lag-Lead compensator via frequency
response technique. 6. differentiate and evaluate the techniques in designing
controller for a system. 7. apply other resources and ideas to complete the task given SYNOPSIS This subject will discuss about the control systems engineering; analysis in time and frequency domain responses; stability in time and frequency domain; design in time domain (root locus) and frequency domain (Bode plot). REFERENCES 1. Bishop, Dorf, Modern Control Systems, 10th Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2005. 2. Nise, S Norman, Control Systems Engineering, 3th Edition,
John Wiley & Sons Inc., United State of America, 2000. 3. Ogata, Katsuhiko, Modern Control Engineering, 4th Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2002.
BTEU 3523 DATA COMMUNICATIONS & COMPUTER NETWORK LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. explain and describe the concept of computer system
network, communication model, network models, network components, network topology, network technology and applications.
2. explain, describe and apply the coding schemes, transmission modes, transmission methods, communication modes, error detection methods, flow control, and error control in a network.
3. explain and describe the OSI model, IEEE 802.x model, transmission media, network services, repeater, bridges, router and gateways.
4. explain describe and apply the network operation and technology of LAN, wireless LAN, WAN and routing.
5. design, install, configure and troubleshoot a wired and wireless network.
SYNOPSIS Topics covered are: Introduction to Computer Network, Data Communications, Network Structure, Local Area Network, Wide Area Network, Interconnection, and Internetworking REFERENCES 1. W.Stalling, Data and Data Communications, 8th Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2007. 2. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Communication and
Networking, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2007. 3. Douglas E. Corner, Computer Networks and Internet with
Internet Application, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2004. 4. William Stallings, Computer Network with Internet Protocol
and Technology, Prentice Hall, 2004. 5. William A. Shay, Understanding Communication and
Network, 3rd Edition, Brooks/Cole Thomson Learning, 2004.
6. Micheal A. Gallo, Computer Communication and Networking Technology, Brooks/Cole Thomson Learning, 2002.
7. Edmond Zahedi, Digital Data Communication, Prentice Hall 2002.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
71
67
BTEP 3513 POWER ENGINEERING I LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. Upon completing this subject, the student should be able
to: 2. formulate the mathematical models of basic power system
components. 3. analyze the power system performance using the power
system model and per-unit quantities. 4. explain the basic concept of electrical power protection. 5. demonstrate practical competence on power system
equipments such as generator, transformer and transmission line.
SYNOPSIS This subject gives the overall components of power system to the students without going into detail. The power system components will be modelled for the analysis purposes. The topics include per-unit quantities, transmission line, transformer, synchronous generator, power flows, symmetrical components, power protection and power system stability. REFERENCES 1. Hadi Saadat, Power System Analysis, 2nd ed., Mc-Graw Hill,
2004. 2. William D. Stevenson, Jr., Elements of Power System
Analysis, 4th ed., Mc-Graw Hill, 1998. 3. Grainger and Stevenson Jr, Power System Analysis, Mc-
Graw Hill, 1994. 4. Arthur R. Bergen, Power System Analysis, 2nd ed., Prentice
Hall, 2000 5. Glover, Sarma, Power System Analysis and Design, 3rd ed.,
Thomson Learning, 2002.
BTEA 3524 PLC & APPLICATION LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, student should be able to: 1. describe the functionality of each components of PLC 2. write and execute a PLC programming language that used
in industrial application 3. execute a PLC connection to input and output devices 4. integrates the PLC hardware and software 5. design a simple and complete automation system using PLC 6. identify, analyze and solve critically the problems SYNOPSIS This subject will expose students with knowledges and skills of PLC including its definition, main hard components, PLC programming languages, interfacing PLC with computers, integrates PLC hardware and software to design a simple automation system. REFERENCES 1. D. Petruzella, Frank Programmable Logic Controller, 3rd
Ed., McGraw Hill, 2005 2. Mikell P. Groover, Automation, Production Systems &
Computer-Integrated Manufacturing, 3rd Ed., 2008 3. Morris, S.B, Programmable Logic Controllers, Prentice Hall,
2000. 4. Parr, E.A, Programmable Controllers: An Engineer’s Guide,
2nd Ed., Newness 1999 5. Rohner, PLC: Automation with programmable logic
controllers, MacMillan Press, 1996.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
72
68
BTEA 2413 INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. explain the principles and elements of data acquisition
system 2. apply the right sensors/transducers for data acquisition
system 3. design signal conditioning circuit for data acquisition
system 4. evaluate the A/D and D/A techniques, interfaces standards
and types of data presentation 5. exhibit communication and critical thinking skills on
specialized, reliability and economics topics in instrumentation
SYNOPSIS This subject emphasize on instrumentation elements for complete data acquisition system such as sensors & transducers, signal conditioning & processing, A/D and D/A conversion, interfacing standards and data presentation. This subject also touches on some specialized instrumentation, reliability & economics in instrumentation and also introduces instrumentation for industrial and process control application. REFERENCES 1. Curtis D.johnson, Process Control Instrumentation
Technology, 8th Ed., Prentice Hall, 2006. 2. H S Kalsi, Electronic Instrumentation, 2nd Ed., Mc Graw Hill,
2004. 3. John P. Bentley, Principles of Measurement Systems, 4th
Ed., Prentice Hall, 2005. 4. N. Mathivanan, PC-Based Instrumentation Concepts and
Practice, 1st Ed., Prentice Hall of India, 2007.
BLHW 3403 ENGLISH FOR PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of the course, students should be able to: 1. select and apply the appropriate tenses, parallelism, direct
and indirect speech, transitional markers and misplaced modifiers.
2. differentiate between facts and opinions, and use vocabulary relevant to its context.
3. respond to interviews and participate in meetings. 4. demonstrate communication and oral presentation skills. 5. produce resume, application letter and recommendation
report. SYNOPSIS This course is designed to develop oral communication, as well as enhance students’ level of English literacy which will be beneficial to their professional careers. It also aims to equip students with the communication skills necessary for the workplace. It complements the skills taught in BLHW 3403. Grammar will be taught implicitly in the course content. Students will acquire effective presentation skills as well as gain experience in mock interviews prior to seeking employment. The Student-Centred Learning approach is employed in teaching and learning process. REFERENCES 1. Azar, B. S. & Hagen, S. A. (2006). Basic English grammar.
New York: Pearson Education. 2. Casher, C. C. & Weldon, J. (2010). Presentation excellence:
25 tricks, tips and techniques for professional speakers and trainers. USA: CLB Publishing House.
3. Chin, F. C. J., Soo, K. S. E. & R. Manjuladevi. (2010). English for professional communication: Science and engineering. Singapore: Cenggage Learning Asia Pte Ltd.
4. Khoo, M. S. L, Razilah Abdul Rahim & E. Rajendraan (2006). Communication at the work place. Melaka: Jabatan Bahasa dan Komunikasi, UTeM.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
73
69
SEMESTER 6 BTEU 3612 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY & HEALTH LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. explain clearly the industrial safety, occupational health
hazards in workplaces environment. 2. apply the appropriate methods and tools to eliminate or
reduce the occupational health hazards. 3. conduct basic safety assessments using methods and tools
that they have learned. 4. measure and demonstrate a safe, feasible occupational
health and conducive working environment. SYNOPSIS This subject is a two-credit offering with no prerequisites. This subject provides the students with the rationale for providing an occupationally safe and healthy work environment. These skills are needed to be able to work effectively in the area of human resources and employee development as well as industrial relations since workers have been provide by law with specific safety and health rights. Generally, this subject overwhelming industrial safety, occupational health and environment. Through industrial safety, students will be explained the development, objectives and importance of industrial safety to industries. Students also will learn on how to manage hazards in working environment. Lastly, occupational health exposes students on how to manage workers’ health. REFERENCES 1. Goetsch, D. L. (2004). Occupational safety and health for
technologists, engineers, and managers (5th ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall. ISBN: 0131137646
2. Reese, C. D. (2003). Occupational health and safety management, a practical approach. Lewis Publishers, A CRC Press Company. ISBN: 1566706203
3. Anton, T. J. (1989). Occupational safety and health management (2nd ed.). New York, NY: McGraw-Hill, Inc.
4. Undang-undang Malaysia, (2005). Akta keselamatan dan kesihatan pekerjaan 1994 dan peraturan-peraturan, MDC Publishers Sdn Bhd.
5. Akta Kilang dan Jentera (Akta 139) , (1967). Department of Occupational Safety and Health, Malaysia.
BTEA 3613 INDUSTRIAL ROBOTIC LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. identify the configuration and components of industrial
robots system. 2. apply the forward, inverse and dynamic kinematics
equations and computer control for industrial robotics systems.
3. implement specific robotic programming and simulations for industrial robots used in industrial automation systems.
4. identify robotics technologies in an industrial environment SYNOPSIS Introduction to robotics, classification of robots, basic components of robot systems, basic concepts of kinematics and dynamics, mechanical structure of robot systems, robot drives and motion control system using stepper motor, servo motor, servo amplifier and pneumatics, sensory devices such as position, force and torque, tactile, basic robot programming, robot simulations and industrial robot applications. Experiments will include application of MATLAB, simple robot development and robot programming and simulation using a real industrial robot. REFERENCES 1. K.H. Low, Robotics: Principles and Systems Modeling, 2nd
edition, Prentice Hall, 2004 2. Fuller, J.L., Robotics: Introduction, Programming and
Projects, 2nd ed., Prentice Hall, 1998. 3. Craig, J.J., Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control,
2nd ed., Addison Wesley Longman, 1989. 4. Man Zhilong, Robotics, 2nd. edition, Prentice Hall, 2005
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
74
70
BTEE 3613 ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR & DRIVE LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Identify power electronics conversion in DC drives. 2. Model and design a DC drive systems 3. Explain the principles of Induction motor drives 4. Design the scalar control of induction motor drives 5. Explain the use of electrical and mechanical actuator in
motor drive systems SYNOPSIS This subject will introduce to the electrical, mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic electrical actuator & drive system. This subject wills discussion on the definition, symbols, system, circuits, operation and component of the pneumatic, hydraulic and mechanical actuator system. Another part of this subject will covers on the electrical drive for DC and AC motor. It focuses on the fundamental of the electrical drive including element, block diagram, feedback, load characteristics and motor sizing. In addition special discussion on the four quadrants operation with chopper fed dc driver for DC motor drive and three phase drive system. REFERENCES 1. Electric Drives – an integrative approach, Ned Mohan,
MNPERE, Minneapolis 2. Power Electronic Control of AC Motors – JMD Murphy & FG
Turbull, Pergamon Press 3. Electric motor drives, R. Krishnan, Prentice–Hall, 2001 4. Vector Control and dynamics of AC drives, DW Novotny &
TA Lipo, Oxford Science & Publications 5. Fundamental of Electrical Drives – GK Dubey, Narosa
Publishing House 6. Power Electronics and AC drives – BK Bose, Prentice-Hall 7. Control of electrical drives, W Leonhard, Springer
BTEA 3623 PNEUMATIC & HYDRAULIC LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. define the fundamental physical principles of
pneumatic/hydraulic. 2. select components for pneumatic/hydraulic systems. 3. demonstrate the operation of basic pneumatic/hydraulic
and electro pneumatic/hydraulic systems. 4. control the movement, pressure and flow in
pneumatic/hydraulic systems. 5. Install and test the pneumatic/hydraulic and electro
pneumatic/hydraulic application circuits. 6. Communicate effectively in a team in finding alternative
solution of a problem. SYNOPSIS This subject introduces the students to industrial fluid power, which is consisting of hydraulic and pneumatic system. This course is taught by practical application approach (theory and practice) in the laboratory session. Lab equipment is provided that allows the students to design, build, and test most of the circuits discussed in class. Mini project or project oriented problem-based learning is incorporated in this subject. REFERENCES 1. Nise, S Norman, Control Systems Engineering, 3rd Edition,
John Wiley & Sons Inc., United State of America, 2000. 2. Ogata, Katsuhiko, Modern Control Engineering, 4th Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2002. 3. Bishop, Dorf, Modern Control Systems, 10th Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2005. 4. Gopal, M, Control Systems: Principles and Design, 2nd
Edition, McGraw Hill, 2003.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
75
71
BTEU 3613 FINAL YEAR PROJECT I LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, student should be able to 1. identify and describe the problem and scope of project
clearly. 2. select, plan and execute a proper methodology in problem
solving. 3. work independently and ethically. 4. present the preliminary results in written and in oral format
effectively. SYNOPSIS This subject is the first part of the Final Year Project. In this subject, students are expected to propose a project under a supervision of a lecturer. Student needs to carry out the project, presents the proposed project and submits a progress report at the end of semester. REFERENCES Depending on each student project’s references.
BLHW 2712 ETHNIC RELATIONS LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. elaborate on the challenges of cultural plurality and ethnic
relations in Malaysia via group work (P2, LS) 2. interrelate the role of cultural plurality, society and ethnic
groups in the Malaysian unity context (C3, TS) 3. share learning experiences on the issues of socio-culture
appropriately (A3, EM). SYNOPSIS This course focuses on the basic concepts of culture and ethnic relations in Malaysia. It exposes students to ethnic relations in the development of the Malaysian society. Besides, this course aims to give an understanding of the global challenges facing ethnic and cultural relations at the Malaysian level. REFERENCES 1. Shamsul Amri Baharuddin. (2007). Modul Hubungan Etnik.
UPENA, KPTM. 2. Abdul Aziz Bari. (2008). Perlembagaan Malaysia. Shah
Alam: Arah Publication Sdn. Bhd. 3. Mohd Taib Hj Dora. (2005). Liberalisasi Komuniti. Melaka:
Penerbit Universiti Teknikal Malaysia Melaka.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
76
72
BLHL 4032 CRITICAL & CREATIVE THINKING LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of the course, students should be able to: 1. discuss basic principles of critical and creative thinking skills
in solving daily tasks. 2. apply the tools of critical and creative thinking in problem
solving and technical innovation. 3. respond in group discussions on issues related to the
development of critical and creative thinking skills. 4. solve problems in case studies relating to contemporary
issues. SYNOPSIS This course is designed to give students an introduction to the principles of critical and creative thinking, and problem-solving. Students will be exposed to the roles of the right brain and left brain, mental determination, elements of critical and creative thinking as well as problem solving. This subject is conducted in accordance with the concept of problem-based learning (PBL). REFERENCES 1. Aziz Yahya, Aida Nasirah Abdullah, Hazmilah Hasan, Raja
Roslan Raja Abd Rahman. (2011) Critical and Creative Thinking Module 2. Melaka. Penerbit UTeM
2. Buzan, T. & Buzan, B. (2006). The Mind Map Book, Essex: BBC Active, Pearson Education.
3. Claxton, G. & Lucas, B. (2007). The Creative Thinking Plan, London: BBC Books.
4. Reichenbach, W. (2000). Introduction to Critical Thinking,McGraw-Hill College.
SEMESTER 7 BTEU 4713 ENGINEERING ETHICS LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. understand and appreciate the moral and ethical theories
leading to engineering ethics. 2. familiarize themselves with codes of ethics and inter-relate
them through examples of case studies. 3. understand and be aware of professional and ethical
responsibilities. 4. manage and resolve ethical problems in
client/engineer/society relationship in carrying out duty as a professional engineer.
5. review case studies and analyze the situations that have occurred.
SYNOPSIS Introduction to scope and goal of engineering ethics. Moral thinking and ethical theory. The laws and ethical theory in engineering practice. The responsibility of providing service. safety and health. The rights of engineers. Techniques of managing and resolving problems and conflicts. The engineer and global issues. REFERENCES 1. Martin M.W., Schinzinger R. Ethics in Engineering, 4th
edition, McGraw Hill, 1996. 2. Charles B. Fleddermann, Engineering Ethics, 3rd edition,
Pearson Prentice Hall, 2008. 3. Charles E.H., Michael S.P., Michael J.R., Engineering Ethics:
Concepts and Cases, 2nd edition, Thomson, 2000. 4. Akta Pendaftaran Jurutera 1967. 5. Akta Keselamatan dan Kesihatan Pekerja 1994. 6. Akta Kualiti Alam Sekitar 1974.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
77
73
BTEA 4713 FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEM LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. define production and manufacturing systems as well as
describing their main components respectively. 2. describe and analyze manufacturing operations besides
manufacturing models and metrics as well as well as applying their dedicated tools, where applicable.
3. list and describe manufacturing systems classification and product design process.
4. define and explain FMS, CIM, SCADA, HMI, CAD/CAM and TPM systems that are commonly applicable to manufacturing industries.
5. design and analyze an example of manufacturing system used in industry using SCADA/HMI application software.
SYNOPSIS Introduction to industrial field topics such as production system, manufacturing system, manufacturing operation, production concept and mathematical models as well as manufacturing operation costs besides FMS, CIM, SCADA, HMI, CAD/CAM and TPM systems with the complete descriptions and relevant analysis where those systems are integrated in building modern automated systems in manufacturing industries. REFERENCES 1. Groover, M. P., “Automation, Production Systems, and
Computer-Integrated Manufacturing”, 3rd Ed., Prentice Hall, 2007.
2. Groover, M. P., “Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing: Materials, Processes, and Systems”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, 2006.
3. Kalpakjian, S. & Schmid, S., “Manufacturing, Engineering, and Technology”, 5th Ed., Addison-Wesley, 2005.
4. Blank, S. C., Chiles, V., Lissaman, A. J., and Marting, S. J., “Principles of Engineering Manufacture”, 3rd Ed., Arnold, 1996.
5. Bedworth D. D., Henderson M. R., and Wolfe P. M., “Computer Integrated Design and Manufacturing”, McGraw-Hill, 1991.
BTEA 4733 INDUSTRIAL PROCESS CONTROL LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. describe the process variables in the process control
industries 2. evaluates the process variables, elements and instruments
for pressure, temperature, level, flow and analytical process
3. analyze the control loops characteristics in the process control industries
4. apply an appropriate controllers for process control industries
5. apply an automation technologies for process control such as SCADA and DCS
6. identify, analyze, and solve critically the technical problems SYNOPSIS This subject will cover topic on introduction to industrial process control including basic terms and diagrams. It’s also emphasized on process variables, elements, and instruments for temperature, level and flow of process control. The right controllers for process control are discussed and control loops in process control are analyzed. Applications of automation technologies such as SCADA and DCS for process control are also explained. REFERENCES 1. Curtis D.johnson, Process Control Instrumentation
Technology, 8th Ed., Prentice Hall, 2006. 2. H S Kalsi, Electronic Instrumentation, 2nd Ed., Mc Graw Hill,
2004. 3. John P. Bentley, Principles of Measurement Systems, 4th
Ed., Prentice Hall, 2005. 4. N. Mathivanan, PC-Based Instrumentation Concepts and
Practice, 1st Ed., Prentice Hall of India, 2007. 5. David A. Bell, Electronics Instrumentation and
Measurements, Prentice-Hall, 1994.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
78
74
BTEA 4723 MACHINE VISION LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. recognize the application areas, restrictions, and structure
of machine vision systems 2. able to operate on digital images: capture them and extract
basic visual information from images 3. analyze and apply the basics of machine learning and
approaches to decision making using a computer. 4. able to use of image processing and image understanding
tools 5. apply machine vision in industrial automation system SYNOPSIS The aim of this course is to introduce the theory, applications and techniques of machine vision to students, and to provide students with an understanding of the problems involved in the development of machine vision systems. The course begins with low level processing and works its way up to the beginnings of image interpretation. This approach is taken because image understanding originates from a common database of information. The learner will be required to apply their understating of the concepts involved through the process of building applications that manipulate bi-level and greyscale images through the use of suitable packages (e.g. Matlab or OpenCV). REFERENCES 1. Rafael C.Gonzalez, Richard E.Woods 2002. Digital Image
Processing, Prentice Hall 2. Jain, R. J., R. Kasturi and B. G. Schunck. 1995. Machine
Vision. New York: McGraw-Hill, Inc. 3. Davis, E. R. 1997. Machine Vision. 2nd Ed. San Diego,
California: Academic Press
BTEU 4985 FINAL YEAR PROJECT II LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. collect, analyze and present data into meaningful
information using relevant tools 2. plan, design and execute project implementation
systematically 3. work independently and ethically 4. present the results in written and in oral format effectively 5. identify basic entrepreneurship skills in project
management SYNOPSIS This subject is the second part of Projek Sarjana Muda I, in second semester. Students will continue their project from BTEU 4713 during the second semester, and they should accomplish the projects completely either in hardware, software or both of them. Students needs to write-up a good final report (in thesis format), as a part of the subject’s assessment. REFERENCES Depend on each student project’s references.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
79
75
BPTU 1032 TECHNO ENTREPRENEURSHIP LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of the subject, students should be able to: 1. illustrate the importance of technology and
entrepreneurship including recognizing business opportunities for new venture creation.
2. practice appropriate traits and roles in pursuit of a technopreneurial career
3. evaluate and decide on the appropriate technology modifications relevant to business venture.
SYNOPSIS The course will facilitate students with the key technopreneurship motivation and skills to inculcate technopreneurial behaviours and competencies, incorporating theories and practices for new venture creation. Other topics include familiarizing students with the concepts, issues and techniques of venture creation and technopreneurship. It will also assist them in understanding issues concerning marketing and strategic management, risks and uncertainties, business sustainability and explore growth opportunities by going international. Simulations, case studies, industrial visits, and practicum will enhance students’ knowledge and skills in recognizing opportunities, attaining competitive edge and realizing their business ideas. REFERENCES 1. Barringer R. Bruce, & Ireland R. Duane (2008).
Entrepreneurship: Successfully Launching New Venture, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall.
2. Lambing A. Peggy, & Kuehl R. Charles (2007). Entrepreneurship, Prentice Hall.
3. Kathleen R. Allen (2010). New Venture Creation: An Entrepreneurial Approach, 5th Edition, South-Westrn Cencage Learning
4. Kathleen Allen (2010). Entrepreneurship for Scientists and Engineers, Pearson Prentice Hall.
BLHC 4062 PROJECT MANAGEMENT LEARNING OUTCOMES: Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. an ability to construct a comprehensive Project Proposal,
which is based on engineering perspectives and aligned with industrial demands.
2. an ability to illustrate the importance of project management for high technology preject/program execution.
3. an ability to explain the principles, functional and processes of project management.
4. an ability to highlight the essential skills and standard execution methods in project management.
SYNOPSIS The purpose of this course is to provide the students with contemporary skill that enable them to deploy it effectively into project management. This course will cover principles, concepts, strategies, methods and techniques of project management. At the end of this lesson, students should be able to understand the wholesome of functional and obtain the skills of the project mangement. REFERENCES 1. Gray, C.F. and Larson, E.W. (2006). Project Management –
A Managerial Perspective. McGraw Hill. 2. Meredith, J.R. and Mantel, S.J. 2006). Project Management
– A Managerial approach, 6th Edition. John Wiley and Sons. 3. Daniel L. Babcock, Lucy C. Morse (2002). Managing
Engineering and Technology, 3rd Edition. Prentice Hall. 4. R.S. Zaharna (2001). Proposal Writing Handbook. Centre for
studies, consultant and technical service, An Najah National University Nablus.
5. Russell D. Archibald (2003). Managing High-Technology Programs and Project, 3rd Edition, John Wiley and Sons Inc.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
80
76
SEMESTER 8 BTEU 4810 & BTEU 4812 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING & REPORT LEARNING OUTCOME Upon completion of this subject, the students should be able to: 1. adapt with the real working environment, in terms of
operational, development and management system. 2. apply knowledge learned in the university. 3. write a report on daily activities in the log book
systematically in the related field. 4. embrace and practice professional ethics. 5. improve their soft skills and creativity. 6. recognize potential engineering problems to be solved in
the final year project. 7. present reports orally and written on the working
experiences. SYNOPSIS For Industrial training, students will gain experience in the organization/industry for a required certain number of weeks. During the designated period, they will apply knowledge learned in the university and increased the related skills required in their future profession. REFERENCES 1. Garis Panduan Latihan Industri, Pusat Universiti Industri.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
81
77
BLHW 1013 FOUNDATION ENGLISH LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. infer information from various oral texts of different
complexity levels. 2. respond to stimuli and justify reasons individually and in
group discussions on a wide range of contemporary issues. 3. apply information in cloze texts based on passages from
various sources. 4. produce an extended writing and a report based from non-
linear sources.
SYNOPSIS This course is designed to help students improve their proficiency in English language and to communicate effectively in both spoken and written forms. It is tailored to the four components, namely Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing of the Malaysian University English Test (MUET). Grammar component is taught in an integrated approach to build confidence among the learners to become efficient speakers of English. The CL approach is incorporated in this course. REFERENCES 1. Choo, W.Y., Yeoh, W.T., Yee, S.F. & Nyanaprakasan, S.
(2008). Ace ahead MUET. Selangor : Oxford Fajar. 2. Gaudart, H., Hughes, R., Michael, J. (2007). Towards better
English grammar. Selangor: Oxford Fajar Sdn. Bhd. 3. Koh, S. L (2009). MUET model tests. Selangor: Penerbit
Ilmu Bakti Sdn Bhd. 4. Ponniah, A.L.S.M., Foziah Shaari, Noraini Ahmad Basri,
Noor Azhana Mohamad Hamdan, Doreen Azlina Abdul Rahman.(2009). Stride ahead: Focus on English. Selangor: Pearson Malaysia Sdn.Bhd.
1. Richards, C., Kaur, B. , Ratnam, P. & Rajaretnam, T. (2008). Text MUET: A strategic approach. Selangor: Longman.
BKKx xxxx CO-CURRICULUM I Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Demonstrate good techniques of rhythms and tempos
traditional musical instruments. 2. Identify musical notes and apply them to suit the rhymes
and tempos of traditional musical instruments. 3. Demonstrate positive values and teamwork through group
performance Synopsis The purpose of this course is to increase students’ knowledge about playing traditional musical instruments. This course emphasizes the theoretical and practical components of traditional musical instruments. Besides, students will be exposed to recitation traditional musical instruments performances. References 1. Chek Mat (2005). Kursus Pengurusan Program. Kuala
lumpur: Utusan Publication & Distributors Sdn. Bhd. 2. Tan, S. B. & Patricia, M. (1998). Penghantar Muzik Malaysia.
Pulau pinang: Penerbitan The Asian Centre.
SUBJECT DETAILS FOR JTKEK PROGRAMMES
University Compulsory Subjects (W)
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
82
78
BLHW 1722 PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. explain the concept of science and technology in ancient
and current civilizations as well as their impact on the development of philosophy of science and technology via group presentations.
2. elaborate the concept of knowledge, philosophy of science and technology from the Islamic perspective appropriately.
3. interrelate the principles, influences and impact of science and technology in the context of Islamic civilization and nation development via group activities.
SYNOPSIS This course discusses the concept of knowledge, philosophy of science and technology according to the perspectives of Muslim and Western scholars. The concept and achievements of Islamic civilization are also disscussed because science and technology is a phenomenon which develops in line with the development of society and its environment. REFERENCES 1. Radzuan Nordin, Ahmad Ridzwan Mohd Noor, Norliah
Kudus, Nor Azilah Ahmad, Shahrulanuar Mohamed, Ali Hafizar Mohamad Rawi, Ismail Ibrahim & Mahadi Abu Hassan. (2008). Modul Falsafah Sains dan Teknologi. Cetakan Dalaman UTeM.
2. Yahaya Jusoh & Azhar Muhammad. (2007). Pendidikan Falsafah Sains Al-Quran. Skudai: Penerbit UTM Press.
3. Osman Bakar. (2008). Tauhid dan Sains: Perspektif Islam Tentang Agama dan Sains Edisi Kedua. Bandung: Pustaka Hidayah.
BLHW 2403 TECHNICAL ENGLISH LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. At the end of the course, students should be able to: 2. distinguish the use of tenses, run-ons, fragments, modifiers
and parallelism. 3. summarise and paraphrase main ideas. 4. write a proposal as well as progress and project reports in a
group. 5. organise and present project report in groups. SYNOPSIS This course is content-based in nature and aims to equip students with the necessary language skills required to write various reports. As this course prepares students for the mechanics of the different genres of writing, the emphasis is on proposal, progress and project reports by employing Student-Centred Learning approach. It also introduces students to the elements of presentation as well as provides them with the necessary grammar skills in writing. REFERENCES 1. Indra Devi, S. & Zanariah Jano. (2008). Technical report
writing. Kuala Lumpur: Pearson Prentice Hall. 2. Anderson, P.V. (2007). Technical communication: A reader-
centred approach (6th ed.). California: Wadsworth Publishing.
3. Finkelstein, L. J. (2007). Pocket book of technical writing for engineers and scientists (3rd ed.) New York: McGraw Hill.
4. Hart, H. (2008). Introduction to engineering communication (2nd ed.). London: Prentice Hall.
5. Krishnan, L.A., Jong. R., Kathpalia, S.S. & Tan, M.K. (2006). Engineering your report: From start to finish (2nd ed.). Singapore: Prentice Hall.
6. Sharimllah Devi, R., Indra Devi, S. & Nurlisa Loke Abdullah. (2011). Grammar for technical writing. Selangor:Pearson Hall.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
83
79
BKKx xxxx CO-CURRICULUM II Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain and apply sport science discipline in sports activity. 2. Show the technique confidently and efficiently. 3. Follow the rules and regulations properly in the
tournament. 4. Demonstrate positive values and develop teamwork skills. Synopsis This course introduces the basic skills of sports like tennis, badminton etc. Students will be taught the theoretical and practical aspects of the sports: history and development, physical fitness components, tournaments management, rules and regulations of the games. Students are also taught techniques of the sports; how to hold the racquet, service, forehand stroke, backhand stroke and all other necessary techniques. Students will also be exposed to strategies on how to play single and double game. References 1. Sharpley. F, “Tennis a guidebook for teachers, coaches and
players”, Ner Jersey: Prentice Hall, 2003 2. Serguei. S, “Senaman Kecergasan Fizikal”, Kuala Lumpur:
First Agency Publishing (M) Sdn Bhd, 1998 3. MacCurdy. D, “Tennis: Strike for Success, Champaign:
Human Kinetics, 1994
BLHW 1702 ISLAMIC & ASIAN CIVILIZATIONS (TITAS) LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. explain the concept of civilization studies in order to face
global development in relation to religion, race and nation. 2. elaborate on issues related to world civilization via group
presentations. 3. interrelate the history of the advancement of world
civilizations like the Islamic, Chinese and Indian civilizations via group work.
SYNOPSIS This course provides knowledge on various civilizations. It introduces Islamic civilization as the basis for the Malay and Malaysian civilization. Additionally, issues related to the Chinese and Indian civilizations together with current and future issues of various world civilizations are also discussed. REFERENCES 1. Osman Bakar. (2009). Modul Pengajian Tamadun Islam &
Tamadun Asia. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbit Universiti Malaya. 2. Sazelin Arif, Ahmad Ridzwan Mohd Noor, Mahadi Abu
Hassan, Nooraini Sulaiman & Ali Hafizar Mohammad Rawi. (2007). Tamadun Islam dan Tamadun Asia. Kuala Lumpur: Mc Graw-Hill (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.
3. Hashim Musa. (2005). Pemerkasaan Tamadun Melayu Malaysia Menghadapi Globalisasi Barat. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbit Universiti Malaya. (TITAS)
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
84
80
BLHW 2712 ETHNIC RELATIONS LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of this course, students should be able to: 4. elaborate on the challenges of cultural plurality and ethnic
relations in Malaysia via group work (P2, LS) 5. interrelate the role of cultural plurality, society and ethnic
groups in the Malaysian unity context (C3, TS) 6. share learning experiences on the issues of socio-culture
appropriately (A3, EM). SYNOPSIS This course focuses on the basic concepts of culture and ethnic relations in Malaysia. It exposes students to ethnic relations in the development of the Malaysian society. Besides, this course aims to give an understanding of the global challenges facing ethnic and cultural relations at the Malaysian level. REFERENCES 4. Shamsul Amri Baharuddin. (2007). Modul Hubungan Etnik.
UPENA, KPTM. 5. Abdul Aziz Bari. (2008). Perlembagaan Malaysia. Shah
Alam: Arah Publication Sdn. Bhd. 6. Mohd Taib Hj Dora. (2005). Liberalisasi Komuniti. Melaka:
Penerbit Universiti Teknikal Malaysia Melaka.
BLHW xxxx THIRD LANGUAGE Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Present orally the language in correct grammatically. 2. Construct and write basic grammatically -in correct
sentences in the language. 3. Demonstrate their language in proficiency skills. Synopsis This course is designed to equip and improve student’s proficiency so as to enable them to understand and communicate at the beginners’ level through both spoken and written form. All the four proficiency skills are taught in an integrated approach so as to build confidence in them to understand and appreciate the language. References (Depends on language offered)
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
85
81
BLHC 4032 CRITICAL & CREATIVE THINKING LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of the course, students should be able to: 5. discuss basic principles of critical and creative thinking skills
in solving daily tasks. 6. apply the tools of critical and creative thinking in problem
solving and technical innovation. 7. respond in group discussions on issues related to the
development of critical and creative thinking skills. 8. solve problems in case studies relating to contemporary
issues. SYNOPSIS This course is designed to give students an introduction to the principles of critical and creative thinking, and problem-solving. Students will be exposed to the roles of the right brain and left brain, mental determination, elements of critical and creative thinking as well as problem solving. This subject is conducted in accordance with the concept of problem-based learning (PBL). REFERENCES 5. Aziz Yahya, Aida Nasirah Abdullah, Hazmilah Hasan, Raja
Roslan Raja Abd Rahman. (2011) Critical and Creative Thinking Module 2. Melaka. Penerbit UTeM
6. Buzan, T. & Buzan, B. (2006). The Mind Map Book, Essex: BBC Active, Pearson Education.
7. Claxton, G. & Lucas, B. (2007). The Creative Thinking Plan, London: BBC Books.
1. Reichenbach, W. (2000). Introduction to Critical Thinking,McGraw-Hill College.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
86
82
BENH 1263 ALGEBRA AND CALCULUS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Identify various kinds of functions and their nature. 2. Assemble the concept of complex number in technology
engineering problems. 3. Apply matrix to solve simultaneous equations and Eigen
value problem. 4. Classify the techniques of differentiation and integration
according to the particular problems in technology engineering.
5. Report writing assignment / case studies in individual or group.
Synopsis This course will discuss the Complex numbers, Matrix Algebra, Functions, Limits and Continuity, Differentiation and Integration References 1. Glyn James, Modern Engineering Mathematics, 4th Edition,
Pearson, 2007 2. Anton H., Calculus, 9th Edition, John Wiley 2009. 3. John R. Durbin, Modern Algebra: An introduction, 6th
Edition, John Wiley 2009 4. Steward J., Calculus-Concepts and Contexts, Brooks/Cole,
9th Edition, 2009. 5. Stroud K.A., Engineering Mathematics, 5th Edition, Palgrave
Macmillan 2001 6. Glyn James, Modern engineering mathematics, Pearson
Education 2010
BTNH 1123 TECHNICAL PHYSICS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Define the basic concepts in physics. 2. Apply the physics concept systematically in electronics
engineering. 3. Solve broadly-defined physic problems to reach
substantiated conclusions using appropriate techniques. 4. Display an ability to follow lab procedure in handling physic
experiment through lab session. 5. Work individually or in groups effectively to perform
assignments/tasks given
Synopsis This course will discuss about Mechanics: Physical Quantities and Measurements, Kinematics of Linear Motion, Force, Momentum and Impulse, Work, Energy and Power, Static, Circular Motion, etc. Properties of Matter: Static, Dynamics, Circular Motion, Simple Harmonic, Moment of Inertia, Density and Specific Gravity, Hydrostatics, Elasticity, Friction, Viscosity, Osmosis, Diffusion, Acceleration and Newton’s Second Law of Motion, Motion with a Changing Velocity and Ohm law. Thermodynamics, Wave, Light & Sound. All topics covered are basic knowledge that essential for engineering programs. References 1. Giancolli DC, “Physics for Scientists and Engineers with
Modern Physics”, 4th Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2009. 2. “Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics”,
8th Edition, Cengage learning, 2010. 3. Giambatista A., Richardson B.M and Richardson R.C.,
“College Physics”, 2nd Edition, Mc-Graw Hill, 2007. 4. Walker J.S., “Physics”, 3rd Edition, Addison Wesley, 2007.
Programme Core Subjects (P)
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
87
83
BENH 1273 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Use an analytical method to solve a particular ordinary
differential equation. 2. Assemble the method of Laplace Transform to solve a
particular ordinary differential equation. 3. Perform an analytical method to obtain the Fourier series
of basic function. 4. Apply the concept of Fourier Series in order to solve the
technology engineering problems. 5. Report writing assignment / case studies in individual or
group.
Synopsis This course covers will discuss Ordinary differential equations: 1st-oder differential equations, 2nd-order differential equations. The Laplace Transform, Fourier Series. References 1. Dennis G. Zill & Micheal R. Cullen (2008). Differential
Equations with Boundary-Value Problems, Sixth Edition. Thomson Learning, Inc.
2. R. Kent Nagle, Edward B. Saff & Arthur David Snider (2008). Fundamentals of Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems, Fifth Edition. Pearson Education Inc.
3. C. Henry Edwards & David E. Penney (2008). Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems, Fourth Edition. Pearson Education Inc.
4. Glyn James, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Pearson Education, 2010.
5. Yosza Dasril, Lecture Notes: Differential Equations, 2010
BENH 2123 STATISTIC & NUMERICAL METHOD Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe the concept of central tendency, dispersion,
probability and distribution, estimation, hypothesis testing and simple linear regression.
2. Recognize the existence of errors in numerical computations.
3. Use the concept of central tendency, dispersion, probability and distribution, estimation, hypothesis testing and simple linear regression to solve applied problems.
4. Use numerical methods to solve the mathematical problems.
5. Analyze the statistical data 6. Report writing assignment / case studies in individual or
group. Synopsis This course will discuss Description statistics, Probability distribution, Estimation and Hypothesis testing, Simple regression and correlation analysis. Solution of Nonlinear Equations, Solution of Linear Systems, Interpolation References 1. Bluman A.G, Elementary Statistics: A Step By Step
Approach: A Step by Step Approach with Formula Card, McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 7 edition, 2008
2. Douglas C. Montgomery, George C.Runger, Applied Statistics and Probability for Engineers, 3rd Edition, John Wiley, 2010
3. Sheldon M Ross, Introduction to Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists, Academic Press, 4 edition, 2009.
4. Chapra S.C. and Canale R.P. Numerical Methods for Engineers, 6th edition, New York: McGraw-Hill, 2010.
5. Faires J.D. and Burden R. Numerical Analysis, 9th edition, USA: Brooks/Cole, Cengage Learning, 2010.
6. Khoo C.F., Sharifah Sakinah, S.A, Zuraini, O. and Lok Y. Y. Numerical Methods, 3rd edition, Petaling Jaya: Pearson Prentice Hall, 2009.
7. http://www.scilab.org/support/documentation/manuals.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
88
84
BLHC 4052 TECHNOPRENEURSHIP Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe the concept and theory of entrepreneurship
(technopreneurship). 2. Identify & analyze technopreneurial opportunities. 3. Evaluate and exploit these opportunities with a view of
creating & innovating a new business venture. 4. Combine business functions in business planning
effectively. 5. Demonstrate the principles of financial statement, the
necessity for market studies, strategic relationship and world globalised market to competitive opportunity to be achieved.
Synopsis This subject will assist students by getting motivated in entrepreneurship technology and the skills, as well as learn and obtain the principles and training required to form, improve and expand their business. The subject covers theory and training that can aid the students to acquire and build the expertise required before plunging into any business projects. This subject will assist in making and inventing new business areas, starting a new business or students who hope to familiarise with the concepts, issues and techniques of forming a business and technology entrepreneurship. The students will be equipped with the methods required to prepare cash flow statement and fundamentals in developing business plans. References 1. Kamariah Ismail, Noraini Abu Talib et.al (2009), Technology
Entrepreneurship, Prentice Hall, Pearson Malaysia Sdn. Bhd.
2. Nafees A. Khan Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship. 2007. 3. Bruce R. Barringer and Duane Ireland Entrepreneurship:
Successfully Launching New Ventures (3rd Edition) 2009. 4. Robert Hisrich, Michael Peters and Dean Shepherd
Entrepreneurship 2009.
BLHC 4062 PROJECT MANAGEMENT Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain how project can contribute to the strategic mission
of an organization. 2. Describe the importance of a project to the organization. 3. Propose proposal that are comprehensive based on the
engineering fields in line to the command of the industries. 4. Apply project management tools effectively throughout.
Synopsis The aim of this subject is to provide knowledge to the students on strategic mission of a project in a contemporary organization. This subject also exposes the students to the various types of management that will bring greater opportunity of success to a project. Besides it aslo focus on the factors that will contribute to the high achievement of project group development. The students are given skill to coordinate complex netting that covers vendors, subcontractors, project group members, highest management level, project management level, project management hierarchy and clientele. The students can become project managers as their career. References 1. Gray, C.F & Larson, E.W (2006) Project Management: The
Managerial Process 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill. 2. Lewis, J.P (2005) The Project Managers’s Desk Reference; A
Comprehensive Guide to Project, Planning, Scheduling, Evaluation, Control and System, Golden Rock Centre Sdn. Bhd.
3. Mantel JR. S.J Meredith , J.R. Shafer, S.M and Sutton, M.M (2005) Core Concept: Project Management in Practice 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
89
85
BLHC 4072 ENGINEERING MANAGEMENT
Learning Outcomes Upon completing this course, students should be able to: 1. Analyze the way an engineering organization functions. 2. Practice the functions of management. 3. Identify formal structure requirement for engineering
operation activities. 4. Describe the various management methods available for
engineering operation activities.
Synopsis The subject provides the introduction on the requirement and application techniques of management found in engineering organizations. It covers technical knowledge with basic business and management techniques. This module also produces engineers that will meet the management responsibilities, formulate useful business ideas and take into account on the requirement in leadership role to face up to the challenges in a competitive environment.
References 1. Lucy C. Morse and Daniel L. Babcock Managing Engineering
and Technology (5th Edition) 2009. 2. John M. Nicholas and Herman Steyn Project Management
for Business, Engineering, and Technology, Third Edition (Paperback - Feb 20, 2008)
BTNU 4843 ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY ETHICS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the effects and impact of technology on society,
culture and environment 2. Practice professional responsibilities and abide to code of
ethics. 3. Study critically and handle social, cultural and global
environmental issues. 4. Perform and display effectively the assignment given in
group or individual. Synopsis This subject will discussed on Ethics and professionalism, Engineers and society, Professional ethics, Code of ethics, IEM, BEM code of ethics, Regulation on professional conducts, Engineer as employee, Moral decision making, Engineer Accountability, Engineers legal liability Engineer and environment:, Ethics dealing with human , Global and Local Case Studies; Added Topics:, OSHA, Career Guidance, Job Seeking Strategies. References 1. Charles B. Fleddermann, “Engineering Ethics” 3rd Ed,
Prentice Hall, 2008. 2. Engineering Ethics (3rd Edition) by Charles Byrns
Fleddermann (2007) 3. Introduction to Engineering Ethics by Mike Martin and
Roland Schinzinger (2009) 4. Ethics of Emerging Technologies: Scientific Facts and Moral
Challenges by Thomas F. Budinger and Miriam D. Budinger (Apr 7, 2006)
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
90
86
BTNU 4826 & 4836 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING & INDUSTRIAL ASSESMENT Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply knowledge learnt, gain new skills and be aware of
current technologies 2. Identify industrial problems and suggest possible solutions 3. Display and ability communicate effectively 4. Work effectively in real-life working environment 5. Report activities orally and in writing 6. Discuss elements of entrepreneurship in related field 7. Demonstrate the right work attitude 8. Work effectively in organization Synopsis All degree students will be placed in appropriate local industries or government corporations for 20 weeks normally in the second semester of their third year of study. Student will be exposed to real life working environment relevant to their field of study. References Industrial Training Guide Book, UTeM.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
91
87
BTCS 1113 BASIC ELECTRONIC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe basic functions of electronic components 2. Solve basic electronic circuits analysis using simulation
software. 3. Display and evaluate the performance of electronic circuits 4. Perform effectively in given tasks and assignment by
managing different information from multiple resources
Synopsis This subject discuss an introduction the concept of basic electronic components quantity such as charge, current, voltage, energy and power, introduction to dynamic, electrostatic and magnetic, and dependent sources. There are two section which cover topics on concept and function of electronic components in electronic system such as resistor, capacitor, inductor, transformers, fuse, cable, diode and transistor. The next section will deals with topics such as system numbers, logic gates, Boolean operation, combination logic (type of flip flop), register and digital circuit application. References 1. All New Electronics Self-Teaching Guide (Wiley Self
Teaching Guides) by Harry Kybett and Earl Boysen , 2008 2. Make: Electronics (Learning by Discovery) by Charles Platt,
2009. 3. Teach Yourself Electricity and Electronics, Fourth Edition by
Stan Gibilisco, 2006 4. Digital Systems: Principles and Design – Paperback by Raj
Kamal, 2009.
BTCS 1213 PROGRAMMING FUNDAMENTAL Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply basic programming principles and algorithms of C
programming language. 2. Construct C programming structure using programming
fundamentals and principles. 3. Analyze small to medium scale problems and develop
solutions. 4. Demonstrate an understanding of ethical and legal
responsibility in code of conduct. Synopsis Topics covered: basic programming principles such as introduction to C programming consists of syntax, variables and basic data type, more fundamentals programming structure such as operator, rules / condition, looping, function, array and sequences. The subject is a compulsory to build a basic background in programming. Visual C++ IDE will be used for the compiler and editor in this subject. References 1. Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel, C How To Program 6th Edition,
Pearson Education Inc, 2010. 2. Michael A. Vine, C Programming 2nd Edition for The
Absolute Beginner, Thomson Course Technology, USA, 2008.
3. Delores M. Etter, Engineering Problem Solving with C 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2007.
BTCS Course Core Subjects (K)
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
92
88
BTCS 1003 COMPUTER ENGINEERING WORKSHOP I Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe basic electronic components. 2. Design and simulate electronics computer aided design
software for circuit analysis. 3. Construct and demonstrate basic soldering technique for
circuit. 4. Revise the alternatives that exist in the selection of
hardware, software and computer engineering facilities from different resources when implementing the given task.
5. Work effectively as individual or in group and present the given task orally.
6. Study the various resources to complete the given task.
Synopsis The first part is dedicated to general practice of engineering. Students will experience mechanical, electrical, electronic and manufacturing practices. The topics covered in first part are electronics circuit design and analysis using electronics computer aided design software, printed circuit board design and fabrication and soldering technique for electronic circuits. The second part is dedicated for practice of computer engineering. . The topics that will cover in second part are three major areas in computer engineering discipline namely computer networking, operating system and computer organization. References 1. Handbook of International Electrical Safety Practices, Peri,
WILEY.2010 2. Audel Guide to the 2011 National Electrical Code: All New
Edition (Audel Technical Trades Series) - Paperback (Mar. 1, 2011) by Paul Rosenberg
3. EMC and the Printed Circuit Board: Design, Theory and Layout Made Simple, Mark.I, WILEY.
4. Turbo Cad Deluxe V.15 2D & 3D Precision Design by IMSI 2008
5. Industrial Bioseparations: Principles and Practice by Daniel Forciniti 2008
BTNT 1013 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT I Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Solve simple electric circuit based on various analysis
technique. 2. Solve a terminated two-port circuit to find currents,
voltages, impedances and ratios of interest. 3. Construct, test and troubleshoot simple electric circuits. 4. Report and explain their given assignment clearly.
Synopsis This subject will discussed on direct current circuits, SI units, charge, current, voltage and power, Ohm’s Law, Kirchhoff’s Law, Wye-Delta transformation, nodal and mesh analysis, Norton Theorem, Thevenin Theorem, Superposition Theorem, maximum power transfer, sinusoids and phasors, two-port networks, X,Y and h – parameters. This subject served as basic knowledge needed for electrical and electronic engineer. References 1. C.K Alexander, M.N Sadiku, “Fundamental of Electric
Circuits”, 4th Edition, Mc Graw Hill, 2008. 2. James W. Nilsson, Susan A, Rieldel, “Electric Circuits”, 8th
Edition, Prentice Hall, 2008. 3. A. R. Hambley, “Electrical Engineering- Principles and
Applications”, 4th Edition, Prentice hall, 2008. 4. W.H Hayt, J.E Kemmerly, S. M Durbin, “Engineering Circuit
Analysis”, 7th Edition, Mc Graw Hill, 2007.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
93
89
BTCS 1013 COMPUTER ENGINEERING WORKSHOP II Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the acquired knowledge from the engineering
practice and safety measure. 2. Identify related industrial problems and suggest possible
solutions. 3. Display the right work attitude. 4. Report technical report in writing. 5. Prepare technical report by using various resources. 6. Discuss elements of entrepreneurship in related field. Synopsis This subject will be provided students need to prepare and submit a technical report based on the acquired knowledge and exposure gained during computer engineering practice. In addition, students will also involve in industrial visit and hearing industrial talk as part of the industrial exposure. References 1. Handbook of International Electrical Safety Practices, Peri,
WILEY.2010 2. Audel Guide to the 2011 National Electrical Code: All New
Edition (Audel Technical Trades Series) - Paperback (Mar. 1, 2011) by Paul Rosenberg
3. EMC and the Printed Circuit Board: Design, Theory and Layout Made Simple, Mark.I, WILEY.
4. Turbo Cad Deluxe V.15 2D & 3D Precision Design by IMSI 2008
5. Industrial Bioseparations: Principles and Practice by Daniel Forciniti 2008
BTCS 1313 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe the concept of database, data modelling
(relationship) and SQL statements basic functions of electronic components
2. Design data conceptual representation using Entity Relationship Model
3. Construct database application based on the current problem requirement
4. Perform effectively as individual or in group to complete tasks and assignment
Synopsis This course is an introduction to database and file management system. It assists the students to form an understanding of data modeling, file management and database system functionality in information system. The students will be introduced to the process of designing, developing and executing database applications. This course focuses on practical skills to create, control and execute statement for database relationship. MySQL Workbench software will be used to design and model the databases for this course. References 1. Andy Oppel. Databases Demystified. 2nd Edition. McGraw-
Hill Osborne Media. 2010 2. Jeffrey A. Hoffer, Mary Prescott and HeikkiTopi. Modern
Database Management. 9th Edition. Prentice Hall. 2008 3. Arlene G. Taylor and Daniel N. Joudrey. The Organization of
Information.3rd Edition. Libraries Unlimited. 2008 4. Alan Dennis Barbara, Haley Wixom and David Tegarden.
Systems Analysis and Design with UML 3rd Edition. Wiley. 2007
5. Peter Rob and Carlos Coronel. Database Systems: Design, Implementation, and Management. Course Technology. 2006
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
94
90
BTCS 1223 ADVANCED PROGRAMMING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply advanced programming principles and algorithms in
C programming language 2. Construct C programming structure using advanced
programming techniques and principles. 3. Design and develop well-structured and reliable program in
C programming language. 4. Follow standard engineering manual to present report
development of application program. 5. Demonstrate an understanding of ethical and legal
responsibility in code of conduct. Synopsis Topics covered: more advanced C programming principles such as pointers, characters and strings, structures, unions, bit manipulations and enumerations and file processing. Chapters are integrated with problem solving methods. The subject is a compulsory to strengthen programming skills in students. Visual C++ IDE will be used for demonstration and laboratory sessions in this subject. References 1. Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel, C How To Program 6th Edition,
Pearson Education Inc, 2010. 2. Michael A. Vine, C Programming 2nd Edition for The
Absolute Beginner, Thomson Course Technology, USA, 2008.
3. Delores M. Etter, Engineering Problem Solving with C 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2007.
BTNE 2323 ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply the concept of AC voltage and current, single phase,
three-phase, transformer and magnetic circuit. 2. Apply the principles of the transformer, magnetic circuit,
single phase, three-phase and alternating voltage and current.
3. Mix the application of the power system and electrical transmission in single phase and three-phase.
4. Classify the application of the alternating voltage and current, single phase, three-phase, transformer and magnetic circuit.
5. Work as a team to measure correctly the voltage and current in single phase, transformer and magnetic in laboratory experiments.
Synopsis Alternating Voltage and Curent, Phasor, Magnetic Circuit, Electromotive force, magnetic field strength, relation between B and H, Kirchhoff’s law magnetic hysteresis, Single Phase Circuit, series resonance, parallel resonance, power factor, transformer, phasor diagram, equivalent circuit voltage regulation and efficiency, O/C and S/C test, Voltage generation and excitation methods, Basic principles of power system, per unit system, electrical transmission. References 1. Hughes E., Electrical Technology, Longman, 10th Edition,
2008. 2. Hadi Saadat, Power System Analysis with Power System
Toolbox Software, Mc-Graw Hill,2nd Edition. 3. Mc Pherson G., Electrical Machine & Transformers,
Wiley,2nd Edition.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
95
91
BTCS 2223 DATA STRUCTURE & ALGORITHM Learning Outcomes Upon completing this course, the student should be able to: 1. Apply the concept of data structures and algorithm
analysis. 2. Discover the benefits and drawbacks of data structures in
terms of memory and run time efficiency. 3. Construct a small application system using appropriate data
structures and algorithms to minimize the use of memory and run time of the system.
4. Organize data structures and construct algorithms to solve the given experimental problem.
5. Perform effectively as individual or in group to complete tasks and assignment.
Synopsis This course will expose the students to the fundamental knowledge of data structures and algorithm analysis. The topics that will be covered in the course include the introduction to data structures and algorithm analysis, fundamental of C++ programming language, object-oriented development, Array, List, Stack, Queue, Trees, Sorting and Searching algorithms. Apart from the theory, students are asked to apply the data structures and algorithms through a small application that is developed in a team. Microsoft Visual Studio C++ will be used as editor for C++ programming languages in this course.
References 1. Michael Main and WlterSavitch, Data Structures and Other
Objects Using C++, Fourth Edition, Pearson, 2010. 2. Jeffrey S. Childs, C++ Classes & Data Structures, Pearson
Prentice Hall, 2008. 3. Jeff Frank M. Carrano, Data Abstraction and Problem
Solving with C++, Fifth Edition, Addison Wesley, 2007. 4. Mark Allen Weiss, Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis
in C++, Third Edition, Addison Wesley, 2006
BTNT 2053 COMMUNICATION PRINCIPLE Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Demonstrate basic principles and components of
telecommunication system. 2. Measure the performance of analog and frequency
modulation techniques through experiments that commonly used in telecommunication system.
3. Design solution for linear or angle modulation system based on given specifications.
4. Demonstrate the effects of noise in telecommunication systems.
5. Work and discuss effectively either individually or in group for any assignment and experiment.
6. Construct experiments and display technical reports. Synopsis This subject will discuss on Introduction to Telecommunication, Linear Modulation, Single Sideband (SSB) Communication Systems, Angle Modulation, Noise and Introduction to Digital Communication The rationale of offering this subject is as the progression of communication system where students should have knowledge of communication principles and basic skills required by the industry. References 1. Wayne Tomasi, Electronics Communications Systems
Fundamentals Through Advanced, Prentice Hall, Fifth Edition, 2004.
2. John G. Proakis, Essentials of Communication Systems Engineering, Prentice Hall, 2005.
3. Frenzel, Communication Electronics/; Principles and Applications, McGraw Hill, Third Edition, 2000.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
96
92
BTNT 2143 SIGNAL & SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain different types of signal and systems properties
that are commonly used in engineering. 2. Produce the Fourier series and transform in terms of
applicable time functions and the resulting spectral properties.
3. Apply the continuous-time Fourier Transform in analyzing non- periodic signal.
4. Use Laplace transform in 2nd order circuit analysis 5. Manipulate and explain a simple Matlab programming for
signal and system applications. 6. Report and explain their given assignment clearly. Synopsis The course will cover various topics such as Introduction to Continuous-Time Signals and Systems: Fundamental Concept, Transformations of Continuous-Time Signals, Signal Characteristics, Common Signals, Continuous-Time Systems and Its Properties, Convolution for Continuous-Time LTI Systems, Properties of Convolution, Properties of LTI Systems; Fourier Series: Introduction of continuous Fourier Series and Its Coefficients; Fourier Transform: Definition, Properties of continuous Fourier Transform, Application of Fourier Transform, Energy and Power Density Spectra; Laplace Transform: Definition, Properties of Laplace Transform, Response of LTI Systems: Initial Condition, Transfer Functions, Convolution, Transforms with Complex and Repeated Poles. References 1. Mrinal Mandal, Amir Asif, Continuous and Discrete Time
Signals and Systems, Cambridge University Press, 2007. 2. C. K Alexander, M. N. O. Sadiku, Fundamental of Electric
Circuit, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2006.William D. Stanley, Network Analysis with Applications, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2000.
3. Charles L. Phillips, John M. Parr, Eve A. Riskin, Signals, Systems and Transforms, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
4. M. J Roberts, Signals and Systems, McGraw Hill, 2003.
BTCS 2213 OPERATING SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the major components of an operating system, its
responsibilities and aspects 2. Differentiate the functionality among various kinds of
operating system. 3. Manipulate operating system theory to solve the basic
functional kernel problems 4. Perform assignment and present technical report both
orally and in writing. Synopsis This course introduces the internal operation of modern operating systems. In particular, the topics that will be covered in the course are Fundamental of Operating Systems, Process & threads Management, Concurrency Control, Memory Management, I/O Systems, File Systems, Protection and Security. Linux will be used as operating system for this course. References 1. William Stallings, Operating Systems: Internals and Design
Principles 6th Ed., Prentice Hall International, Inc., 2008. 2. Silberschatz,A., Operating System Concept 8th. Ed., John
Wiley and Sons, Inc., 2007. 3. Wahidah, Zurina and Fairuz,Practical Approach to Fedora
Core 6 : Beginner and Intermediate, First Edition, 2007. 4. Nutt, G., Operating Systems :A modern Perspective 5th.Ed.,
Eddison Wesley Longman, Inc., ISBN 0-201-74196-2. 2006.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
97
93
BTCS 2123 INTERNET TECHNOLOGY & MULTIMEDIA Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain and apply the concepts of computer networks, core
components of the Internet infrastructure, protocols and services
2. Analyze the implementation of client and server application.
3. Select the best Internet application according to the current situation based on various resources
4. Measure experimental performance using various internet security protocols
Synopsis The course provides an introductory knowledge of technologies related to Internet applications and services. The students are introduced to Internet protocols and their functionalities as well as hardware required to develop and implement Internet applications and services. The course is extended by an introduction to concept of Human-Computer Interaction (HCI) and its relationship in system development.The topics include the basic understanding of cognitive psychology, user interface design, and interaction design. This course is highly in demand since in the past few years there has been an explosion in the number of people using the Internet as well as multimedia. References 1. Douglas E. Comer, The Internet Book, 4th edition. Pearson
Prentice Hall, 2007. 2. Behrouz Forouzan, Data Communications and Networking,
4th Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2007. 3. Jennifer Preece, Yvonne Rogers and Helen Sharp,
Interaction Design: beyond human-computer interaction, (2nd Edition), John Wiley & Sons, 2007.
4. Dov Te’eni, Jane Carey and Ping Zhang, Human Computer Interaction: Developing Effective Organizational Information Systems, John Wiley & Sons, 2007.
BTCS 2134 DIGITAL ELECTRONIC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe basic functions of digital components 2. Design digital system using combinational and sequential
logic. 3. Display and evaluate the performance of sequential logic
circuits. 4. Perform effectively as individual or in group to complete
tasks and assignment 5. Present the assignments and present technical reports both
orally and in writing Synopsis This subject covers the topics of transistor- transistor logic. Logic functions, logic diagrams, Karnaugh maps, Boolean algebra, DeMorgan's Theorem. Numerical codes, arithmetic functions. Combinational circuits such as encoders, decoders, multiplexers, de-multiplexers, comparators. This subject also covers the introduction to memory, programmable logic devices and microcomputer systems. Student will learn the topics on latches and flip-flops, flip-flops operating characteristics and applications. Registers and counters, shift registers, synchronous, asynchronous and modulo counters. References 1. Thomas L. Floyd, Digital Fundamentals (10 edition),
Prentice Hall, 2008 2. Ronald J.Tocci, Neal S.Widmer, Gregory L.Moss, Digital
Systems: Principles and Applications, (11 Edition) Pearson Prentice Hall, 2010
3. William Klietz, Digital Electronic: A Practical Approach, (8 Edition) Prentice Hall, 2007.
4. Marcovitz A. B., Introduction to Logic Design, 2nd Ed., McGraw Hill, 2005
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
98
94
BTCS 2173 COMPUTER NETWORK & SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic concepts, elements and uses of Local Area
Network (LAN) and Wide Area Network (WAN). 2. Design medium access control (MAC) protocols and analyze
critically the problems for various wired and wireless networks implementation.
3. Trace the Internet Protocols (IP); IPv4 and IPv6, TCP and UDP service models and connection establishments.
4. Justify the alternatives that exist in the selection of hardware, software and transmission facilities from different resources when designing and implementing network in a group project.
5. Present the assignments and present technical reports both orally and in writing.
Synopsis Topics covered: Overview: Introduction to Computer Network and System, Networking Equipments and Data Communications, Network Architecture and Protocols, Local and Wide Area Networks, Client-Server Computing: Web technologies, Wireless, Mobile Computing and Mobile Data Access Computer Network and System is a program targeted for dynamic digital and communication careers. It is strongly emphasis on technical aspect and enables employers to meet the needs of Computer Networks and System graduates including some of the best platform for many companies specializing in computer networking and system. This unique curriculum balances theory with extensive hands-on experiments. References 1. Douglas Comer, Computer networks and Internets, 5thEd.
Prentice Hall 2009. 2. William Stallings, Data and Computer Communication, 8th
Ed. Prentice Hall, 2007. 3. Faurozan, B, Data Communication & Networking, 4th Ed.
McGraw Hill, 2007.
BTCS 2313 COMPUTER ORGANISATION & ARCHITECTURE Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe the history and current state of computer
technology. 2. Explain the internal structure and function of a computer
system. 3. Analyze how input/output systems are implemented in a
computer system. 4. Distinguish the characteristics, addressing modes and
formats of any typical instruction set. 5. Develop assembly language program segments to
accomplish simple tasks for any given instruction set 6. Explain advanced concepts in computer system such as
CISC & RISC approaches, pipelining, instruction-level parallelism, etc
7. Measure experimental performance using computer system.
8. Complete tasks and assignment effectively as instructed with the use of modern technology through research and case studies.
Synopsis This course aims to give students a general understanding of how computer systems work internally (ALU, control unit, registers, etc) and externally (I/O interfaces, networking, etc). This will enable the graduates to make intelligent decisions when confronted with computer-related problems at their workplace and also enable graduates to further their studies in the field of computer architecture, organization, and design. References 1. Stallings, William, Computer Organization & Architecture:
Designing for Performance, 8th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2009. 2. A.P.Godse, D.A.Godse, Computer Organization And
Architecture, 1st Edition, Technical Publications, 2010. 3. Abd-El-Barr, Mostafa, Fundamentals of Computer
Organization & Architecture, 1st Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2005.
4. Berger, Arnold S., Hardware and Computer Organization, 1st Edition, Elsevier, 2005.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
99
95
BTCS 3123 DISCRETE MATHEMATIC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain fundamental concept of discrete mathematics 2. Solve problems in computer engineering using software by
referring to discrete mathematic theory. 3. Discuss solutions in group to problems through relevant
information by selecting the suitable discrete structure techniques.
Synopsis Topics covered include: Functions, Relations and Sets: Functions, Relations, Discrete versus continuous functions and relations, Sets, Cardinality and countability; Basic Logics: Propositional logic, Logical connectives, Truth tables, Use of logic to illustrate connectives, Normal forms (conjunctive and disjunctive), Predicate logic, Universal and existential quantification, Limitations of predicate logic, Boolean algebra, Applications of logic to computer engineering; Proof Techniques: Notions of implication, converse, inverse, negation, and contradiction, The structure of formal proofs, Direct proofs, Proof by counterexample, contraposition, etc; Basics of Counting: Permutations and combinations, Counting arguments rule of products, rule of sums, The pigeonhole principle, Generating functions, Applications to computer engineering; Graphs and Trees: Trees, Undirected graphs, Directed graphs, Spanning trees, Shortest path, Euler and Hamiltonian cycles, Traversal strategies; Recursion: Recursive mathematical definitions, Developing recursive equations, etc. References 1. James L. Hein (2009) Discrete Structures, Logic, and
Computability , Jones & Bartlett Publishers 2. Harry Kesten (2010) Probability on Discrete Structures
(Encyclopaedia of Mathematical Sciences), Springer. 3. Douglas, E., Crawley, J.W. (2006). Discrete Mathematics.
John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 4. Alexander Stanoyevitch (2011) Discrete Structures with
Contemporary Applications. Chapman and Hall/CRC.
BTCS 3134 MICROPROCESSOR & MICROCONTROLLER TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe the microprocessor and microcontroller’s
architecture and peripheral subsystem of MC68K and PIC16F877A.
2. Classify interrupts and internal registers modifications to solve specific I/O tasks.
3. Display microprocessor and microcontroller subsystem’s performance in peripheral interfacing via high/low level language
4. Design and develop a microcontroller-based system with peripheral devices interface.
5. Perform efficiently as individual or in group to complete tasks and assignment.
Synopsis This subject will provide the students both solid theoretical and practical applications to the microprocessors / microcontrollers based system. Extensive practical-oriented sessions will be given using MC68K microprocessor and PIC microcontroller involving program development software, chip programming and debugging. Topics covered are microcomputer system & peripheral design, software and hardware integration; interrupt control system, analog interfacing, etc. References 1. Dogan Ibrahim, Advanced Microcontroller Projects in C,
Newnes Elsevier Ltd., 2008. 2. PIC Microcontrollers: Know It All (Newnes Know It All) by
Lucio Di Jasio, Tim Wilmshurst, Dogan Ibrahim and John Morton, 2007
3. M Ali Mazidi , PIC Microcontroller and Emdedded System (2 edition), , 2007.
4. Beginner's Guide To Embedded C Programming: Using The Pic Microcontroller And The Hitech Pic-Lite C Compiler by Chuck Hellebuyck, 2008
5. Microprocessor Theory and Applications with 68000/68020 and Pentium by Mohamed Rafiquzzaman (2008)
6. Microprocessors Software and Hardware Design Using MC68000 by M. H. Hassan (2008).
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
100
96
BTCS 3323 COMPUTER SYSTEM ENGINEERING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the fundamental computer system knowledge and
requirements. 2. Analyze analytical models of computer systems and
components with respect to reliability, performance and life cycle cost
3. Adapt the concept and theory of computer system engineering to solve the given experimental problem.
4. Work effectively as individual or in group to complete tasks and assignment.
Synopsis This course covers topics on the engineering of computer software and hardware systems: techniques for controlling complexity; strong modularity using client-server design, virtual memory, and threads; networks; atomicity and coordination of parallel activities; recoveryand reliability; privacy, security, and encryption; and impact of computer systems on society. Knowledge, understanding, analysis and design abilities are developed principally through lectures and tutorials. Practical and design skills are developed through laboratory work involving problem solving assignments and practical exercises. References 1. Saltzer, Jerome H., and M. Frans Kaashoek. Principles of
Computer System Design: An Introduction, Part I. San Francisco, CA: Morgan Kaufmann, 2009.
2. Morris, Robert, and Samuel Madden. 6.033 Computer System Engineering, Spring 2009. (Massachusetts Institute of Technology: MIT OpenCourseWare), http://ocw.mit.edu (Accessed 27 Sep, 2010). License: Creative Commons BY-NC-SA
3. Vincent P. Heuring, Computer Systems Design and Architecture, Prentice Hall, 2nd ed.,2003.
4. Alexander Kossiakoff, Systems Engineering Principles and Practice, Wiley-Interscience, 2002.
5. Andrew P. Sage, Introduction to Systems Engineering, Wiley-Interscience, 1st ed., 2000.
BTCS 3423 COMPUTER & NETWORK SECURITY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain and elaborate the concept of computer security
theories and related items. 2. Manipulate the suitable components in providing service
and security mechanism in computer software, operating system, database, network system and computer security management.
3. Design the appropriate security system mechanism for computer software and computer network.
4. Perform effectively as individual or in group to complete tasks and assignment.
5. Present the assignments and present technical reports both orally and in writing.
Synopsis This subject will be discussed on how to control failures of confidentiality, integrity and availability in applications, databases, operating systems and networks alike. Beside that students should be able to implement the cyber law to protect their rights. Students also will learn on how to plan the recovery solution if any disaster happens to the computing environment. References 1. Siti Rahayu, Robiah, Mohd Faizal and Nazrulazhar (2006),
Information Technology Security, Pearson, ISBN 13 978-983-3655-47-2.
2. Dieter Gollmann (2006). Computer Security 3. William Stallings (2006), 4th Edition, Cryptography and
Network Security: Principles and Practice, Pearson International Edition, ISBN 0-13-202322-9.
4. Mark Merkow and Jim Breithaupt (2006), Information Security: Principles and Practices, Pearson Prentice Hall, ISBN 0-13-154729-1.
5. Security+ Guide to Network Security Fundamentals by Mark D. Ciampa 2008
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
101
97
BTCS 4213 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic concept, element and uses of software
engineering, database systems and project management 2. Develop software application with database management
system according to the suitable software process lifecycle 3. Adapt suitable CASE tool to solve case study given 4. Perform ethically in solving given software engineering
problems by managing different information from multiple resources
5. Work effectively as individual or in group to complete tasks and assignment.
Synopsis Introduction to software development, software engineering and database system; Software lifecycle model, CASE tools, requirement definition and management, requirement analysis, requirement specification document. Software design and modeling; design process, design quality and metrics, design strategy, software testing, database management and query language. Software Project management including estimation and quality management. Unified Modeling Language (UML) is used to design and model in the software development process. For this purpose, Poseidon will be used as the software tools. References 1. IEEE Standards Association, “IEEE Std 12207-2008 Systems
and software engineering – Software life cycle processes”, 2008.
2. Sommerville, I (2007) Software Engineering, 8th Edition, Addison Wesley.
3. Pressman, R.S (2008) Software Engineering A Practitioner’s Approach, 7th Edition. McGraw-Hill.
4. CMMI Product Team, “CMMI for Development, Version 1.2”, August 2008.
5. Elmasri, Navathe, (2009) Fundamentals of Database Systems6th Edition. Addison Wesley.
BTCS 3133 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe the basic theory in digital signal processing. 2. Demonstrate the concepts in digital signal processing such
in discrete-time signals and systems and spectrum representations.
3. Display the impulse response, signal flow graph using difference equations, stability determination and z-transform.
4. Combine basic digital filter concepts in digital filters design. 5. Complete tasks and assignment effectively as individual or
in group. Synopsis This subject will cover: Introduction to DSP, discrete-time signals and systems, spectrum of representation of discrete-time signals, discrete Fourier transform, difference equations and discrete-time systems, z-transform and its applications, analysis and design of digital filters and application of digital signal processing. References 1. Norhashimah Mohd Saad, Abdul Rahim Abdullah, Real Time
Digital Signal Processing – A Practical Approach using TMS320C6713 DSP Processor, Penerbit UTeM, 2007.
2. Mitra, Digital Signal Processing – A Computer Based Approach, 3rd Edition, McGraw- Hill, 2006.
3. Oppenheim, Schafer, 3rd Edition Discrete-time Signal Processing, Prentice-Hall, 2009.
4. Proakis, Manolikas, Digital Signal Processing : Principles, Algorithms, and Applications, 4th Edition, Prentice-Hall, 2007.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
102
98
BTNU 3804 FINAL YEAR PROJECT I Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Prepare the objectives for a project, search on related work
done before and basic theory as well as the approach to be used for the project.
2. Organize project plan, divide project to various phases and identify sources of reference required for each phase
3. Work as an individual with the help of the supervisor to look for the solution by integrating knowledge acquired.
4. Demonstrate the right attitude in implementing the project.
Synopsis This module is the preliminary part of the final year’s project. Students should produce a project proposal and start work in their project before the end of the semester. Projects can be the development of software or electronic hardware. Projects can also take the form of case studies or solving industrial problems faced during the students’ industrial training. References None
BTNE 4713 QUALITY MANAGEMENT Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Use and understanding the quality concepts and the
different perspective on quality theories. 2. To apply the quality tools to solve any problems in
organisation. 3. Work effectively as individual or in a group. 4. Study and explain the application of sig-sigma to improve
the quality of management, process and product in organisation.
5. Managing the international quality standard for the customer’s satisfaction.
Synopsis The different of quality theories for many organisatition, comparisme international quality standard for customer satisfaction. The designing of strategy planning, strategy process and ethic to enhance the quality improvement for process and, product with using quality tools. Six –sigma are using for management to improve the mangement strategy planning. References 1. S.Thomas Foster., “Managing Quality”, Second Edition,
Pearson, Prentice Hall Inc. 2. Barrie G. Dale. “Managing Quality”, Fifth Edition 3. Stephen R. Covey's book, The 7 Habits of Highly Effective
People
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
103
99
BTCS 3313 EMBEDDED SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain key features of embedded systems. 2. Designs embedded system program code and construct
simulation of embedded software in host and target system.
3. Construct embedded system hardware design by selecting the suitable embedded system architecture, e.g. system form factor, processors, hardware and necessary peripheral interfaces, based on the sustainability and system requirement.
4. Perform assignment and present technical report both orally and in writing.
Synopsis Topics covered in this course are overview of Embedded System, characteristics & application areas, introduction to assembler-level software and high level language programming for Embedded Systems, introduction to Embedded System hardware, application-level embedded system design concepts in computer engineering. Student of this subject develop practical and theoretical skills for the modern software industry to build innovative system using embedded technology. Students will develop essential skills required to create clever system which drives intelligent robots and more. References 1. Shibu, “Intro To Embedded Systems”, Tata McGraw-Hill
Education, 2009 2. J.K. Peckol, “Embedded systems: A contemporary Design
Tool”, Wiley Publishing, 2007. 3. Michael Barr, Anthony M, “Programming Embedded
Systems with C and GNU Development Tools”, O’Reilly, 2007.
BTCS 4314 REAL TIME SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply the fundamental principles of basic reference model
of real-time systems for uniprocessor and multiprocessor applications.
2. Analyze specific attributes of multitasking and task-scheduling methods to solve related problems of real-time systems.
3. Adapt real-time operating system, scheduling techniques and resources to solve the given experimental problem.
4. Perform effectively as individual or in group to complete tasks and assignment.
Synopsis The topics that will be covered in the course are Introduction to Real-Time Systems, A Reference Model of Real-Time Systems, Scheduling Approaches, Clock-Driven Scheduling, Priority-Driven Scheduling for Periodic, Aperiodic and Sporadic Tasks, Resources and Resource Access Control, Model of Multiprocessor and Distributed Systems, Design of Real-Time Communication Protocol and Design of Real-Time Operating System. LynxOS will be used as real-time operating system for real-time application development and simulation for this course. References 1. E.-R. Olderog and H, Dierks “Real-Time Systems: Formal
Specification and Automatic Verification”, Cambridge University Press, 2008.
2. Hermann Kopetz, “Real-Time Systems: Design Principles for Distributed Embedded Applications (Real-Time Systems Series)”, Springer, 2011.
3. Rob Williams, “Real-Time Systems Development”, Elsevier, 2006.
4. Tarek F. Abdelzaher, Giorgio Buttazzo and Krithi Ramamritham. “Real-Time Systems: The International Journal of Time-Critical Computing Systems”, Springer, 2011.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
104
100
BTCS 4324 COMPUTER INTERFACING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the concept, architecture and peripheral
subsystems of a microcontroller for computer interfacing. 2. Construct a microcontroller-based system with various
peripheral devices interfaces and study the implementation problems during interfacing.
3. Share resources and responsibilities effectively to complete given task on computer interfacing in a group.
4. Manipulate and compare experimental data to solve various problems.
Synopsis This course covers abstractions and implementation techniques for the design of application using computer interfacing. Topics include: microcontroller, features of different I/O peripheral devices and their interfaces, Java programming language and interfacing, sensors and actuators, data analysis and controls and various software and hardware tool which significant for computer interfacing. This subject is taken to expose student to Java programming language and interfacing computer with other peripherals. Eclipse IDE will be used as the compiler and editor to demonstrate programming and in laboratories session in this subject. References 1. Jonathan W. Valvano (2011), Embedded Microcomputer
Systems: Real Time Interfacing, CL-Engineering. 2. Joshua Bloch (2008), Effective Java (2nd Edition), Prentice
Hall. 3. Y. Daniel Liang (2010), Introduction to Java Programming,
Comprehensive, Prentice Hall. 4. Wilbert O. Galitz (2007), The Essential Guide to User
Interface Design: An Introduction to GUI Design Principles and Techniques, Wiley.
5. Harprit Sandhu (2008), Making PIC Microcontroller Instruments and Controllers, McGraw-Hill/TAB Electronics.
6. Harprit Sandhu (2010), Running Small Motors with PIC Microcontrollers, McGraw-Hill/TAB Electronics.
BTCS 4334 VLSI DESIGN & FABRICATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Analysis critically the design problems of the CMOS VTC for
switching threshold, VOH, VOL, VIH, VIL, and noise margins. 2. Apply techniques, such as Euler paths and stick diagrams to
optimize the layout of CMOS logic circuits. 3. Display how to use CMOS gates in several logic functions
(e.g. multiplexers, transmission gate-based XOR gates). 4. Evaluate the CMOS logic gates design using various
methods. 5. Complete tasks and assignment effectively as individual or
in a group
Synopsis Topics covered: Electronic properties of materials: Solid-state materials, Electronics and holes Doping, acceptors and donors, p- and n-type material, Conductivity and resistivity, Drift and diffusion currents, mobility and diffusion; Function of the basic inverter structure: Connectivity, layout, and basic functionality of a CMOS inverter, The CMOS inverter voltage transfer characteristic (VTC), Analysis of the CMOS VTC for switching threshold, VOH, VOL, VIH, VIL, and noise margins, Effect of changing the inverter configuration on the CMOS VTC, Connectivity and basic functionality of a Bipolar ECL inverter, Connectivity and basic functionality of a Bipolar TTL inverter; Combinational logic structures: Basic CMOS gate design, Layout techniques for combinational logic structures, Transistor sizing for complex CMOS logic devices, Transmission gates, Architectural building blocks (multiplexers, decoders, adders, counters, multipliers); Sequential logic structures, etc. References 1. Sung-Mo Kang, Yusuf Leblebici, CMOS Digital Integrated
Circuits, McGraw Hill,2005. 2. CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems Perspective (4th
Edition) by Neil Weste and David Harris , 2010 3. VLSI Test Principles and Architectures: Design for Testability
(Systems on Silicon) by Laung-Terng Wang, Cheng-Wen Wu and Xiaoqing Wen, 2006
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
105
101
BTCS 4344 IMAGE & VIDEO PROCESSING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe the basic theory in two dimensional signal
processing. 2. Demonstrate the concepts in 2-Dimensional filtering and
image enhancing. 3. Analyze the feature extractions and pattern classifications. 4. Compare and evaluate the suitable methods, theory or
equation in order to understand concept image compression and JEPG2000.
5. Complete tasks and assignment effectively as individual or in group.
6. Manipulate and compare experimental data to solve various problems
Synopsis Topics Covered: Introduction to Image Processing, Two-dimensional signals and systems, Sampling in two dimensions, Two-dimensional discrete transforms, Introduction to 2-D filter design, Multi-resolution image processing, Image Estimation and Restoration, Morphological image processing, Edge detection, Fundamentals of image compression, Video processing and compression. After learning this subject, students should be able to use point operations, perform basic image filtering, implement multi-resolution and image classification techniques, video filters, and basic algorithms for image and video compression. References 1. Rafael C. González, Richard Eugene Woods, “Digital Image
Processing”, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2008. 2. Chris Solomon, Toby Breckon, Stuart Gibson,
“Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing: A Practical Approach with Examples in Matlab”, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
3. Sonka, Hlavac& Boyle, “Image Processing, Analysis, and Machine Vision”, ITP, 2007.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
106
102
BTNE 1013 ENGINEERING WORKSHOP I Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Demonstrate safety and health regulation in the lab
activity. 2. Demonstrate and diagnose an electronic circuit using
electronic testing equipment. 3. Manipulate the simulation tools for the electronic circuit
analysis according to IPC standard. 4. Describe and present the given assignment based on
technical report format. 5. Work as a team in practicing the problem based learning
project. 6. Display the ability of presenting lab report and project
outcome orally and in writing. Synopsis Introduction to Industrial Safety and Health + Lab Safety, Equipment- theory, testing and circuit diagnostic & Report writing, Component – introduction, theory, assembly and soldering, Simulation tools - MULTISIM – introduction and application, Problem Based Learning (PBL). References 1. Environmental, Safety and Health Engineering, Gayle
Woodside, WILEY 2. Handbook of International Electrical Safety Practices, Peri,
WILEY 3. Audel House Wiring, All New 8th Edition, Paul Rosenberg,
WILEY 4. EMC and the Printed Circuit Board: Design, Theory and
Layout Made Simple, Mark.I, WILEY 5. Industrial Bioseparations: Principles and Practice, Daniel
Forciniti, WILE
BTNT 1013 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT I Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Solve simple electric circuit based on various analysis
technique. 2. Solve a terminated two-port circuit to find currents,
voltages, impedances and ratios of interest. 3. Construct, test and troubleshoot simple electric circuits. 4. Report and explain their given assignment clearly.
Synopsis This subject will discussed on direct current circuits, SI units, charge, current, voltage and power, Ohm’s Law, Kirchhoff’s Law, Wye-Delta transformation, nodal and mesh analysis, Norton Theorem, Thevenin Theorem, Superposition Theorem, maximum power transfer, sinusoids and phasors, two-port networks, X,Y and h – parameters. This subject served as basic knowledge needed for electrical and electronic engineer. References 1. C.K Alexander, M.N Sadiku, “Fundamental of Electric
Circuits”, 4th Edition, Mc Graw Hill, 2008. 2. James W. Nilsson, Susan A, Rieldel, “Electric Circuits”, 8th
Edition, Prentice Hall, 2008. 3. A. R. Hambley, “Electrical Engineering- Principles and
Applications”, 4th Edition, Prentice hall, 2008. 4. W.H Hayt, J.E Kemmerly, S. M Durbin, “Engineering Circuit
Analysis”, 7th Edition, Mc Graw Hill, 2007.
BTNE Course Core Subjects (K)
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
107
103
BTCS 1213 PROGRAMMING FUNDAMENTAL Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply basic programming principles and algorithms of C
programming language. 2. Construct C programming structure using programming
fundamentals and principles. 3. Analyze small to medium scale problems and develop
solutions. 4. Demonstrate an understanding of ethical and legal
responsibility in code of conduct.
Synopsis Topics covered: basic programming principles such as introduction to C programming consists of syntax, variables and basic data type, more fundamentals programming structure such as operator, rules / condition, looping, function, array and sequences. The subject is a compulsory to build a basic background in programming. Visual C++ IDE will be used for the compiler and editor in this subject. References 1. Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel, C How To Program 6th Edition,
Pearson Education Inc, 2010. 2. Michael A. Vine, C Programming 2nd Edition for the
Absolute Beginner, Thomson Course Technology, USA, 2008.
3. Delores M. Etter, Engineering Problem Solving with C 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2007.
BTNE 1113 ELECTRONIC I Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply the semiconductors theory in electronic applications. 2. Solve problems related to the diode application circuit. 3. Construct electronic circuit when designing simple BJT
amplifier circuits. 4. Construct electronic circuit when designing simple FET
amplifier circuits. 5. Display assignments and technical reports both orally and
in writing Synopsis This course will discuss: 1. Bohr Atomic Model: valency, period table of elements,
trivalent, tetravalent and pentavalent elements, movement electrons in solid: conductor, insulator and semiconductor, bands theory: energy band, conduction band and forbidden band. Doping, p and n materials, pn junction.
2. Silicon Semiconductor Diodes: characteristics and measurement of forward & reverse biased, composite characteristics and load line analysis, clipping and simple rectifier (half & full) circuits, zener diodes characteristics, and simple shunt regulators.
3. Bipolar Junction Transistor: construction and operation of BJT, BJT characteristics and measurement technique, limits of operation, βdc and αdc, DC biasing – DC Load Lines. Amplification of signal. Transistor as a switch.
4. Field Effect Transistor: construction and operation of FET, FET characteristics & diagram, Shockley’s equation, DC biasing – DC Load Lines-Graphical and mathematical approach.
References 1. Boylestad R., Nashelsky L., “Electronic Devices and circuit
Theory”, Ninth Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., 2006. 2. Floyd, “Electronic Devices”, Sixth Edition, Prentice Hall,
2002. 3. R P Punagin, “Basic Electronics”, Mc-Graw Hill, 2000
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
108
104
BTNE 1023 ENGINEERING WORKSHOP II Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Construct an electronic circuit using PSpice and MATLAB
software. 2. Manipulate the Auto CAD software in making of electronic
circuit and other engineering drawing. 3. Construct the printed circuit board using Proteus software. 4. Describe and present the given assignment based on
technical format. 5. Work as a team in doing an electronic mini project. 6. Display the ability of presenting lab report and project
outcome orally and in writing. Synopsis Simulation tools that covers the software of MATLAB, PSpice and AutoCad. Domestic Wiring – theory on domestic wiring, wiring diagram and lab practical. PCB circuit design fabrication using the design software of Proteus, practical design of the printed circuit board using the Proteus. References 1. Environmental, Safety and Health Engineering, Gayle
Woodside, WILEY 2. Handbook of International Electrical Safety Practices, Peri,
WILEY 3. Audel House Wiring, All New 8th Edition, Paul Rosenberg,
WILEY 4. EMC and the Printed Circuit Board: Design, Theory and
Layout Made Simple, Mark.I, WILEY 5. Industrial Bioseparations: Principles and Practice, Daniel
Forciniti, WILE
BTNT 1023 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT II Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the concept of capacitors and inductors. 2. Solve first order and second order circuit problems. 3. Analyze sinusoidal steady-state condition. 4. Apply knowledge of power condition for AC circuits. 5. Design a simple RLC passive filters. 6. Analyze frequency response of the AC circuits and draw a
Bode plot. 7. Report and explain their given assignment clearly. Synopsis This subject will discussed on introduction to Capacitors and Inductors, Series and Parallel Circuits of Capacitors and Inductors, First and Second-Order Circuits, Step Response of The Circuits, Steady-State Analysis, AC Power Analysis, Average Power, RMS Values, Power Factor, Frequency Response, Transfer Function and Bode Plot, Series and Parallel Resonance, Filters. This subject served as basic knowledge needed for electrical and electronic engineer. References 1. Alexander and Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”,
Third Edition, Mc Graw Hill, 2006. 2. James W.Nilsson, “Electric Circuit”, Sixth Edition, Prentice
Hall, 2005. 3. Thomas L.Floyd, “Electric Circuits Fundamentals”, Seventh
Edition, 2007.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
109
105
BTCS 1223 ADVANCED PROGRAMMING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply advanced programming principles and algorithms in
C programming language 2. Construct C programming structure using advanced
programming techniques and principles. 3. Design and develop well-structured and reliable program in
C programming language. 4. Follow standard engineering manual to present report
development of application program. 5. Demonstrate an understanding of ethical and legal
responsibility in code of conduct. Synopsis Topics covered: more advanced C programming principles such as pointers, characters and strings, structures, unions, bit manipulations and enumerations and file processing. Chapters are integrated with problem solving methods. The subject is a compulsory to strengthen programming skills in students. Visual C++ IDE will be used for demonstration and laboratory sessions in this subject. References 1. Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel, C How To Program 6th Edition,
Pearson Education Inc, 2010. 2. Michael A. Vine, C Programming 2nd Edition for The
Absolute Beginner, Thomson Course Technology, USA, 2008.
3. Delores M. Etter, Engineering Problem Solving with C 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2007.
BTNE 1123 ELECTRONIC II Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply the fundamentals of small signal audio amplifiers. 2. Measure response of single stage audio amplifiers using
both BJT and FETs. 3. Demonstrate single stage and multistage amplifiers at mid-
band, low and high frequencies. 4. Construct the design of Op-Amps, and analyze basic Op-
amp circuits. 5. Display findings orally or in writing by performing
assignments individually or in groups effectively.
Synopsis This course will discuss BJT Transistor modelling, CE, CC and CB configuration, BJT small signal analysis, Feedback configuration, FET small-signal analysis, Frequency response, Bode plot, Bandwidth, Special amplifier: cascade, cascode, Darlington, multistage, differential amplifier circuit, Operational amplifiers: inverting, non-inverting, summing and buffer References 1. Boylestad R., Nashelsky L., “Electronic Devices and circuit
Theory”, Ninth Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., 2006. 2. S.H.Ruslan et.al. “ Elektronik II” Penerbitan UTM 1998. 3. Floyd, “Electronic Devices”, Sixth Edition, Prentice Hall,
2002. 4. Theodore F. Bogart Jr., Jeffrey S. Beasley and Guillermore
Rico, “ Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education, 2004
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
110
106
BTCS 2134 DIGITAL ELECTRONIC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe basic functions of digital components 2. Design digital system using combinational and sequential
logic. 3. Display and evaluate the performance of sequential logic
circuits. 4. Perform effectively as individual or in group to complete
tasks and assignment 5. Present the assignments and present technical reports both
orally and in writing Synopsis This subject covers the topics of transistor- transistor logic. Logic functions, logic diagrams, Karnaugh maps, Boolean algebra, DeMorgan's Theorem. Numerical codes, arithmetic functions. Combinational circuits such as encoders, decoders, multiplexers, de-multiplexers, comparators. This subject also covers the introduction to memory, programmable logic devices and microcomputer systems. Student will learn the topics on latches and flip-flops, flip-flops operating characteristics and applications. Registers and counters, shift registers, synchronous, asynchronous and modulo counters. References 1. Thomas L. Floyd, Digital Fundamentals (10 edition),
Prentice Hall, 2008 2. Ronald J.Tocci, Neal S.Widmer, Gregory L.Moss, Digital
Systems: Principles and Applications, (11 Edition) Pearson Prentice Hall, 2010
3. William Klietz, Digital Electronic: A Practical Approach, (8 Edition) Prentice Hall, 2007.
4. Marcovitz A. B., Introduction to Logic Design, 2nd Ed., McGraw Hill, 2005
BTNE 2033 ENGINEERING DRAWING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Sketch engineering components manually and using
computer software. 2. Produce technical drawing by using manual draft technique
and using AutoCAD software. 3. Manipulate the Auto CAD software in making drawing and
troubleshoot when error occur. 4. Complete given assignments effectively in group or
individual and present results in the form of standard engineering report.
5. Demonstrate an understanding of ethical and legal responsibility in code of conduct.
Synopsis This subject will discuss draft techniques manually and using computer software (AUTOCAD), basic hardware of draft drawing, technique and applications in producing various technical drawing, AUTOCAD software, interfacing AUTOCAD, editing command, coordinate systems, template and layers 3D modeling. It will help students to read the engineering drawing as well in the AUTOCAD drawing. This subject will introduce students to basic information, skills, and concepts related to drafting and design with the usage of AutoCAD tools and commands References 1. Mohd Ramzan Zainal, Badri Abd Ghani dan Yahya Samian,
Lukisan Kejuruteraan Asas, UTM Skudai, 2000. 2. Yarwood, An Introduction To AutoCAD 2002, Prentice Hall,
London, 2002. 3. F. E. Giesecke, Technical Drawing, 11th Ed., Prentice Hall,
New York, 1999. 4. Jensen, D. H. Jay, Engineering Drawing And Design, 5th Ed.,
Glencoe and McGraw Hill, New York, 1996
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
111
107
BTNT 2053 COMMUNICATION PRINCIPLE Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Demonstrate basic principles and components of
telecommunication system. 2. Measure the performance of analog and frequency
modulation techniques through experiments that commonly used in telecommunication system.
3. Design solution for linear or angle modulation system based on given specifications.
4. Demonstrate the effects of noise in telecommunication systems.
5. Work and discuss effectively either individually or in group for any assignment and experiment.
6. Construct experiments and display technical reports. Synopsis This subject will discuss on Introduction to Telecommunication, Linear Modulation, Single Sideband (SSB) Communication Systems, Angle Modulation, Noise and Introduction to Digital Communication The rationale of offering this subject is as the progression of communication system where students should have knowledge of communication principles and basic skills required by the industry. References 1. Wayne Tomasi, Electronics Communications Systems
Fundamentals Through Advanced, Prentice Hall, Fifth Edition, 2004.
2. John G. Proakis, Essentials of Communication Systems Engineering, Prentice Hall, 2005.
3. Frenzel, Communication Electronics/; Principles and Applications, McGraw Hill, Third Edition, 2000.
BTNE 2114 ELECTRONIC III Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply fundamental knowledge of electronics to explain the
operation, performance and the application of electronic devices such as SCR, SCS, GTO, LASCR, DIAC, TRIAC, UJT and PUT.
2. Analyze the operation of power amplifier, active filter and oscillator circuits.
3. Design power supply circuit using IC regulator. 4. Construct and measure the performance of applied
electronic circuits through lab sessions. 5. display an ability to report findings orally or in writing by
performing assignments/experiments effectively.
Synopsis This course will discuss about Electronic Devices: Application of electronic devices such as SCR, SCS, GTO, LASCR, DIAC, TRIAC, UJT and PUT. Filter: filter applications (basic filter concepts, filter response characteristics, active LP filter, active HP filter, active BP filter, active BS filter and filter response measurement). Oscillator circuits: Feedback oscillator principles, oscillators with the RC feedback circuits, LC feedback circuits, crystal oscillator, Astable and Monostable using op-amp, the 555 timer and applications. Power amplifier circuits: Class A, class B and class AB. Power supply: Power supply circuit, IC voltage regulator and application. These topics are very important to students because it gives emphasis on the design of circuits used in electronic systems References 1. Boylestad R., Nashelsky L., “Electronic Devices and circuit
Theory”, Ninth Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., 2006. 2. Stanley, W.D., “Op-Amps. and Integrated Linear Circuit”,
Prentice Hall, 2002 3. Boylestad, R.L., 9th Edition, “Electronic Devices”, Prentice
Hall, 2006
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
112
108
BTNE 2244 CONTROL PRINCIPLE Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Measure the response characteristic and differentiate them
between open loop and closed loop system 2. Solve mathematical model for electrical and mechanical
systems using transfer function and state space method. 3. Solve the time response from the transfer function and use
poles and zeros to determine the response of a control system.
4. Manipulate the Routh-Hurwitz criterion method in determining system’s stability through experiment.
5. Demonstrate performance of Gain Adjustment compensator in controlling broadly defined system.
6. Display the ability of presenting lab report orally and in writing.
Synopsis This course will discuss introduction to control system, frequency domain modelling, Laplace transform, transfer function, electric network transfer function, translational mechanical system, rotational mechanical system transfer function, time domain modelling, general state space representation, transfer function and state space conversion, time response, poles, zeros and system response, First and Second order systems, under-damped system, reduction of multiple subsystems, blocks diagrams, feedback systems, signal flow graphs, Mason’s rule, Routh- Hurwitz criterion and Gain Adjustment compensator design. References 1. Nise, S Norman, Control Systems Engineering, 3th Edition,
John Wiley & Sons Inc., United State of America, 2008. 2. Bishop, Dorf, Modern Control Systems, 10th Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2008. 3. Smarajit Ghosh, “Control System: Theory and Applications”,
Pearson India, 2005.
BTNE 2323 ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply the concept of AC voltage and current, single phase,
three-phase, transformer and magnetic circuit. 2. Apply the principles of the transformer, magnetic circuit,
single phase, three-phase and alternating voltage and current.
3. Mix the application of the power system and electrical transmission in single phase and three-phase.
4. Classify the application of the alternating voltage and current, single phase, three-phase, transformer and magnetic circuit.
5. Work as a team to measure correctly the voltage and current in single phase, transformer and magnetic in laboratory experiments.
Synopsis Alternating Voltage and Current, Phasor, Magnetic Circuit, Electromotive force, magnetic field strength, relation between B and H, Kirchhoff’s law magnetic hysteresis, Single Phase Circuit, series resonance, parallel resonance, power factor, transformer, phasor diagram, equivalent circuit voltage regulation and efficiency, O/C and S/C test, Voltage generation and excitation methods, Basic principles of power system, per unit system, electrical transmission. References 1. Hughes E., Electrical Technology, Longman, 10th Edition,
2008. 2. Hadi Saadat, Power System Analysis with Power System
Toolbox Software, Mc-Graw Hill,2nd Edition. 3. Mc Pherson G., Electrical Machine & Transformers,
Wiley,2nd Edition.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
113
109
BLHH 1032 INDUSTRIAL PSYCHOLOGY & ORGANISATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Elaborate on the aspects of humanity in organisational life. 2. Exhibit leadership characteristics in managing an
organisation. 3. Differentiate the relationship and behaviour between an
individual and a group in an organisation in attaining productivity.
Synopsis This course provides exposure to aspects of psychology as well as problems related to organizational behaviour at the industrial workplace. Matters discussed include work satisfaction, stress management, work analysis, selection and training, group dynamics, interpersonal communication, problems in workers union, human and ergonomic factors, leadership and influence, design and development of an organization. References 1. Aamodt, M. G. (1999). Application Industrial/
Organizational Psychology. Australia: Wadsworth. 2. Ishak Mad Shah. (2002). Pengenalan Psikologi Industri dan
Organisasi. Skudai: Penerbit UTM. 3. Muchinsky, P. M. (2000). Psychology Applied to Work.
Australia: Wadsworth.
BTNE 3234 INDUSTRIAL CONTROL Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic concepts, terminologies and operating
principle of the elements related to industrial control system.
2. Design a solution to broadly-defined engineering problems using relay ladder diagram approach.
3. Construct the PLC programming language using CX-Programmer Software based on specifications.
4. Display an ability in reporting technical findings both orally and in writing using standard engineering guideline.
Synopsis This subject will provide the students both solid theoretical concepts related to industrial control system and a practical to the Programmable logic controller (PLC) which is generally used in the industrial control. Extensive practical-oriented and hands on session will be given using OMRON PLC Training Kit equipment. The graphical programming tools, GRAFCET will be introduced in the course. The topics as listed below:- 1. Introduction to Industrial Control 2. Discrete control elements and Relay Ladder diagram 3. Programmable logic controller (PLC) 4. Discrete sensors and actuators 5. GRAFCET This subject is the authentic problem based purposely to expose the students with real engineering problems in the industries References 1. John Stenerson. Industrial Automation and Process Control.
Prentice Hall. 2003. 2. Russell Biekert. CIM Technology. Goodheart-Wilcox: Illinois.
1998 3. Mikell P. Groover. Automation, Production Systems, and
Computer-Integrated Manufacturing, 2nd Ed., Prentice Hall, 2008
4. Killian. Modern Control Technology: Components and Systems, 2nd Ed, Delmar, 2001
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
114
110
BTCS 3134 MICROPROCESSOR & MICROCONTROLLER TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe the microprocessor and microcontroller’s
architecture and peripheral subsystem of MC68K and PIC16F877A.
2. Classify interrupts and internal registers modifications to solve specific I/O tasks.
3. Display microprocessor and microcontroller subsystem’s performance in peripheral interfacing via high/low level language
4. Design and develop a microcontroller-based system with peripheral devices interface.
5. Perform efficiently as individual or in group to complete tasks and assignment.
Synopsis This subject will provide the students both theoretical & practical applications to the microprocessors/microcontrollers-based system. Practical sessions will be given using MC68K microprocessor and PIC microcontroller involving program development software, chip programming and debugging. Topics covered are microcomputer system & peripheral design, software and hardware integration; interrupt control system, analog interfacing, subsystems on microprocessor, etc. References 1. Dogan Ibrahim, Advanced Microcontroller Projects in C,
Newnes Elsevier Ltd., 2008. 2. PIC Microcontrollers: Know It All (Newnes Know It All) by
Lucio Di Jasio, Tim Wilmshurst, Dogan Ibrahim and John Morton, 2007
3. M Ali Mazidi , PIC Microcontroller and Embedded System (2 edition), , 2007.
4. Beginner's Guide To Embedded C Programming: Using The Pic Microcontroller And The Hitech Pic-Lite C Compiler by Chuck Hellebuyck, 2008
5. Microprocessor Theory and Applications with 68000/68020 and Pentium by Mohamed Rafiquzzaman (2008)
6. Microprocessors Software and Hardware Design Using MC68000 by M. H. Hassan (2008).
BTNE 3454 PROCESS INTRUMENTATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Construct the process control block diagram, process
control drawing (P&ID), various sensors (thermal, mechanical and optical) and final control elements operation including actuator and control elements.
2. Construct various signal conditioning circuits for different types of sensors.
3. Construct the controller output response based on certain requirements.
4. Demonstrate PI, PD and PID Controller op-amp circuits and analyze its performance.
5. Work by group to perform assignments/lab activity. Synopsis Process control block diagram, analog and digital processing, sensors: thermal, mechanical, and optical; final control operation, controller principles: discontinuous, continuous, and composite control modes; analog controllers, control-loop characteristics and system stability. References 1. Johnson, C. D., “Process Control Instrumentation
Technology”, 8th Ed., Prentice Hall Inc., 2006. 2. DeSa, Douglas O.J., “Instrumentation Fundamentals for
Process Control”, Taylor& Francis, 2001. 3. Morris, Alan S., “Measurement and Instrumentation
Principles”, 3rd Ed, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2001.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
115
111
BTNE 3714 DATA ACQUISITION & SENSOR
Learning Outcomes Upon completing this course, the student should be able to: 1. Classify the concept of data acquisition and sensor. 2. Design broadly-define control system in simulation tools
and analyze its performance. 3. Construct and define control system using the data
acquisition card. 4. Use and apply the concept of closed loop system in
obtaining better performance of control system. 5. Display the ability of presenting lab report and project
outcome orally and in writing.
Synopsis Introduction on Data Acquisition and Sensor, Data Acquisition Hardware, Analog and Digital Signals, Signal Conditioning, Serial Data Communications, Distributed & Standalone Loggers/Controllers, IEEE 488 Standard, Ethernet & LAN Systems, The Universal Serial Bus (USB), Specific Techniques, The PCMCIA Card Sensor and application, Labview, Interfacing Software and Hardware, Controlling automation system using Labview.
This subject prepares students with knowledge and skills to use data acquisition hardware and software as well as sensors.
References 1. John Park, Steve Mackay, Practical Data Acquisition for
Instrumentation and Control Systems, Elsevier. 2. Bruce Mihura, LabVIEW for Data Acquisition, Prentice Hall. 3. Kevin James, PC Interfacing and Data Acquisition:
Techniques for Measurement, Instrumentation and Control.
4. Labview Course Manual.
BTNE 3424 INDUSTRIAL PNUEMATIC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Illustrate the operating principles of elements in industrial
pneumatics system. 2. Design pneumatic systems based on the specification given. 3. Assemble the discrete pneumatic circuits to investigate the
efficiency of several design techniques. 4. Work individually or in groups effectively in performing
assignments/case studies.
Synopsis Topics covered in this course are Compressed air: theory, production, purification and distribution; pneumatic components, actuators, directional control valves, pneumatic control configurations, electro-pneumatic components, electro-pneumatic control configuration, sequential and cascade design methods of pneumatic and electro-pneumatic systems. The test on this technology will be held in this course to ensure the competency level is up to industrial standard. The test will be conducted with cooperation of SMC (Pneumatics) Sdn Bhd. The certificate is recognized by HRDC schemes References 1. Smct.Pt1, Pneumatic Technology 1, Textbook, SMC,
Graphitype Printing Services, 1998. 2. Anthony Esposito, Fluid Power with Applications, 6th ed.,
Prentice Hall, 2003. 3. Z.L. Lansky, L.F. Schrod, Industrial Pneumatic Control,
Marcel Dekker Inc, 1986.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
116
112
BTNE 3764 EMBEDDED SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply knowledge of engineering to explain key features of
embedded systems. 2. Analyze various microcontrollers and make professional
decisions on which microcontroller to use for given scenarios and constraints.
3. Design and implement microcontroller systems using programmable or reconfigurable devices.
4. Organize the operation between microcontroller and its input/output devices interfacing through lab sessions.
5. Demonstrate effectively as individual and in group. Synopsis This course will discuss about embedded System, characteristics & application areas, introduction to digital hardware technologies, introduction to computer systems & architectures, introduction to assembler-level software and high level language programming for Embedded Systems, introduction to Interfacing Computer Systems to External Hardware, application-level embedded system design concepts in industrial electronics. These topics are very important to students because it gives emphasis on the design of circuits used in embedded systems. References 1. Peter Marwedel, “Embedded System Design”, Kluwer
Academic Publishers, 2005. 2. Michael Barr, “Programming Embedded System in C &
C++”, O’Reilly, 2006. 3. Arnold Berger, “Embedded Systems Design: An Introduction
to Processes, Tools and Techniques”, CMP Books, 2001.
BTNE 3334 POWER ELECTRONIC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the operational principles and concepts of power
semiconductor switches. 2. Use power semiconductor switches in designing power
electronic converter circuits. 3. Analyze the operational principles and concepts of motor
drives. 4. Construct and measure the performance of power
electronic circuits through lab sessions. 5. Perform and report assignment given effectively as
individual or in groups. Synopsis This course will discuss about power electronics fundamentals, protection devices and circuit, diode rectifiers, AC to DC converters (controlled rectifiers), DC to DC converters (dc choppers), switch-mode power supply and DC to AC converters (inverter). References 1. Muhammad H. Rashid, “Power Electronics - Circuit,
Devices, and Applications” , Prentice Hall, 2004. 2. Ned Mohan, “Electric Drives - An Integrative Approach” ,
Prentice Hall,2003. 3. Muhammad H. Rashid, “Introduction to PSPICE Using
ORCAD for Circuits and Electronics”, Prentice Hall,2003.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
117
113
BTCS 4324 COMPUTER INTERFACING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the concept, architecture and peripheral
subsystems of a microcontroller for computer interfacing. 2. Construct a microcontroller-based system with various
peripheral devices interfaces and study the implementation problems during interfacing.
3. Share resources and responsibilities effectively to complete given task on computer interfacing in a group.
4. Manipulate and compare experimental data to solve various problems.
Synopsis This course covers abstractions and implementation techniques for the design of application using computer interfacing. Topics include: microcontroller, features of different I/O peripheral devices and their interfaces, Java programming language and interfacing, sensors and actuators, data analysis and controls and various software and hardware tool which significant for computer interfacing. This subject is taken to expose student to Java programming language and interfacing computer with other peripherals. Eclipse IDE will be used as the compiler and editor to demonstrate programming and in laboratories session in this subject. References 1. Jonathan W. Valvano (2011), Embedded Microcomputer
Systems: Real Time Interfacing, CL-Engineering. 2. Joshua Bloch (2008), Effective Java (2nd Edition), Prentice
Hall. 3. Y. Daniel Liang (2010), Introduction to Java Programming,
Comprehensive, Prentice Hall. 4. Wilbert O. Galitz (2007), The Essential Guide to User
Interface Design: An Introduction to GUI Design Principles and Techniques, Wiley.
5. Harprit Sandhu (2008), Making PIC Microcontroller Instruments and Controllers, McGraw-Hill/TAB Electronics.
6. Harprit Sandhu (2010), Running Small Motors with PIC Microcontrollers, McGraw-Hill/TAB Electronics.
BTNU 3804 FINAL YEAR PROJECT I Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Prepare the objectives for a project, search on related work
done before and basic theory as well as the approach to be used for the project.
2. Organize project plan, divide project to various phases and identify sources of reference required for each phase
3. Work as an individual with the help of the supervisor to look for the solution by integrating knowledge acquired.
4. Demonstrate the right attitude in implementing the project.
Synopsis This module is the preliminary part of the final year’s project. Students should produce a project proposal and start work in their project before the end of the semester. Projects can be the development of software or electronic hardware. Projects can also take the form of case studies or solving industrial problems faced during the students’ industrial training. References None
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
118
114
BTNE 4434 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Illustrates the basic concepts related to automation and its
benefits to manufacturing. 2. Explain the current and future trends of electronics
manufacturing processes and technologies. 3. Design the flexible manufacturing systems by applying the
concepts of control technologies, material handling and manufacturing systems.
4. Display the quality characteristics using appropriate quality control software.
5. Work individually or in groups effectively in performing assignments/case.
Synopsis Topics covered in this course are major manufacturing processess, materials, technologies of electronics packaging, surface mount assembly and printed board fabrications. Also cover an automation and control technologies, material handling, manufacturing support systems, quality control in manufacturing systems. This subject will prepare the students with knowledge and practical aspects regarding manufacturing line and respected areas. References 1. Mikell P. Groover, Automation, Production Systems and
Computer- Integrated Manufacturing, Prentice Hall (2007). 2. James A. Tompkins, Facility Planning, Wiley, 4th Edition,
2010. 3. R. Larry & W. Mattie, Implementing World Class
Manufacturing, 2nd Edition, WCM Association, 2004.
BTNE 4454 INDUSTRIAL ROBOTIC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Illustrate the anatomy of industrial manipulator and solve
the manipulator coordinate mapping and transformation. 2. Analyze kinematics parameters of industrial manipulator
and solve its forward/inverse kinematics. 3. Analyze robot’s dynamics which include develop model and
solving of simple joint velocities, forces and torques. 4. Organize an experiment to investigate the simple
manipulator controller based on several techniques. 5. Display ability in reporting technical findings both orally
and in writing using standard engineering guideline. Synopsis Topics covered in this course are mechanics and control of mechanical manipulator, coordinate mapping and transformation, forward kinematics, inverse manipulator kinematics, manipulator dynamics, trajectory generation, linear and nonlinear robot control system. As practical engineers, the knowledge and practical aspects regarding an industrial robotics is a must. Most of the plants nowadays are equipped with their own robots. References 1. J.J. Craig, Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control,
3rd Ed., Upper Saddle River, NJ, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2005.
2. R.K. Mittal, I.J. Nagrath, Robotics and Control, New Delhi, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003.
3. K.S. Fu, R.C. Gonzales, C.S.G. Lee, Robotics: Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence. McGraw-Hill, 1988.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
119
115
BTNE 4344 ELECTRICAL DRIVE & CONTROL Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Classify the operation and basic control of electrical DC and
AC motors. 2. Measure the speed controlling system of AC and DC motors
in laboratory experiments. 3. Discover the operation in controlling the speed of AC and
DC motors. 4. Solve, design and troubleshoot electrical drives. 5. Measure in experiments and present technical reports. Synopsis Elements of electric drive systems, electromechanical modelling, basic speed control of dc motors, switching amplifier field current controllers, armature voltage controllers, troubleshooting of dc drives, modelling of permanent magnet brushless dc motor, braking of dc motors, limitation of electric drives, control of ac motor, braking of ac motors and stepper motor. References 1. Theodore Wildi, Electrical Machines, Drives and Power
Systems, Prentice Hall, 2006. 2. Norman S. Nise, Control System Engineering, Wiley, 4th
Edition, 2005. 3. Mohamed A. El-Sharkawi, Fundamentals of Electric Drives,
Brooks/Cole, 2000. 4. Michael E. Brumbach, Electronic Variable Speed Drives,
Delmar Publishers, 2nd Edition.
BTNU 4814 FINAL YEAR PROJECT II Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Construct projects based on engineering problems. 2. Organize various technical understanding required towards
a particular engineering field. 3. Manipulate experimental models, and use facilities
available to the optimum 4. Propose and make suggestions for further improvement. 5. Write a formal engineering report and display by oral
presentation. 6. Demonstrate business potentials on the developed project. 7. Demonstrate the right attitude in completing the project. Synopsis This is the second part of the final year project. Students are expected to continue the project done in Bachelor Degree Project Part I till completion. At the end of the semester students are required to submit the final year project report both orally and in writing for assessment. References None
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
120
116
BTNE 4713 QUALITY MANAGEMENT Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Use and understanding the quality concepts and the
different perspective on quality theories. 2. To apply the quality tools to solve any problems in
organisation. 3. Work effectively as individual or in a group. 4. Study and explain the application of sig-sigma to improve
the quality of management, process and product in organisation.
5. Managing the international quality standard for the customer’s satisfaction.
Synopsis The different of quality theories for many organisatition, comparisme international quality standard for customer satisfaction. The designing of strategy planning, strategy process and ethic to enhance the quality improvement for process and, product with using quality tools. Six –sigma are using for management to improve the mangement strategy planning. References 1. S.Thomas Foster., “Managing Quality”, Second Edition,
Pearson, Prentice Hall Inc. 2. Barrie G. Dale. “Managing Quality”, Fifth Edition 3. Stephen R. Covey's book, The 7 Habits of Highly Effective
People.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
121
117
BTNT 1013 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT I Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Solve simple electric circuit based on various analysis
technique. 2. Solve a terminated two-port circuit to find currents,
voltages, impedances and ratios of interest. 3. Construct, test and troubleshoot simple electric circuits. 4. Report and explain their given assignment clearly.
Synopsis This subject will discussed on direct current circuits, SI units, charge, current, voltage and power, Ohm’s Law, Kirchhoff’s Law, Wye-Delta transformation, nodal and mesh analysis, Norton Theorem, Thevenin Theorem, Superposition Theorem, maximum power transfer, sinusoids and phasors, two-port networks, X,Y and h – parameters. This subject served as basic knowledge needed for electrical and electronic engineer. References 1. C.K Alexander, M.N Sadiku, “Fundamental of Electric
Circuits”, 4th Edition, Mc Graw Hill, 2008. 2. James W. Nilsson, Susan A, Rieldel, “Electric Circuits”, 8th
Edition, Prentice Hall, 2008. 3. A. R. Hambley, “Electrical Engineering- Principles and
Applications”, 4th Edition, Prentice hall, 2008. 4. W.H Hayt, J.E Kemmerly, S. M Durbin, “Engineering Circuit
Analysis”, 7th Edition, Mc Graw Hill, 2007.
BTNE 1013 ENGINEERING WORKSHOP I Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to:
1. Demonstrate safety and health regulation in the lab activity.
2. Demonstrate and diagnose an electronic circuit using electronic testing equipment.
3. Manipulate the simulation tools for the electronic circuit analysis according to IPC standard.
4. Describe and present the given assignment based on technical report format.
5. Work as a team in practicing the problem based learning project.
6. Display the ability of presenting lab report and project outcome orally and in writing.
Synopsis Introduction to Industrial Safety and Health + Lab Safety, Equipment- theory, testing and circuit diagnostic & Report writing, Component – introduction, theory, assembly and soldering, Simulation tools - MULTISIM – introduction and application, Problem Based Learning (PBL). References 1. Environmental, Safety and Health Engineering, Gayle
Woodside, WILEY 2. Handbook of International Electrical Safety Practices, Peri,
WILEY 3. Audel House Wiring, All New 8th Edition, Paul Rosenberg,
WILEY 4. EMC and the Printed Circuit Board: Design, Theory and
Layout Made Simple, Mark.I, WILEY 5. Industrial Bioseparations: Principles and Practice, Daniel
Forciniti, WILE
BTNT Course Core Subjects (K)
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
122
118
BTNE 1113 ELECTRONIC I Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply the semiconductors theory in electronic applications. 2. Solve problems related to the diode application circuit. 3. Construct electronic circuit when designing simple BJT
amplifier circuits. 4. Construct electronic circuit when designing simple FET
amplifier circuits. 5. Display assignments and technical reports both orally and
in writing Synopsis This course will discuss: 1. Bohr Atomic Model: valency, period table of elements,
trivalent, tetravalent and pentavalent elements, movement electrons in solid: conductor, insulator and semiconductor, bands theory: energy band, conduction band and forbidden band. Doping, p and n materials, pn junction.
2. Silicon Semiconductor Diodes: characteristics and measurement of forward & reverse biased, composite characteristics and load line analysis, clipping and simple rectifier (half & full) circuits, zener diodes characteristics, and simple shunt regulators.
3. Bipolar Junction Transistor: construction and operation of BJT, BJT characteristics and measurement technique, limits of operation, βdc and αdc, DC biasing – DC Load Lines. Amplification of signal. Transistor as a switch.
4. Field Effect Transistor: construction and operation of FET, FET characteristics & diagram, Shockley’s equation, DC biasing – DC Load Lines-Graphical and mathematical approach.
References 1. Boylestad R., Nashelsky L., “Electronic Devices and circuit
Theory”, Ninth Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., 2006. 2. Floyd, “Electronic Devices”, Sixth Edition, Prentice Hall,
2002. 3. R P Punagin, “Basic Electronics”, Mc-Graw Hill, 2000
BTNT 1023 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT II Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the concept of capacitors and inductors. 2. Solve first order and second order circuit problems. 3. Analyze sinusoidal steady-state condition. 4. Apply knowledge of power condition for AC circuits. 5. Design a simple RLC passive filters. 6. Analyze frequency response of the AC circuits and draw a
Bode plot. 7. Report and explain their given assignment clearly. Synopsis This subject will discussed on introduction to Capacitors and Inductors, Series and Parallel Circuits of Capacitors and Inductors, First and Second-Order Circuits, Step Response of The Circuits, Steady-State Analysis, AC Power Analysis, Average Power, RMS Values, Power Factor, Frequency Response, Transfer Function and Bod Plot, Series and Parallel Resonance, Filters. This subject served as basic knowledge needed for electrical and electronic engineer. References 1. Alexander and Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”,
Third Edition, Mc Graw Hill, 2006. 2. James W.Nilsson, “Electric Circuit”, Sixth Edition, Prentice
Hall, 2005. 3. Thomas L.Floyd, “Electric Circuits Fundamentals”, Seventh
Edition, 2007.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
123
119
BTNE 1023 ENGINEERING WORKSHOP II Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Construct an electronic circuit using PSpice and MATLAB
software. 2. Manipulate the Auto CAD software in making of electronic
circuit and other engineering drawing. 3. Construct the printed circuit board using Proteus software. 4. Describe and present the given assignment based on
technical format. 5. Work as a team in doing an electronic mini project. 6. Display the ability of presenting lab report and project
outcome orally and in writing. Synopsis Simulation tools that covers the software of MATLAB, PSpice and AutoCad. Domestic Wiring – theory on domestic wiring, wiring diagram and lab practical. PCB circuit design fabrication using the design software of Proteus, practical design of the printed circuit board using the Proteus. References 1. Environmental, Safety and Health Engineering, Gayle
Woodside, WILEY 2. Handbook of International Electrical Safety Practices, Peri,
WILEY 3. Audel House Wiring, All New 8th Edition, Paul Rosenberg,
WILEY 4. EMC and the Printed Circuit Board: Design, Theory and
Layout Made Simple, Mark.I, WILEY 5. Industrial Bioseparations: Principles and Practice, Daniel
Forciniti, WILE
BTCS 1213 PROGRAMMING FUNDAMENTAL Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply basic programming principles and algorithms of C
programming language. 2. Construct C programming structure using programming
fundamentals and principles. 3. analyze small to medium scale problems and develop
solutions. 4. Demonstrate an understanding of ethical and legal
responsibility in code of conduct.
Synopsis Topics covered: basic programming principles such as introduction to C programming consists of syntax, variables and basic data type, more fundamentals programming structure such as operator, rules / condition, looping, function, array and sequences. The subject is a compulsory to build a basic background in programming. Visual C++ IDE will be used for the compiler and editor in this subject. References 1. Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel, C How To Program 6th Edition,
Pearson Education Inc, 2010. 2. Michael A. Vine, C Programming 2nd Edition for the
Absolute Beginner, Thomson Course Technology, USA, 2008.
3. Delores M. Etter, Engineering Problem Solving with C 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2007.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
124
120
BTNE 1123 ELECTRONIC II Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply the fundamentals of small signal audio amplifiers. 2. Measure response of single stage audio amplifiers using
both BJT and FETs. 3. Demonstrate single stage and multistage amplifiers at mid-
band, low and high frequencies. 4. Construct the design of Op-Amps, and analyze basic Op-
amp circuits. 5. Display findings orally or in writing by performing
assignments individually or in groups effectively.
Synopsis This course will discuss BJT Transistor modelling, CE, CC and CB configuration, BJT small signal analysis, Feedback configuration, FET small-signal analysis, Frequency response, Bode plot, Bandwidth, Special amplifier: cascade, Darlington, multistage, differential amplifier circuit, Operational amplifiers: inverting, non-inverting, summing and buffer. References 1. Boylestad R., Nashelsky L., “Electronic Devices and circuit
Theory”, Ninth Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., 2006. 2. S.H.Ruslan et.al. “ Elektronik II” Penerbitan UTM 1998. 3. Floyd, “Electronic Devices”, Sixth Edition, Prentice Hall,
2002. 4. Theodore F. Bogart Jr., Jeffrey S. Beasley and Guillermore
Rico, “ Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
BTNE 2323 ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply the concept of AC voltage and current, single phase,
three-phase, transformer and magnetic circuit. 2. Apply the principles of the transformer, magnetic circuit,
single phase, three-phase and alternating voltage and current.
3. Mix the application of the power system and electrical transmission in single phase and three-phase.
4. Classify the application of the alternating voltage and current, single phase, three-phase, transformer and magnetic circuit.
5. Work as a team to measure correctly the voltage and current in single phase, transformer and magnetic in laboratory experiments.
Synopsis Alternating Voltage and Current, Phasor, Magnetic Circuit, Electromotive force, magnetic field strength, relation between B and H, Kirchhoff’s law magnetic hysteresis, Single Phase Circuit, series resonance, parallel resonance, power factor, transformer, phasor diagram, equivalent circuit voltage regulation and efficiency, O/C and S/C test, Voltage generation and excitation methods, Basic principles of power system, per unit system, electrical transmission. References 1. Hughes E., Electrical Technology, Longman, 10th Edition,
2008. 2. Hadi Saadat, Power System Analysis with Power System
Toolbox Software, Mc-Graw Hill,2nd Edition. 3. Mc Pherson G., Electrical Machine & Transformers,
Wiley,2nd Edition.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
125
121
BTNT 2033 CONTINUOUS SIGNAL & SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain different types of signal and systems properties
that are commonly used in engineering. 2. Produce the Fourier series and transform in terms of
applicable time functions and the resulting spectral properties.
3. Apply the continuous-time Fourier Transform in analyzing non- periodic signal.
4. Use Laplace transform in 2nd order circuit analysis 5. Manipulate and explain a simple Matlab programming for
signal and system applications. 6. Report and explain their given assignment clearly. Synopsis The course will cover various topics such as Introduction to Continuous-Time Signals and Systems: Fundamental Concept, Transformations of Continuous-Time Signals, Signal Characteristics, Common Signals, Continuous-Time Systems and Its Properties, Convolution for Continuous-Time LTI Systems, Properties of Convolution, Properties of LTI Systems; Fourier Series: Introduction of continuous Fourier Series and Its Coefficients, Frequency Spectra, Fourier Series Properties; Fourier Transform: Definition, Properties of continuous Fourier Transform, Application of Fourier Transform, Energy and Power Density Spectra; Laplace Transform: Definition, Properties of Laplace Transform, Response of LTI Systems, etc. References 1. Mrinal Mandal, Amir Asif, Continuous and Discrete Time
Signals and Systems, Cambridge University Press, 2007. 2. C. K Alexander, M. N. O. Sadiku, Fundamental of Electric
Circuit, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2006. 3. William D. Stanley, Network Analysis with Applications, 3rd
Edition, Prentice Hall, 2000. 4. Charles L. Phillips, John M. Parr, Eve A. Riskin, Signals,
Systems and Transforms, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003. 5. M. J Roberts, Signals and Systems, McGraw Hill,
2003.
BTCS 2134 DIGITAL ELECTRONIC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Describe basic functions of digital components 2. Design digital system using combinational and sequential
logic. 3. Display and evaluate the performance of sequential logic
circuits. 4. Perform effectively as individual or in group to complete
tasks and assignment 5. Present the assignments and present technical reports both
orally and in writing Synopsis This subject covers the topics of transistor- transistor logic. Logic functions, logic diagrams, Karnaugh maps, Boolean algebra, DeMorgan's Theorem. Numerical codes, arithmetic functions. Combinational circuits such as encoders, decoders, multiplexers, de-multiplexers, comparators. This subject also covers the introduction to memory, programmable logic devices and microcomputer systems. Student will learn the topics on latches and flip-flops, flip-flops operating characteristics and applications. Registers and counters, shift registers, synchronous, asynchronous and modulo counters. References 1. Thomas L. Floyd, Digital Fundamentals (10 edition),
Prentice Hall, 2008 2. Ronald J.Tocci, Neal S.Widmer, Gregory L.Moss, Digital
Systems: Principles and Applications, (11 Edition) Pearson Prentice Hall, 2010
3. William Klietz, Digital Electronic: A Practical Approach, (8 Edition) Prentice Hall, 2007.
4. Marcovitz A. B., Introduction to Logic Design, 2nd Ed., McGraw Hill, 2005
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
126
122
BTNE 2244 CONTROL PRINCIPLE Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Measure the response characteristic and differentiate them
between open loop and closed loop system 2. Solve mathematical model for electrical and mechanical
systems using transfer function and state space method. 3. Solve the time response from the transfer function and use
poles and zeros to determine the response of a control system.
4. Manipulate the Routh-Hurwitz criterion method in determining system’s stability through experiment.
5. Demonstrate performance of Gain Adjustment compensator in controlling broadly defined system.
6. Display the ability of presenting lab report orally and in writing.
Synopsis This course will discuss introduction to control system, frequency domain modelling, Laplace transform, transfer function, electric network transfer function, translational mechanical system, rotational mechanical system transfer function, time domain modelling, general state space representation, transfer function and state space conversion, time response, poles, zeros and system response, First and Second order systems, under-damped system, reduction of multiple subsystems, blocks diagrams, feedback systems, signal flow graphs, Mason’s rule, Routh- Hurwitz criterion and Gain Adjustment compensator design. References 1. Nise, S Norman, Control Systems Engineering, 3th Edition,
John Wiley & Sons Inc., United State of America, 2008. 2. Bishop, Dorf, Modern Control Systems, 10th Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2008. 3. Smarajit Ghosh, “Control System: Theory and Applications”,
Pearson India, 2005.
BTNE 2114 ELECTRONIC III Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Apply fundamental knowledge of electronics to explain the
operation, performance and the application of electronic devices such as SCR, SCS, GTO, LASCR, DIAC, TRIAC, UJT and PUT.
2. Analyze the operation of power amplifier, active filter and oscillator circuits.
3. Design power supply circuit using IC regulator. 4. Construct and measure the performance of applied
electronic circuits through lab sessions. 5. Display an ability to report findings orally or in writing by
performing assignments/experiments effectively.
Synopsis This course will discuss about Electronic Devices: Application of electronic devices such as SCR, SCS, GTO, LASCR, DIAC, TRIAC, UJT and PUT. Filter: filter applications (basic filter concepts, filter response characteristics, active LP filter, active HP filter, active BP filter, active BS filter and filter response measurement). Oscillator circuits: Feedback oscillator principles, oscillators with the RC feedback circuits, LC feedback circuits, crystal oscillator, Astable and Monostable using op-amp, the 555 timer and applications. Power amplifier circuits: Class A, class B and class AB. Power supply: Power supply circuit, IC voltage regulator and application. These topics are very important to students because it gives emphasis on the design of circuits used in electronic systems References 1. Boylestad R., Nashelsky L., “Electronic Devices and circuit
Theory”, Ninth Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., 2006. 2. Stanley, W.D., “Op-Amps. and Integrated Linear Circuit”,
Prentice Hall, 2002 3. Boylestad, R.L., 9th Edition, “Electronic Devices”, Prentice
Hall, 2006
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
127
123
BTNE 4713 QUALITY MANAGEMENT Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Use and understanding the quality concepts and the
different perspective on quality theories. 2. To apply the quality tools to solve any problems in
organisation. 3. Work effectively as individual or in a group. 4. Study and explain the application of sig-sigma to improve
the quality of management, process and product in organisation.
5. Managing the international quality standard for the customer’s satisfaction.
Synopsis The different of quality theories for many organisatition, comparisme international quality standard for customer satisfaction. The designing of strategy planning, strategy process and ethic to enhance the quality improvement for process and, product with using quality tools. Six –sigma are using for management to improve the mangement strategy planning. References 1. S.Thomas Foster., “Managing Quality”, Second Edition,
Pearson, Prentice Hall Inc. 2. Barrie G. Dale. “Managing Quality”, Fifth Edition 3. Stephen R. Covey's book, The 7 Habits of Highly Effective
People
BTNT 2053 COMMUNICATION PRINCIPLE Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Demonstrate basic principles and components of
telecommunication system. 2. Measure the performance of analog and frequency
modulation techniques through experiments that commonly used in telecommunication system.
3. Design solution for linear or angle modulation system based on given specifications.
4. Demonstrate the effects of noise in telecommunication systems.
5. Work and discuss effectively either individually or in group for any assignment and experiment.
6. Construct experiments and display technical reports. Synopsis This subject will discuss on Introduction to Telecommunication, Linear Modulation, Single Sideband (SSB) Communication Systems, Angle Modulation, Noise and Introduction to Digital Communication The rationale of offering this subject is as the progression of communication system where students should have knowledge of communication principles and basic skills required by the industry. References 1. Wayne Tomasi, Electronics Communications Systems
Fundamentals Through Advanced, Prentice Hall, Fifth Edition, 2004.
2. John G. Proakis, Essentials of Communication Systems Engineering, Prentice Hall, 2005.
3. Frenzel, Communication Electronics/; Principles and Applications, McGraw Hill, Third Edition, 2000.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
128
124
BTNT 2084 DATA COMMUNICATION & NETWORKING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain data communication, networking, communication
protocol and architecture. 2. Explain the Open System Interconnection reference model. 3. Analyse issue related to internetworking protocol, network
routing, topology and plan subnet masks. 4. Analyze major routing protocols used in wired and wireless
networks and troubleshoot network problems by means of network analyzer.
5. Work together with team members during experiments. 6. Report and explain their given assignment clearly. Synopsis This subject will discuss on Inter networking, Network Access, Open System Interconnection, Application & Services and Network Security. The rationale of offering this subject is as providing vast knowledge on telecommunication data networking and as well as preparation for Certified IP Associate exams. References 1. W. Stallings, Data & Computer Communication 8th Edition,
Pearson, 2007 2. B. A. Forouzan, Data Communications and Networking 4th
Edition, McGraw Hill, 2007. 3. Tomasi, W, Electronic Communication System:
Fundamentals Through Advanced 5th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2004.
4. L. Peterson, B. Davie and M. Kaufmann, Computer Networks: A System Approach, 4th Edition, 2003.
5. J. Koruse and K. Ross, Computer Networking: A Top Down Approach Featuring the Internet, Addison-Wesley, 2003.
BTNT 2063 DISCRETE SIGNAL & SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Sketch and explain the different types of discrete signal and
systems properties that are commonly used in engineering. 2. Classify the properties of discrete-time Fourier Series
(DTFS) and discrete-time Fourier transform (DTFT). 3. Apply the convolution sum method in order to find output
of discrete-time system. 4. Explain the important of discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). 5. Manipulate and explain a simple Matlab programming for
discrete-time signal and system. 6. Report and explain their given assignment clearly. Synopsis The course will cover various topics such as Introduction to Discrete-Time Signals and Systems: Fundamental Concept, Transformations of Discrete-Time Signals, Signal Characteristics, Common Signals, Discrete -Time Systems and Its Properties; Time-Domain Analysis of Discrete-Time Signals and Systems: Impulse response of a system, Convolution sum, Graphical method for evaluating the convolution sum, Properties of the convolution sum, Impulse response of LTID systems; Discrete-Time Fourier Series And Transform: Discrete-time Fourier series, Fourier transform for aperiodic functions, Existence of the DTFT, DTFT of periodic functions, Properties of the DTFT and the DTFS, etc; Discrete Fourier Transform: Continuous to discrete Fourier transform, Discrete Fourier transform, Spectrum analysis using the DFT, Properties of the DFT, Convolution using the DFT, etc. References 1. MrinalMandal, Amir Asif, Continuous and Discrete Time
Signals and Systems, Cambridge University Press, 2007. 2. C. K Alexander, M. N. O. Sadiku, Fundamental of Electric
Circuit, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2006. 3. William D. Stanley, Network Analysis with Applications, 3rd
Edition, Prentice Hall, 2000. 4. Charles L. Phillips, John M. Parr, Eve A. Riskin, Signals,
Systems and Transforms, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003. 5. M. J Roberts, Signals and Systems, McGraw Hill, 2003.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
129
125
BTNT 3103 ELECTROMAGNETIC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the principles involving magnetostatic,
electrostatic, time varying field and wave propagation. 2. Apply the concepts and laws of magnetostatic, electrostatic
and time varying fields. 3. Apply appropriate laws to solve problems related to
magnetostatic, electrostatic, time varying field and wave. 4. Demonstrate the capability of conducting assignments in
relation to the study of electromagnetic individually or in a group.
Synopsis This subject will discussed on Vector analysis: Vector algebra, coordinate system and transformation, vector calculus; Electrostatics: Electrostatic fields, Gauss Law, Poisson’s equation, electric fields in material space, electrostatic boundary; Magnetostatics: Magnetostatic fields, Stokes Theorem, Biot-Savart Law, Gauss Law, magnetic forces, material and devices and magnetostatic boundary; Waves: Maxwell’s equations, Faraday’s Law, time-varying electromagnetic field, induced emf, displacement current. Electromagnetic wave propagation: free space, lossy and lossless dielectric, etc. References 1. M.N.O. Sadiku, Elements of Electromagnetics, 4th. Edition,
Oxford University Press, 2007. 2. William H. Hayt, Jr., John A. Buck, Engineering
Electromagnetics, 6th Ed., Mc Graw Hill, 2001. 3. F.T. Ulaby, Electromagnetics for Engineers, Pearson
International Edition, Prentice-Hall, 2005. 4. Uma Mukheriji, Elektromagnetic Field Theory and Wave
Propagation, Alpha Science International Ltd, 2006 5. G.S.N. Raju, Electromagnetic Field Theory and Transmission
Lines, 2nd Impression, Pearson Education, 2008. 6. Joseph A. Edminister, Schaum’s Outline of Theory and
Problems of Electromagnetics, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 1993
BTNT 3043 TELECOMMUNICATION ELECTRONIC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Analyze small signal RF Amplifier components 2. Analyze RF oscillators such as Hartley, Colpitts and Clapp 3. Explain and apply the function of PLLs 4. Construct and analyze various types RF oscillator 5. Design a simple filter design for receiver circuit 6. Display and explain their given assignment clearly. Synopsis This subject will discuss on Radio Frequency Amplifiers, Radio Frequency Oscillators, PLLs and Frequency Synthesizers, Transmitter Circuits and Receiver Circuits. The rationale of offering this subject is as the progression of communication system where students should have knowledge of communication electronics and basic skills required by the industry. References 1. P.H. Young, Electronic Communication Techniques, 5th
Edition, Prentice Hall, 2004. 2. W. Tomasi, Electronic Communications Systems, 5th Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2004. 3. Frenzel, Communication Electronics, Mc Graw Hill, 2004. 4. Keneddy, Davis, Electronic Communication Systems, 4th
Edition, Mc Graw Hill.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
130
126
BTNT 3073 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain radio frequency spectrum and allocations. 2. Explain digital broadcasting technology. 3. Construct and analyse telecommunication switching system
and technology. 4. Solve optical communication system, wireless
communication, satellite and terrestrial system. 5. Display and explain their assignment clearly.
Synopsis This subject will discuss on Radio Spectrum, Broadcasting, PSTN/ISDN, Satellite System, Radar System, Optical Communication and Wireless Communication. The rationale of offering this subject is as providing fundamental knowledge on various types of telecommunication system and as foundation for higher level subjects. References 1. Tomasi W., Electronic Communication Systems:
Fundamentals through Advanced, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2004.
2. Theodore S. Rappaport, Wireless Communication, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2002.
3. Paul H. Young, Electronics Communication Techniques, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2004.
4. G. Maral & M. Bousquet, Satellite Communications Systems, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2002.
5. M.I. Skolnik, Introduction to Radar System, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2001.
6. Elliott D. Kaplan, H. Christopher, Understanding GPS: Principles and Applications, 2nd Edition, Artech House Publishers, 2005.
7. T. Viswanathan, Telecommunication Switching Systems and Networks, Prentice-Hall of India, 2007.
8. Marion Cole, Introduction to Telecommunications – Voice, Data and Internet, Pearson Education, 2001.V. Thiagarajan, “Telecommunication Switching Systems and Networks”, Prentice-Hall India, 2007.
BTNT 3093 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic theory in digital signal processing. 2. Apply the concepts in digital signal processing such in
discrete-time signals and systems and spectrum representations.
3. Apply z-transform in the impulse response, signal flow graph using difference equations, stability determination.
4. Organize the implementation of digital signal processing in a system and demonstrate by using Matlab and TMS320C6713 DSP Processor.
5. Explain and apply the correlation function, random variable, statistical properties of random signal.
6. Report and explain their assignment clearly either individual or groups.
Synopsis Topics covered: Introduction to DSP, discrete-time signals and systems, spectrum of representation of discrete-time signals, discrete Fourier transform, difference equations and discrete-time systems, z-transform and its applications, analysis and design of digital filters and random signals. References 1. Sanjit K.Mitra, Digital Signal Processing: A Computer Based
Approach, Mc Graw Hill,2010. 2. Tamal Bose, Francois Meyer, Digital Signal and Image
Processing, John Wiley and Sons, 2004. 3. Oppenheim, Schafer, Discrete-time Signal Processing,
Prentice-Hall, 2010. 4. Proakis, Manolikas, Digital Signal Processing: Principles,
Algorithms, and Applications, 4thEdition, Prentice-Hall, 2007.
5. Norhashimah Mohd Saad, Abdul Rahim Abdullah, Real Time Digital Signal Processing-A Practical Approach using TMS320C6713 DSP Processor, PenerbitUTeM, 2007.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
131
127
BTCS 2113 FUNDAMENTAL OF MICROPROCESSOR & MICROCONTROLLER TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain fundamental concepts of microprocessor and
microcontroller architecture and operations. 2. Develop the interfacing circuitry of basic
microprocessor/microcontroller-based systems and its supporting components by using assembly language/high level programming.
3. Basic design of 68K microprocessor memory decoding circuits and microcontroller applications.
4. Perform effectively in given tasks and assignment by managing different information from multiple resources.
Synopsis This subject covers basic fundamental of microprocessors and microcontroller, assembly language programming and hardware interfacing. This course is essentially divided into 3 sections. The first part covers on microprocessor/microcontroller-based Systems and Introduction to 68000 Microprocessor and PIC16F877A. The second part deals with the some basic topics of microprocessor instruction set and high level language. The last segment examines topics on The 68000 hardware and PIC16F877A architecture, memory system and Input/output system. References 1. James L. Antonakos , The 68000 Microprocessor Hardware
and Software Principles and Applications, Fourth Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., 2004.
2. Alan Clements, Microprocessor Systems Design 68000 Hardware, Software, and Interfacing, Third Edition, PWS Publishing Company, 1997.
3. Han-Way Huang, PIC Microcontroller to Software and Hardware Interfacing, Thomson Delmar Learning, 2004
4. John Morton, PIC Your Personal Introductory Course, 2nd Edition, Newnes, 2001.
BTNT 3134 RF TECHNIQUE & MICROWAVE
Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Illustrate transmission line circuits at RF and microwave
frequencies 2. Solve transmission line problems by construct matching
network using the Smith Chart 3. Design and analyze the EM transmission characteristics of
planar lines and waveguides for desired requirements. 4. Apply the RF networks properties by using scattering
parameter 5. Construct and explain the passive and active RF/microwave
components that fulfill the desired specifications. 6. Construct and optimize the passive and active
RF/microwave components using RF simulation software. 7. Report and explain their given assignment clearly.
Synopsis This subject will discussed on Introduction to RF and Microwave Engineering; Transmission Lines; Microwave Network Analysis; Impedance Matching and Tuning; Power Dividers and Couplers; Microwave Filter and Microwave Amplifier. References 1. Pozar, “Microwave Engineering”. John Wiley & Sons, 2004. 2. Liao’, “Microwave Devices and Circuits”. Prentice Hall,
1990. 3. R. Ludwig & P. Bretchko, “RF Circuit Design: Theory and
Applications”,Pearson Prentice Hall, 2000. 4. RE Collin, “Foundation for Microwave Engineering”, Mc-
Graw Hill Inc., 1992. 5. E.H Fooks, R. A Zakarevicious, “Microwave Engineering
Using Microstrip Circuits”, Prentice Hall, 1990.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
132
128
BTNT 3113 TELECOMMUNICATION SWITCHING SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Discover the evolution of switching techniques and system
in telecommunication network. 2. Explain the functions of main elements in Public Switched
Telephone Network. 3. Analyse switching stages. 4. Apply telecommunication traffic engineering to evaluate
network performance. 5. Identify the importance of signalling in telecommunication
network. 6. Construct, evaluate the application of time division
switching in telecommunication network. Synopsis This subject will discuss on Introduction & Evolution Of Switching System, Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), Telecommunication Traffic, Switching Network, Time Division Switching, Telecommunication Signalling and Network. The rationale of offering this subject is as telecommunication switching system is one of the important elements in telecommunication system, students will be analysing the functionality as well as evaluating the network performance as required by the industry. References 1. V. Thiagarajan, “Telecommunication Switching Systems and
Networks”, Prentice-Hall India, 2007. 2. Roger L. Freeman, “Fundamental of
Telecommunications”,2nd Edition, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2005. 3. Roger L. Freeman, “Telecommunication System
Engineering”, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2004. 4. Marion Cole, “Introduction to Telecommunications: Voice,
Data and the Internet”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2000. 5. E. Bryan Carne, “Telecommunication Primer: Data, Voice &
Video Communications”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 1999. 6. J. E. Flood, “Telecommunications, Switching, Traffic and
Networks”, Prentice Hall, 1999. 7. Marion Cole, “Telecommunications”’, Prentice Hall, 1999.
BTNT 3123 DIGITAL COMMUNICATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Classify various types of bandpass digital signalling
techniques including their spectral efficiencies. 2. Design a digital receiver system by taking into
consideration the noise performance. 3. Solve various types of equalization available to encounter
intersymbol interference and differentiate between various types of multiplexing techniques in digital communication systems.
4. Explain the importance of signal synchronization and techniques used in spreading the information signal as well as their advantages and disadvantages.
5. Work effectively either individually or group for any assignment given.
6. Classify various types of bandpass digital signalling techniques including their spectral efficiencies.
Synopsis This subject will discuss on Review of Baseband Signalling, Bandpass Signalling, Baseband and Bandpass Detection, , Equalization, Synchronization , Multiplexing and Multiple Access and Spread Spectrum The rationale of offering this subject is as the progression of communication system where students should have knowledge of communication principles and basic skills required by the industry. References 1. Sklar B., Digital Communications: Fundamentals and
Applications, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2002. 2. Proakis J.G., Digital Communications, 4th Edition, McGraw
Hill, 2000. 3. Couch L.W., Digital and Analog Communication Systems, 7th
Edition, Prentice Hall, 2007.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
133
129
BTNU 3804 FINAL YEAR PROJECT I Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Prepare the objectives for a project, search on related work
done before and basic theory as well as the approach to be used for the project.
2. Organize project plan, divide project to various phases and identify sources of reference required for each phase
3. Work as an individual with the help of the supervisor to look for the solution by integrating knowledge acquired.
4. Demonstrate the right attitude in implementing the project.
Synopsis This module is the preliminary part of the final year’s project. Students should produce a project proposal and start work in their project before the end of the semester. Projects can be the development of software or electronic hardware. Projects can also take the form of case studies or solving industrial problems faced during the students’ industrial training. References None
BTNU 4814 FINAL YEAR PROJECT II Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Construct projects based on engineering problems. 2. Organize various technical understanding required towards
a particular engineering field. 3. Manipulate experimental models, and use facilities
available to the optimum 4. Propose and make suggestions for further improvement. 5. Write a formal engineering report and display by oral
presentation. 6. Demonstrate business potentials on the developed project. 7. Demonstrate the right attitude in completing the project. Synopsis This is the second part of the final year project. Students are expected to continue the project done in Bachelor Degree Project Part I till completion. At the end of the semester students are required to submit the final year project report both orally and in writing for assessment. References None
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
134
130
BTNT 4413 MOBILE COMMUNICATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic concepts of a mobile communication
system. 2. Design a model of cellular radio system communication and
analyze their operation and performance. 3. Solve the effect of mobile radio propagations. 4. Classify the scope concerning the various standards of
mobile radio, and the capabilitiy limits. 5. Construct and analyze the GSM system. 6. Report and explain their given assignment clearly. Synopsis This subject will discussed on Introduction and Basic Concept of Mobile Communication System, Radio Wave propagation in Mobile Communication Systems, High Spectrum Efficiency Modulation Systems, Zone Techniques for Configuration and Channel Assignment, Techniques to Improve Transmission Quality and Error Control Techniques. Mobile communications technology has seen a thriving development in recent years. Driven by technological advancements as well as application demands, various classes of communication networks emerged. This is why this subject should be included in the program. References 1. Theodore S. Rappaport, Wireless Communications:
Principles and Practice, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2004. 2. Wayne Tomasi, Electronic Communications Systems, 5th
Edition, Prentice Hall, 2004. 3. W.C.Y. Lee, Mobile Cellular Telecommunications: Analog
and Digital Systems, McGraw-Hill, 1995. 4. R. Blake, “Wireless Communication Technology", Thomson
Delmar, 2003. 5. W.C.Y.Lee, "Mobile Communications Engineering: Theory
and applications, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill International, 1998.
6. S. Hideichi, “Mobile Communications”, Ohmsha Ltd., 2000.
BTNT 4433 ANTENNA ENGINEERING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Categorize, Identify and analyze the basic antenna
parameters. 2. Design and evaluate the antenna structures to satisfy the
desired requirements. 3. Construct and optimize basic and advanced antenna
structures that fulfil desired specification by using the 3D simulation software.
4. Construct and analyze matching and feeding networks for antennas using simulation tools
5. Report and explain their given assignment clearly Synopsis This course will discuss: Introduction and Fundamentals of Antenna, Antenna Solution using Maxwell Equation, Types of Antenna, Matching and Feeding Networks, Antenna Measurement and Introduction to Radio-wave Propagation. References 1. C.A. Balanis:”Antenna Theory, Analysis & Design”, John
Wiley 1997. 2. V. J. Fusco, “Foundation of Antenna Theory & Techniques”,
Pearson Prentice Hall, 2005. 3. Stutzman and Thiele, Antenna Theory and Design, John
Wiley, 1998. 4. Gary E. Evans,”Antenna Measurement Techniques”, Artech
House 1990. 5. Warren L. Stutzman,”Polarization in Electromagnetic
Systems”, Artech House 1993. 6. T. A. Milligan, “Modern Antenna Design” John Wiley, 2nd
edition, 2005.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
135
131
BTNT 4423 OPTICAL COMMUNICATION & OPTOELECTRIC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Discover the basic properties of light in semiconductor and
various components of optical communication system. 2. Construct measure and explain the working principle of a
laser diode, LED and photodetector, their characteristics and structures.
3. Design and analyze the appropriate fiber optical network with optima performances.
4. Report and explain their given assignment clearly. Synopsis This subject will discuss on Introduction of Optical Communication System, Light Propagation in Optical Fibre, Transmission Characteristics of Optical Fibres, Optical Sources, Optical Detectors, Direct Detection Receiver Performance and Fibre Optical Network Applications. The rationale of offering this subject is as the progression of communication system where the existing transmission media has been replaced to fibre optics due to its advantages. Therefore, students should have basic knowledge of optical communication and basic skills required by the industry. References 1. Palais J.C., Fiber Optic Communications, Prentice Hall,
2004. 2. Downing J.N., Fiber Optic Communications, Prentice Hall,
2005. 3. Senior J.M., Optical Fiber Communications: Principles and
Practice, Prentice Hall, 2008. 4. Petruzellis T., Optoelectronics, Fiber Optics, and Laser
Cookbook, McGraw-Hill. 5. Agrawal G.P., Fiber Optic Communication Systems, Wiley
Interscience, 2002.
BTNT 4403 SATELLITE COMMUNICATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Categorize, identify and analyze the basic concept of
satellite communication. 2. Design and evaluate the satellite link for specific carrier
over noise ratio. 3. Explain critically the orbit mechanic and earth station. 4. Construct and analyze satellite subsystem. 5. Report and explain their given assignment clearly either
individually or in group.. Synopsis This subject will discussed on introduction to satellite communication - frequency allocations, applications, future trends satellite communication; Orbital mechanics and launchers- Orbital Mechanics, Look angle determination; Satellite subsystem - telemetry, tracking, command and monitoring, power systems, communication subsystems, satellite antenna; , Satellite Link Design - design of downlink, uplink design, design of satellite links for specific C/N ; and Earth station technology. References 1. Timothy Pratt, Charles Bostian, Jeremy Allnutt, “Satellite
Communication”, JWiley Publications 2nd Editions, 2003. 2. Wilbur L. Pritchard, Robert A Nelson, Hendri G.
Suyderhoud, “Satellite Communication Enginering”, Pearson Publications 2003.
3. M. Richharia,, Satellite Communication, BSP, 2003 4. K.n. Raja Rao, Fundamentals of Satellite Communications,
PHI, 2004 5. G. Maral & M. Bousquet, Satellite Communications
Systems, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2002. 6. Dennis Roddy, Satellite Communications, 3rd Edition,
McGraw Hill, 2001.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
136
132
BLHW 1013 FOUNDATION ENGLISH LEARNING OUTCOMES Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. infer information from various oral texts of different
complexity levels. 2. respond to stimuli and justify reasons individually and in
group discussions on a wide range of contemporary issues. 3. apply information in cloze texts based on passages from
various sources. 4. produce an extended writing and a report based from non-
linear sources.
SYNOPSIS This course is designed to help students improve their proficiency in English language and to communicate effectively in both spoken and written forms. It is tailored to the four components, namely Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing of the Malaysian University English Test (MUET). Grammar component is taught in an integrated approach to build confidence among the learners to become efficient speakers of English. The CL approach is incorporated in this course. REFERENCES 1. Choo, W.Y., Yeoh, W.T., Yee, S.F. & Nyanaprakasan, S.
(2008). Ace ahead MUET. Selangor : Oxford Fajar. 2. Gaudart, H., Hughes, R., Michael, J. (2007). Towards better
English grammar. Selangor: Oxford Fajar Sdn. Bhd. 3. Koh, S. L (2009). MUET model tests. Selangor: Penerbit
Ilmu Bakti Sdn Bhd. 4. Ponniah, A.L.S.M., Foziah Shaari, Noraini Ahmad Basri,
Noor Azhana Mohamad Hamdan, Doreen Azlina Abdul Rahman.(2009). Stride ahead: Focus on English. Selangor: Pearson Malaysia Sdn.Bhd.
5. Richards, C., Kaur, B. , Ratnam, P. & Rajaretnam, T. (2008). Text MUET: A strategic approach. Selangor: Longman.
BLHL XXX2 THIRD LANGUAGE Bahasa Arab Tahap 1 Bahasa Arab Tahap 2 Bahasa Mandarin Tahap 1 Bahasa Mandarin Tahap 2 Bahasa Jepun Tahap 1 Bahasa Jepun Tahap 2 Bahasa Jerman Tahap 1 Bahasa Jerman Tahap 2 Bahasa Perancis Tahap 1 Bahasa Perancis Tahap 2
SUBJECT DETAILS FOR JTKM PROGRAMMES
University Compulsory Subjects (W)
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
137
133
BLHW 2403 TECHNICAL ENGLISH LEARNING OUTCOMES 1. At the end of the course, students should be able to: 2. distinguish the use of tenses, run-ons, fragments, modifiers
and parallelism. 3. summarise and paraphrase main ideas. 4. write a proposal as well as progress and project reports in a
group. 5. organise and present project report in groups. SYNOPSIS This course is content-based in nature and aims to equip students with the necessary language skills required to write various reports. As this course prepares students for the mechanics of the different genres of writing, the emphasis is on proposal, progress and project reports by employing Student-Centred Learning approach. It also introduces students to the elements of presentation as well as provides them with the necessary grammar skills in writing. REFERENCES 1. Indra Devi, S. & Zanariah Jano. (2008). Technical report
writing. Kuala Lumpur: Pearson Prentice Hall. 2. Anderson, P.V. (2007). Technical communication: A reader-
centred approach (6th ed.). California: Wadsworth Publishing.
3. Finkelstein, L. J. (2007). Pocket book of technical writing for engineers and scientists (3rd ed.) New York: McGraw Hill.
4. Hart, H. (2008). Introduction to engineering communication (2nd ed.). London: Prentice Hall.
5. Krishnan, L.A., Jong. R., Kathpalia, S.S. & Tan, M.K. (2006). Engineering your report: From start to finish (2nd ed.). Singapore: Prentice Hall.
6. Sharimllah Devi, R., Indra Devi, S. & Nurlisa Loke Abdullah. (2011). Grammar for technical writing. Selangor:Pearson Hall.
BLHW 1702 ISLAMIC & ASIAN CIVILIZATIONS (TITAS) LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. explain the concept of civilization studies in order to face
global development in relation to religion, race and nation. 2. elaborate on issues related to world civilization via group
presentations. 3. interrelate the history of the advancement of world
civilizations like the Islamic, Chinese and Indian civilizations via group work.
SYNOPSIS This course provides knowledge on various civilizations. It introduces Islamic civilization as the basis for the Malay and Malaysian civilization. Additionally, issues related to the Chinese and Indian civilizations together with current and future issues of various world civilizations are also discussed. REFERENCES 1. Osman Bakar. (2009). Modul Pengajian Tamadun Islam &
Tamadun Asia. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbit Universiti Malaya. 2. Sazelin Arif, Ahmad Ridzwan Mohd Noor, Mahadi Abu
Hassan, Nooraini Sulaiman & Ali Hafizar Mohammad Rawi. (2007). Tamadun Islam dan Tamadun Asia. Kuala Lumpur: Mc Graw-Hill (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.
3. Hashim Musa. (2005). Pemerkasaan Tamadun Melayu Malaysia Menghadapi Globalisasi Barat. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbit Universiti Malaya. (TITAS)
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
138
134
BLHW 2712 ETHNIC RELATIONS LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of this course, students should be able to: 7. elaborate on the challenges of cultural plurality and ethnic
relations in Malaysia via group work (P2, LS) 8. interrelate the role of cultural plurality, society and ethnic
groups in the Malaysian unity context (C3, TS) 9. share learning experiences on the issues of socio-culture
appropriately (A3, EM). SYNOPSIS This course focuses on the basic concepts of culture and ethnic relations in Malaysia. It exposes students to ethnic relations in the development of the Malaysian society. Besides, this course aims to give an understanding of the global challenges facing ethnic and cultural relations at the Malaysian level. REFERENCES 7. Shamsul Amri Baharuddin. (2007). Modul Hubungan Etnik.
UPENA, KPTM. 8. Abdul Aziz Bari. (2008). Perlembagaan Malaysia. Shah
Alam: Arah Publication Sdn. Bhd. 9. Mohd Taib Hj Dora. (2005). Liberalisasi Komuniti. Melaka:
Penerbit Universiti Teknikal Malaysia Melaka.
BLHW 1732 MALAYSIAN SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. interrelate the social process with economic
transformation in the national development agenda. 2. practice the qualities of truthworthy leadership in group
activities. 3. reflect on the role and responsibilities of national
development for human well-being via group work. SYNOPSIS This course discusses the process of social and economic changes in the Malaysian development agenda. The awareness of this developmental aspect is important to ensure that Malaysia is capable of addressing global challenges. At the same time, it also aims to develop quality human capital and mindset. REFERENCES 1. Siti Rohana Omar, Mohd Taib Dora, Nor Fazilah Abd Hamid,
Anidah Robani, Norliah Kudus, Hanipah Hussin &Izaidin Abd Majid. (2009). Modul Pengajaran Transformasi Sosioekenomi Malaysia: Dimensi dan Cabaran. Cetakan Dalaman UTeM
2. Kassim Thukiman. (2007). Malaysia Perspektif Sejarah dan Politik. Skudai: Penerbit UTM.
3. Ahmad Shukri Mohd. Nain & Rosman Md Yusoff. (2007). Konsep, Teori, Dimensi dan Isu Pembangunan. Skudai: Penerbit UTM.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
139
135
BKKX XXX1 CO-CURRICULUM 1 Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Recognise a balanced and comprehensive education 2. Develop leadership aspects stressing on diciplines and
cooperation within a group or organisaton. 3. Build personality and character guided by rules of conduct. 4. Foster cooperation and unity in multi-racial society. Synopsis 1. Cultural Choir, Gamelan, Cak Lempung, Nasyid, Seni Khat, Seni Lakon, Art, English Elocution, Bahasa Melayu Elocution, and Kompang. 2. Entrepreneurship Video, Film and Photography, Publishing & Journalism, Computer and Technopreneurship. 3. Society Fiqh Muamalat, Fiqh Amali, Tahsin Al-Quran & Yaasin and Peer Program. 4. Recreation Go-Kart, Adventure and Cycling. 5. Sports Swimming, Volley Ball, Golf, Kayaking, Takraw, Aerobic, Badminton, Football and Net ball. 6. Martial Arts Silat Gayong, Karate-Do and Taekwando.
BKKX XXX1 CO-CURRICULUM 2 Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Understand a balanced and comprehensive education
hence generating more mature students. 2. Develop leadership aspects stressing on disciplines and
cooperation within a group or organisation. 3. Build personality and character guided by rules of conduct. 4. Foster cooperation and unity in multi-racial society. Synopsis 1. Cultural Choir, Gamelan, Cak Lempung, Nasyid, Seni Khat, Acting, Art, English Elocution, Bahasa Melayu Elocution, and Kompang. 2. Entrepreneurship Video, Film and Photography, Publishing & Journalism, Computer and Technopreneurship. 3. Society Fiqh Muamalat, Fiqh Amali, Tahsin Al-Quran & Yaasin and Peer Program. 4. Recreation Go-Kart, Adventure and Cycling. 5. Sports Swimming, Volley Ball, Golf, Kayaking, Takraw, Aerobic, Badminton, Football and Net ball. 6. Martial Arts Silat Gayong, Karate-Do and Taekwando.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
140
136
BLHW 3403 ENGLISH FOR PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION LEARNING OUTCOMES At the end of the course, students should be able to: 6. select and apply the appropriate tenses, parallelism, direct
and indirect speech, transitional markers and misplaced modifiers.
7. differentiate between facts and opinions, and use vocabulary relevant to its context.
8. respond to interviews and participate in meetings. 9. demonstrate communication and oral presentation skills. 10. produce resume, application letter and recommendation
report. SYNOPSIS This course is designed to develop oral communication, as well as enhance students’ level of English literacy which will be beneficial to their professional careers. It also aims to equip students with the communication skills necessary for the workplace. It complements the skills taught in BLHW 3403. Grammar will be taught implicitly in the course content. Students will acquire effective presentation skills as well as gain experience in mock interviews prior to seeking employment. The Student-Centred Learning approach is employed in teaching and learning process. REFERENCES 5. Azar, B. S. & Hagen, S. A. (2006). Basic English grammar.
New York: Pearson Education. 6. Casher, C. C. & Weldon, J. (2010). Presentation excellence:
25 tricks, tips and techniques for professional speakers and trainers. USA: CLB Publishing House.
7. Chin, F. C. J., Soo, K. S. E. & R. Manjuladevi. (2010). English for professional communication: Science and engineering. Singapore: Cenggage Learning Asia Pte Ltd.
8. Khoo, M. S. L, Razilah Abdul Rahim & E. Rajendraan (2006). Communication at the work place. Melaka: Jabatan Bahasa dan Komunikasi, UTeM.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
141
137
BTMU 1132 PHYSICS Learning Outcomes At the end of the course, students should be able to: 1. Define the basic laws and comprehend the basic concept of
physics. 2. Apply the law and the concepts systematically in problem
solving. 3. Relate between the various topics covered and their
application in the field of engineering 4. Make accurate measurement and present result in a proper
scientific report Synopsis The topics covers in this subject are; Forces, Acceleratiob and Newton’s Second Law of Motion, Motion with a Changing Velocity, Circular Motion, Conservation of Energy, Linear Momentum, Fluids, Elasticity and Oscillations, Heat, electric Forces and Fields, Electric Potential, Electric Current and Circuits, Magnetic Forces and Field, Electromagnetic Induction References 1. Raymond A. Serway and John W. Jewett, 2009, Physics for
Scientists and Engineers, Chapter 1-39, Brooks Cole 2. John D. Cutnell and Kenneth W. Johnson, 2009, Physics,
Wiley. 3. Douglas C. Giancoli, 2008, Physics for Scientists & Engineers
with Modern Physicsm 4th Edition, Prentice Hall 4. Giambatista, A., Richardson, B.M and Richardson R.C.,
2007, College Physics 2nd Edition, Mc-Graw Hill
BTMU 1142 CHEMISTRY Learning Outcomes At the end of the course, students should be able to: 1. Recall the relevant chemistry principle studied. 2. Explain verbally and writing the different chemical
reactions, the differences in the reactivity of various elements, the nature of various chemical properties and chemical reactions and the factors affecting chemical properties and chemical reaction.
3. Solve chemistry related problem by applying the relevant chemical principles.
4. Demonstrate the relevant chemistry laboratory skills. 5. Apply the various chemical properties learned to discuss
the solution for relevant mechanical engineering problems. Synopsis This course will discuss about the concepts in Chemistry: The Study of Change, Atoms, Molecules and Ions, Chemical Reaction, Structure of Atoms, The Periodic Table, Chemical Bonding, Properties of Matter, and Thermochemistry. References 1. Raymond Chang (2007). “Chemistry, 9th Edition”. McGraw
Hill. 2. Engel, Drobny & Reid (2008) “Physical Chemistry for the
Life Sciences”, 1st Edition. Pearson Education 3. Hill, Petrucci, McCreary & Perry (2005) “General
Chemistry”, 4th Edition. Pearson Education. 4. Averill & Eldredge (2007) “Chemistry: Principles, Patterns,
and Applications” Pearson Education.
Programme Core Subjects (P)
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
142
138
BTMU 1162 NUMERICAL METHODS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, the students should be able to: 1. Describe clearly the basic mechanical quantity
measurement techniques, procedures and devices. 2. Conduct the experiment procedures using multiple
instruments appropriately. 3. Record the reliable data and present it properly in table
and graphical formats. 4. Analyze the collected experimental data, thus recognizing
the important point of the data through discussion. 5. Produce proper laboratory report that meets the
requirement format. Synopsis Introduction to the experiment. Measurement concept. Experiment data properties. Graphic presentation of the data. Dealing with hysteresis and uncertainty. Using statistical method for irregular data. Regression line. Experiment report. Using spreadsheet in data analysis. Introduction to the measurement devices. References 1. Kirkup, L. 1994. Experimental Methods: An Introduction to
the Analysis and Presentation of Data, John Wiley & Sons. 2. Holman, J.P. 2001. Experimental Method for Engineers, 7th
Edition, McGraw Hill. 3. Doeblin, O.E. 1995. Engineering Experimentation: Planning,
Executing and Reporting, McGraw Hill. 4. Bolton, W. 1996. Experimental Method, Newness
(Butterworth-Heinemann)
BTMU 1172 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, the students should be able to: 1. Determine appropriate multivariable function together
with its domain and range 2. Evaluate precisely the integrals of the function with double
and triple integral by using various techniques 3. Use suitable techniques of integration to calculate the area
and the volume of the region 4. Evaluate vector-valued function accurately 5. Apply apposite knowledge of vector-valued function in
physical and engineering fields Synopsis This course consists of three chapters: Functions of Several Variables, Multiple Integrals and Vector-valued Functions. The syllabus is developed by introducing the concepts of the functions with severable variables, integration and also vector-valued function, followed by learning various techniques in solving the problems and its application in physical and engineering fields. References 1. Finney R.L., Weir M.D. and Giordano F.R.,Thomas’s,
Calculus, 10th Edition, Pearson 2001 2. Anton H., Calculus, 8th Edition, John Wiley 1992. 3. Smith R.T. and Minton R.B., Multivariable Calculus,
McGraw-Hill 2002. 4. Steward J., Calculus- Concepts And Contexts, Brooks/Cole,
2nd Edition, 2001 5. Stroud K.A., Engineering Mathematics, 5th Edition,
Palgrave Macmillan 2001
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
143
139
BTMU 1213 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, the students should be able to: 1. Identify different mechanical engineering drawing format
and types. 2. Use standard drafting tools in mechanical engineering
drawing. 3. Use standard Computer Aided Design software for 2D
drafting and 3D solid modelling command tools. 4. Produce geometric, orthographic, isometric, section cut
and detail drawing using manual drafting technique and also using CAD.
Synopsis Introduction. Techniques of using engineering drawing equipments. Techniques for lettering and numbering. Types of lines. Geometrical drawings. Dimensioning techniques. Orthographic projection drawings. Isometric drawings. Cross-sectional drawings. Auxiliary view projections. Development drawings. Introduction to computer-aided drawings (CAD). Object snap features. Coordinate systems. Basic CAD drawing commands. Basic CAD editing commands. Lettering in CAD. The use of layers. Dimensioning. Template preparations. Plotting in CAD. Orthographical and Isometric drawings. Cross-Sectional drawings. Introduction to 3D drawing in CAD. References 1. Mohd Ramzan Mainal, Badri Abd Ghani dan Yahya Samian,
2000, Lukisan Kejuruteraan Asas, UTM, Skudai. 2. Yarwood, A., 2002, An Introduction To AutoCAD 2002,
Prentice Hall, London. 3. Giesecke, F. E., Mitchell, A., Spencer, H. C., Hill, I. L.,
Dygdon, J. T. and Novak, J. E., 2003, Technical Drawing, 12th Ed., Prentice Hall, New York.
4. Jensen, C., and Jay D. H., 1996, Engineering Drawing And Design, 5th Edition, Glencoe and McGraw Hill, New York.
5. McFarlane, R., 1994, Introducing 3D AutoCAD, Edward Arnold, London.
BTMU 1223 ENGINEERING DESIGN Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students will be able to: 1. Recognize terminology used in machine components and
its design. 2. Identify the type of failures of machine components design. 3. Apply the formulation of the safe design for machine
components. 4. Design the most suitable size and shape of machine
components. 5. Analyze and design machine components under different
loads and conditions. 6. Redesign and improvise the existing machine components. Synopsis This course covers Introduction to Engineering Design, Design of Static Strength, Design of Fatigue Strength, Design of Threaded and Welded Joints, Bearings, Shafts/rods, Gears, Springs, Flexible Mechanical Elements, Brakes and Clutches. Mini project. References 1. Mott, R.L., 2006, Machine Elements in Mechanical Design
in SI Units, Fourth Edition, Prentice Hall, Singapore. 2. Shigley, J.E. & Mischke, C.R, 2003, Mechanical Engineering
Design, Six Metrix Edition, McGraw Hill, Singapore. 3. Norton, R.L., 2004, Design of Machinery: An Introduction
to the Synthesis and Analysis of Mechanisms and Machines, Third Edition, McGraw-Hill, Singapore.
4. Juvinall, R.C. & Marshek, K.M, 2000, Fundamentals of Machine Component Design, Third Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
144
140
BTMU 1313 STATICS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, the students should be able to: 1. Apply the concept of scalar and vector quantities in
determining forces and moment in 2-D and 3-D appropriately.
2. Construct Free Body-Diagram in order to solve engineering mechanics of statics problems correctly.
3. Calculate the reaction forces on common structure, frames and machines by using the principle of equilibrium precisely.
4. Apply apposite concept of friction to determine the reaction forces by using the principle of equilibrium.
5. Determine the center of gravity/mass and centroid of a body by using appropriate techniques.
Synopsis To discuss an introduction and the basic concept of statics as physical sciences, System of Units, Scalars and Vectors, Free body diagram, Forces system, Force system resultants and Moment, Equilibrium of a particle, Equilibrium of a rigid body, Structural analysis (trusses analysis and simple frames and machines), Friction and Centre of gravity and Centroid. References 1. Hibbeler R.C. 2004. Engineering Mechanics –
Statics, 3th Edition. Prentice Hall. 2. Beer F.P and Johnston. E.R. 2000. Vector Mechanic for
Engineer. McGraw-Hill. 3. Meriam J.L. & Kraige L.G. 1987. Engineering
Mechanics – Static. John Wiley & Sons. 4. Schmict and Boresi. 2000. Engineering Mechanics-
Statics. Thomson Learning. 5. Pitel and Kiu. 1999. Engineering Mechanics-Static.
Thomson Learning.
BTMU 1323 MATERIALS SCIENCE Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, the students should be able to: 1. Describe the classifications, structures and
applications of metals, ceramics and polymers correctly.
2. Analyse deformation behavior and strengthening mechanisms relying to its structure, properties and failure of materials clearly.
3. Apply Fick’s Law in calculating the diffusion process and its mechanism in solids properly.
4. Demonstrate appropriate test methods in determining mechanical and physical properties.
5. Apply the relation between composition, microstructure and properties of metallic materials by using apposite phase diagram and heat treatment process.
Synopsis Introduction to fundamentals of Materials Science and its applications, atomic structure, crystal structure, solidification, imperfections and solid diffusion, mechanical and physical properties, phase diagrams and transformation, types and applications of materials. References 1. Askeland D. R., 1994. The Science and Engineering of
Materials, 3rd Edition, PWS Publication Co. 2. Budinski K. G. and Budinski M. G., 1999. Engineering
Materials: Properties and Selection, 6th Edition, Butterworth-Heinemann UK.
3. Calister W. D., 2008. Materials Science and Engineering: An Introduction, 6th Edition, John Wiley & Sons.
4. Shackelford J. F., 2000. Introduction to Materials Science for Engineers, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall.
5. Smith W. F., 2004. Foundation of Materials Science and Engineering, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
145
141
BTMU 1413 TECHNOLOGY WORKSHOP
Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students will be able to: 1. Identify common shop hazards and use common shop
safety equipments. 2. Use the proper and the correct use of hand tools and
equipments for a given job. 3. Use various kinds of tools and related to welding,
fabrication & fitting. 4. Apply the knowledge of welding, fabrication and fitting
activities. Synopsis Welding-This course is designed to provide students with a fundamental understanding of gas welding, arc welding (SMAW) and MIG welding (GMAW), welding safety, welding machines (gas, arc, MIG), electrode classifications and electrode selection. Training to develop the basic welding skills in basic joint configurations such as butt joint, lap joint, and tee joint. Fabrication-Covers layout, cutting, forming, and joining of basic sheet metal and use of hand tools and equipment to develop and fabricate basic sheet metal project based on drawing of the project. Fitting-This course is designed to give students a good appreciation on the various types of hand tools commonly used for measurement, marking out, and metal removal. This course also let the students understand the uses of common hand tools and appreciate the importance of fitting work in the finishing product. Through the hands-on practice given, the students will acquire some of the basic skills and techniques involved with these hand processes. References 1. Mike, T., 2000, Basic Manufacturing, Butterworth-
Heinemann. 2. Kibbe, R.R., Meyer, R.O., White, W. T. and Neely, J.E., 1995,
Machine Tool Practices, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall. 3. Kalpakjian, S., 1987, Manufacturing Engineering and
Technology, Addision-Wesley. 4. Amstead, B.H., 1977, Manufacturing Processes, John Wiley
& Son. 5. Bruce J.Black, Workshop Processes, Practices and Materials
(3rd Edition), Newnes, 2004.
BTMU 1512 EXPERIMENTAL METHOD Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, the students should be able to: 1. Describe clearly the basic mechanical quantity
measurement techniques, procedures and devices. 2. Conduct the experiment procedures using multiple
instruments appropriately. 3. Record the reliable data and present it properly in table
and graphical formats. 4. Analyze the collected experimental data, thus recognizing
the important point of the data through discussion. 5. Produce proper laboratory report that meets the
requirement format. Synopsis Introduction to the experiment. Measurement concept. Experiment data properties. Graphic presentation of the data. Dealing with hysteresis and uncertainty. Using statistical method for irregular data. Regression line. Experiment report. Using spreadsheet in data analysis. Introduction to the measurement devices. References 1. Kirkup, L. 1994. Experimental Methods: An Introduction to
the Analysis and Presentation of Data, John Wiley & Sons. 2. Holman, J.P. 2001. Experimental Method for Engineers, 7th
Edition, McGraw Hill. 3. Doeblin, O.E. 1995. Engineering Experimentation: Planning,
Executing and Reporting, McGraw Hill. 4. Bolton, W. 1996. Experimental Method, Newness
(Butterworth-Heinemann)
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
146
142
BTMU 1543 PRINCIPLE OF ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, the students should be able to: 1. Understand electric circuit scheme diagram, components,
equipment measurement, machine electric transformer, digital circuit and operation of amplifier.
2. Apply mesh-current, node-voltage and theorem superposition to analyse AC and DC circuit.
3. Analyse characteristic and electric machine efficiency and transformer.
4. Design basic circuit. 5. Analyse application of amplifier operation. Synopsis Introduction to Electrical System. Electric component and equipment measurements. Analyse Direct Current (DC) circuit. Analyse Alternative Current (AC) circuit. Complex number and phase. Resonance. 3 phase circuit. Filter. Variable. Introduction to Machine DC and AC. Amplifier Operation. Logic gate. Code and Uncode. References 1. Hughes, M. S., 2002, Electrical & Electronic Technology,
Prentice Hall. 2. Floyd, 2000, Principles of Electric Circuits, Prentice Hall. 3. Alexander, C. K., 2000, Fundamental of Electric Circuit, Mc
Graw Hill. 4. Nilsson, J. W. and Riedel, S. A., 2001, Electric Circuit,
Prentice Hall. 5. Bogart Jr, T. F., 1996, Introduction to Digital Circuits, Mc
Graw Hill.
BTMU 2142 STATISTICS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Identify clearly the concept of probability and relate to its
probability distribution. 2. Differentiate between sample and population and
appropriately applied in the inferential statistics. 3. Examine the use of t and z test accurately and apply the
concept in inferential statistics. 4. Determine the concept of hypothesis testing for one
population and proposed particularly in the hypothesis for more than one population.
5. Manage data and apply the concept of correlation, linear model and slope testing appropriately.
Synopsis This course consists of eight chapters: Probability, Discrete random variable and its distribution, Continuous random variable and its distribution, Sampling Distribution, Estimation, Hypothesis Testing, Simple Linear Regression and ANOVA. References 1. Douglas C, Montgomery, G. C. Runger, Applied Statistics
and Probability for Engineers, 3rd Edition, John Wiley 2. Walpole, Probability and Statistics for Engineers and
Scientist, 7th Edition, Prentice Hall. 3. Miller & Freud’s, Probability and Statistics for Engineers,
7th Edition, Prentice Hall. 4. David Levine, Ramsey, Schmidt, Scientist Using Microsoft
Excel and MINITAB, Prentice Hall.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
147
143
BTMU 2152 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Solve accurately the concept of ordinary and partial
differential equations 2. Apply accurately the operation of ordinary and partial
differential equations . 3. Determine correctly the ordinary and partial differential
equations 4. Apply the appropriate knowledge of ordinary and partial
differential in solving engineering problems.
Synopsis This course consists of 5 chapters including Introduction to Ordinary and Partial Differential Equations, Second Order Linear Differential Equation with constant coefficients, Laplace Transform, Fourier Series and Partial Differential Equations. References 1. Dennis Zill & Micheal Cullen (2008). Differential Equations
with Boundary-Value Problems. 7th Ed. USA: Brooks/Cole. 2. William E.Boyce and Richard C. Diprima, Elementary
Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems, John Wiley & Sons, 2009.
3. Blanchard P.,Devaney R. L. 2006, Differential Equations,3rd Edition Cengage Learning.
4. K. A. Stroud, Dexter J. Booth. 2005, Differential Equations, Industrial Press Inc
5. R. Kent Nagle, Edward B. Saff and Arthur David Snider, Fundamentals of Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems, Addison Wesley, 5th Edition, 2008
BTMU 2333 SOLID MECHANICS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Apply concept of stress-strain relationship and factor of
safety appropriately in engineering design. 2. Construct normal force, shear force and bending moment
diagrams in determining stresses and displacement appropriately.
3. Analyse apposite stresses within structure subjected to torsion.
4. Analyze the slope and displacement of a continuous beam due to static loading using singularity function correctly.
Synopsis Introduction to various types of structures and supports. Concepts of stress, strain, shear force and bending moment. Theory on beam deflection. Theory on torsion. Shear flow. Combination of loads. Deflection of beams References 1. Beer. F.P. et al. 2006. Mechanics of Materials 4th Edition in
SI Units. McGraw-Hill. 2. Hibbeler.R.C. 2004. Mechanics of Materials SI Edition.
Prentice Hall. 3. Gere.J.M. 2004. Mechanics of Materials. Thomson. 4. Vable. M. 2002. Mechanics of Materials. Oxford University
Press. 5. Shames.I.H. 2000. Introduction to Solid Mechanics. Prentice
Hall.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
148
144
BTMU 2423 MANUFACTURING PROCESS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Recognize a theoretical and practical understanding on
the issues and aspects of manufacturing. 2. Identify and select the most suitable materials,
machines, tools and equipment for a particular manufacturing process.
3. Apply knowledge of manufacturing processes in order to produce a particular product.
4. Select and analyse suitable parameters in current manufacturing processes.
Synopsis This course introduces the students to manufacturing and the aspects of manufacturing, metal-casting processes and equipments, forming and shaping processes and equipments, joining processes, manufacturing materials, and material-removal processes and machines. References 1. DeGarmo, E. P., Black, J. T. and Kohser, R. A., 2002,
Materials and Processes in Manufacturing, 9th Edition, Wiley, New York.
2. Kalpakjian, S., and Schmid, S. R., 2001, Manufacturing Engineering Technology, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall International.
3. Schey, Introduction to Manufacturing Process, 1999, McGraw-Hill..
4. Zainal Abidin Ahmad, 1999, Proses Pembuatan: Jilid II, Universiti Teknologi Malaysia.
5. Zainal Abidin Ahmad, 1998, Proses Pembuatan: Jilid I, Universiti Teknologi Malaysia.
BTMU 2613 THERMODYNAMICS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Define basic terms of thermodynamics, the ideal gas and
identify systems, properties and processes. 2. Use of property tables and draw property diagrams of pure
substances to define the state of the system. 3. Apply the concept of First Law of Thermodynamics in
Closed Systems and Control Volumes. 4. Understand the concept of Second Law of Thermodynamics
to determine the performance of heat engines, refrigerators and heat pumps.
Synopsis This course covers the basic concepts and definitions of engineering thermodynamics, energy, work and heat, properties of pure substances (relationships of P-v, T-v, P-T and T-s diagrams), First Law of Thermodynamics, Second Law of thermodynamics and Entropy. References 1. Cengel, Y. A. and Boles, M. A..2008. Thermodynamics: An
Engineering Approach, 6th Ed, McGraw Hill.Singapore. 2. S.C.Gupta,2008. Thermodynamics, 1st Ed, Pearson
Education(Singapore) Pte. Ltd 3. Sonntag, R.E., Borgnakke. C, Van. and Gordon J., 2008.
Fundamentals of Thermodynamics, 7th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.New York.
4. Zoran, M.,Duan G., 2008, Applied Industrial Energy and Environmental Management, Wiley-IEEE.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
149
145
BTMU 2623 FLUID MECHANICS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Use fluid and its properties equation in the context of fluid
mechanics application. 2. Apply fluid mechanics equations in solving fluid statics and
dynamics problems. 3. Respond to the procedure that has been given in
laboratory as a team. 4. Interpret experimental data accordingly and to report the
results in the appropriate scientific manner.
Synopsis The introduction to the basic physical properties of fluids. Definition of pressure and head. Derivation of hydrostatic equation and its application in pressure measurement, static forces analysis on immersed surface and buoyancy analysis. The introduction to fluid dynamics and fluid flow analysis. Derivation of flow equations. The application of energy equation and Bernoulli equation in the calculation of flow velocity, discharge, and head lost in piping systems. Dimensional analysis and its application. References 1. Munson, B. R., Young D. F. and Okiishi, T. H., 2006,
Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics, 5th Ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc, Asia.
2. Som, S. K. and Biswas, G., 2004, Introduction to Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines, 2nd Ed., Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
3. Douglas, J. F., Gasiorek J. M. and Swaffield, J. A., 2001, Fluid Mechanics, 4th Ed., Prentice Hall, Spain.
4. Cengel, Y. A. and Cimbala, J. M., 2006, Fluid Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications, International Edition, McGraw-Hill, Singapore.
5. Streeter, V. L. and Wylie, E. B., 1983, Fluid Mechanics, First SI Metric Ed., McGraw-Hill, Singapore.
BTMU 4922 ENGINEERING ETHICS & OSHA Learning Outcomes After completing the course, students will be able to: 1. Recognize the fundamental principles of Professional Ethics
and various behaviors or conducts that need to be observed and controlled by a professional engineer.
2. Identify moral problems that related to engineering ethics and able to solve the problem using various appropriate methods.
3. Explain the concepts of engineering ethics and to relate it with the actual phenomena.
4. Comprehend the responsibilities of engineers in the scope of their function in any organization either as an employee or as an employer and have a feeling of being a responsible and public safety and environmental conscious engineer.
5. Define the Occupational Health concept and identify the critical occupational safety health hazard that the workers might exposed themselves in the factory working environment in order to prevent or at least minimize these hazards.
Synopsis Engineering Ethics. Analysis of ethics case study. Introduction to professional ethics. Responsible engineer. Integrity. industrial hygiene and safety management, hazardous material and emergency planning, Conflict. Responsibility to environment. Occupational Health and Safety (OSH). Risk and prevention. Good safety practices. Case Study. References 1. Charles, E. H., Michael, J. R., 2000, Engineering Ethics:
Concepts and Cases, 2nd Edition, Thompson. 2. Sugimoto, T. and Taki, S., 2002, Introduction to Engineering
Ethics, Maruzen. 3. Johari, M. J., 2001, Etika Profesional, Edisi Pertama,
Universiti Teknologi Malaysia. 4. Akta Pendaftaran Jurutera 1967 (Akta 138). 5. Occupational Safety and Health Handbook, NIOSH Malaysia
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
150
146
BTMU 4952 TECHNOENTREPRENEUR Learning Outcomes At the end of the course, the student should be able to: 1. Examine and evaluate theories governing
entrepreneurship, entrepreneur revolution, its historical development, perspectives, disciplines, and entrepreneur’s contributions towards society.
2. Recognise and apply entrepreneurial skills such as creativity, innovativeness, proactiveness, risk-talking, opportunity recognition, marketing, and networking to enter the global market.
3. Develop and present an effective Business Plan.
Synopsis The course will facilitate students with key entrepreneurship motivation and skill as well as learn and acquire the principles and practices needed to form, enhance and expand their business. The “how” , “how-to” teaching and learning activities, which incorporates theories and practices, will help student acquire and develop necessary competencies before embarking on any business project. References 1. Ab Aziz Yusof, 2003, Prinsip Keusahawanan, Prentice Hall. 2. Nor Aishah Buang, 2002, Asas Keusahawanan, Fajar Bakti
Sdn. Bhd. 3. Kuratko, D.F. and Hodgetts, R.M., 2001, Enterpreneurship:
A Contemporary Approch, 5th Edition, South-Western, Ohio.
4. Morris, M.H. and Kuratko, D.F., 2002, Coporate Entrepreneurship, Harcouth Collage Publisher, Orlando.
5. Sue Birley, 1999, Entrepreneurship, Ashgate Publishing Limited, England.
BTMU 2113 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Identify the language elements and syntax used in C++ 2. Describe and solve the problem into appropriate solution
using problem solving techniques 3. Construct programs by applying appropriate programming
techniques 4. Design and implement a simple program using
programming structures such as conditionals, loops, and functions
5. Use a computer system to edit, compile and execute a program.
Synopsis Throughout the course, students will be introduced with basic principles of computers and software development methodology. The course also consists of basic programming principles such as syntax, semantic, compiling, and linking. Programming techniques using C++ such as data type and operator, selection, repetition, function, array, file, and pointer are learnt towards the end of this course. References 1. Daniel Liang, Y, 2009, Introduction to Programming with
C++, Pearson Education. 2. Abdullah, N. et. al, 2006, Lab Module Computer
Programming BITG 1113, 3rd Edition, FTMK, KUTKM. 3. Malik, D. S., 2010, C++ Programming: From Problem
Analysis to Program Design, Thomson Online Technology. 4. James Allert, 2008, Programming with C++, Concepts and
Projects, McGraw Hill. 5. Jesse Liberty, Siddhartha Rao and Bradley L. Jones , 2008,
Teach Yourself C++ in One Hour a Day,6th Edition, Sams.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
151
147
BTMU 2123 MICROPROCESSOR TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Identify the fundamental concept of digital system in
architecture of microprocessor. 2. Describe and classify the operation between
microprocessor and input/output interfacing devices. 3. Apply the programming technique by using assembly
language program for the microprocessor system. 4. Complete experiments in laboratory and present technical
report Synopsis This course will essentially divide into two sections; digital electronics and microprocessor. The first section covers topics on digital electronic that include Introduction to Digital Concepts, Logic Gates, Combinational Logic and Data Control Devices Flip Flops and Sequential Logic Circuits. The next section will deals with topics such as Microprocessor Fundamentals, Introduction to Intel 8085 Microprocessor Hardware, Introduction to Intel 8085 Microprocessor Software and Programming Techniques with Additional Instructions. References 1. Ronald J. Tocci, Neal S. Widmer, Gregory L. Moss, 2010,
Digital Systems: Principles and Applications,11th Edition, Prentice Hall.
2. Sumit Kumar S., 2008, Fundamental of Digital electronics and Microprocessors, M.D Publications Pvt. Ltd.
3. Jean-Loup Baer.Norman Balabanian, 2009, Microprocessor Architeture : from Simple pipeline to hip Multiprocessors, Cambridge University Press.
4. Ian Grout, 2008, Digital systems Design with FPGAs and CPLDS,.Newnes.
5. John F. Wakerly, 2005, Digital Design: principles and Practices Package, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall.
BTMU 2233 MODELING AND COMPUTER ANALYSIS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Produce engineering drawing according to specific
standard. 2. Produce orthographic, isometric, section cut, assembly
and exploded drawing using CAD software. 3. Analyze the assemblability of a product in assembly
workbench command. 4. Develop part and assembly drawing according to
mechanical engineering drawing standard. Synopsis Introduction to the Sketcher Workbench. Drawing basic profiles. Editing the profiles and constraints. Introduction to Part Design Workbench. Solid Modelling commands. Editing solid models in computer. Advanced components design. Introduction to Assembly Workbench. Using the Generative Drafting Workbench. References 1. Solidwork Corporation, 2006, “Solidworks 2006 Official
Training Manual”, Massachusetts USA. 2. Solidwork Corporation, “Cosmoworks Designer 2008’’,
Massachusetts USA. 3. Solidwork Corporation, “Solidworks 2007:Advanced
Surface Modeling 2006”, Massachusetts USA. 4. Dassault Systeme, 2006, Cosmos Work 5. Matt Lombart, “Solidworks 2007 Bible”, USA.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
152
148
BTMU 2523 DYNAMICS & MECHANICS OF MACHINES Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Using the concept of displacement, velocity, acceleration,
work, energy, impulse and momentum to solve problems related to the movement of particles and rigid bodies.
2. Analyzing the rigid body by using the methods of absolute and relative speed and acceleration method for plane motion.
3. Applying the principles of kinematics to solve the problem of flat belts and V
4. Using free-body diagrams to solve problems in the flywheel and governor.
5. Formulate and determine the natural frequency of free vibration in the system using either the method of conservation of energy, equivalent, or Newton's laws.
Synopsis Introduction to basic principles based on kinematic and kinetic dynamics. The concept of displacement, distance, velocity, speed and acceleration. Application of Newton's second law. The principle of work and energy, impulse and momentum of particles and rigid bodies. Transmission system based on the friction of motion, such as belts, brakes and dibble. Based delivery systems such as chains and gear teeth, etc. References 1. Hibbeler, R. C. 2010. Engineering Mechanics, Dynamics,
12nd Edition. Prentice Hall. 2. Beer, F. P., Johnson, E.R. and Clausen, W. E 2007. Vector
Mechanics for Engineers, Dynamics SI Units, 8th Edition. McGraw-Hill.
3. Bedford, A. And Fowler, W. 2008. Engineering Mechanics: Dynamics (SI units). 5th Edition.Prentice Hall.
4. Meriam, J. L. And Kraige, L. G. 2009. Engineering Mechanics, SI Version, 6th Edition. John Wiley.
BTMU 3523 CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Understand the concept and control applications. 2. Determine the types of control systems. 3. Identify the dynamic behaviour and the details of the
system through the analysis of the response system, response and stability of frequency.
4. Understanding the basic concepts of measurement and instrumentation.
5. Understanding the signal conditioning applications, data acquisition and process measurement and instrumentation.
6. Understand the concept of sensor elements / transducer through learning and application of the device behaviour.
Synopsis Introduction to Control System. Mathematical Modelling. Time Response. Stability of linear feedback system. Improve transient response and steady-state error: PID control. Root locus. Introduction to measurement and instrumentation. Static nature of performance measurement and instrumentation. Analysis of experimental data. Experimental uncertainty analysis. Signal Measurement system. References 1. Katsuhiko Ogata, 2009, Modern Control Engineering , 5th
Edition, Prentice Hall. 2. Farid Golnaraghi, Benjamin C. Kuo, 2009, Automatic
Control Systems, 9th Edition, Wiley. 3. Sudhir Gupta, Elements of Control Systems, Pearson
Education. 4. Beckwith, T.G., Marangoni, R.D., Lienhard, J.H.V., 2006,
Mechanical Measurements, 6th Edition, Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
5. Northrop, R.B., 2005, Introduction to Instrumentation and Measurements, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, U.S.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
153
149
BTMA 3714 ENGINE TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Explaining the operating characteristics concept of the
internal combustion engine 2. Explaining the function of the components in the internal
combustion engine. 3. Dismantle and assemble the major components of internal
combustion engines 4. Produce the specifications of the machine based on the
power requirements. 5. Analyzing the performance characteristics of internal
combustion engines. Synopsis This module aims to expose students to the operation of the internal combustion engine technology. The course also discusses how the service, repair, maintenance, design and test the performance of conventional internal combustion engines. In addition, students have to solve engineering problems in real time by leveraging their knowledge and learn new information to solve problems of related engines. References 1. Lechner, G. and Naunheimer, H. (2004). Automotive
Transmission. 2nd ed. Springer Verlag, Germany. 2. Erjavec, J. (2005). Automatic Transmission. 1st ed. Cengage
Learning Publisher, USA. 3. Birch, T.W. (2005). Automatic Transmission and
Transaxles. Prentice Hall. 4. Malcolm James Nunney, 2006, Light and
heavy vehicle technology, Macmillan Company, UK. 5. Anthony E. Schwaller, 2004, Total Automotive Technology,
Thomson Delmar Learning, USA.
BTMA 3723 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Identify the components of the electrical and electronics
in automotive system. 2. Explain the functions and operations of automotive
electrical and electronic system. 3. Operate electrical and electronic equipment in automotive
applications. 4. Determine the components in the electrical and electronic
automotive applications. 5. Construct of automotive electrical and electronic system.
Synopsis This course focuses on theory, operation and application of electrical and electronic automotive system. Topics covered include vehicle electrical wiring system, sensors and actuators, battery charging system, starter system, lighting system, chassis electrical system, additional system, mechatronics, automotive network and the CAN-bus system. References 1. Halderman, Juames D., 2009, Hybrid and Alternative Fuel
Vehicles, Pearson Prentice Hall 2. Bosch, R., 2008, Automotive Electrics-Automotive
Electronics : Systems and Components, 5th Edition, Stuttgart, Professional Engineering publishing.
3. Bosch, R., 2006, Bosch Automotive Handbook Bosch, 7th Edition, Bentley Publishers.
4. Hans-Hermann Braess, Ulrich Sieffert, 2005, Handbook of Automotive Engineering, SAE International.
5. Stone, Richard, 2004, Automotive Engineering Fundamentals, SAE International.
BTMA Course Core Subjects (K)
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
154
150
BTMA 3733 VEHICLE DYNAMICS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Explain the basics of vehicle handling and primary factors
that affect it. 2. Develop mathematical and physical model to predict the
dynamic response of a vehicle. 3. Employ the computer software in modeling vehicle
dynamics (Carsim, Simulink). 4. Design the vehicle components and related subsystem
that meet certain vehicle dynamics performance creteria. Synopsis To discuss an introduction to basic concepts of vehicle dynamics, general and specialized knowledge to design a theoretical model of vehicle dynamics and simulation, knowing the response based on various input drive vehicles, the environment, the burden of road and tire properties. Understand the relationship between the 'ride and handling’, steering and suspension system on the performance of a vehicle. References 1. Hibbeler R.C (2010), Engineering Mechanics – Static, 12th
edition. Si Units Pearson 2. Wong. J.Y. ( 2001) , Theory of Ground Vehicle , 3rd edition.
John Wiley & Son 3. Johnston. B. (1999) , Vector Mechanics for Engineer –
Dynamics, 3rd edition. McGraw Hill Ryerson 4. Miliken W.F. and D.L ( 1995) , Race Car Vehicle Dynamics,
Society of Automotive Engineers 5. Thomas D. Gillespie ( 1992) Fundamental of Vehicle
Dynamics, Society of Automotive Engineers.
BTMA 3743 AUTOMOTIVE HVAC Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Define the functions and basic concepts of automotive
HVAC system. 2. Practice analytical and design skills needed in designing
modern HVAC system for automotive. 3. Apply the skills to test, evaluate, repair and upgrading the
automotive HVAC system. Synopsis The objective of this course is to provide students with comprehensive knowledge in the field of automotive heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) system. Topics include: automotive heating and cooling system, basic air-conditioning system, air conditioning and control components and type of cooling agents. Apart from that, regulations set by Department of Environment (DOE) is also exposed to the students. Hands on training in servicing heating and cooling system, test and repair of cooling system and computerized control system. References
1. Donald W. Patten, John Remling, 2002. Automotive Service Basics. 4th Edition Upper Saddle River, Prentice Hall: NJ.
2. Roger W. Haines, C. Lewis Wilson, 2003. HVAC systems design handbook McGraw-Hill: New York.
3. Guy W. Gupton. 2002. HVAC controls: operation & maintenance. Fairmont Press: Lilburn, GA .
4. Boyce H. Dwiggins. 2001. Automotive heating and air conditioning. Delmar Thomson Learning: Albany,NY .
5. Bosch, R. 2005. Automotive Handbook. SAE 7th Edition. John Wiley and Sons. USA.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
155
151
BTMA 3754 VEHICLE ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Analyse the history and future trends in automotive
engines and transmission system. 2. Describe the working principle of engine and transmission
system. 3. Determine the basic principles and design of engine and
transmission system. 4. Analyse the principle of engine and transmission in
performance testing. 5. Perform the engine and transmission performance tests
using the dynamometer.
Synopsis History of vehicle engines and transmissions. Engine geometry. Performance parameters of gas exchange for 4-stroke and two stroke. Spark ignition engine combustion. The market situation for the development of vehicles, gearboxes and components. The selection of the transmission ratio of the vehicle. Basic approach to the performance of automotive engines, power conversion, adjustment of the engine and transmission, transmission system design principles. References 1. Bosch, R., 2008, Automotive Electrics-Automotive
Electronics : Systems and Components, 5th Edition, Stuttgart, Professional Engineering publishing.
2. Victor Hillier, Peter Coombes, 2005: Fundamentals of motor vehicle technology, Green Gate Publishing Service.
3. U. Kiencke, Lars Nielsen, 2005, Automotive control systems: for engine, driveline, and vehicle, Springer.
4. Farazdak Haideri, 2006, Transmission System Design, Nirali Prakashan Publishing.
5. Hüseyin Abut, John H. L. Hansen, Kazuya Takeda, 2007, Advances for in-vehicle and mobile systems, Springer Science.
BTMA 3763 POWERTRAIN MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Identify the components in the powertrain management
system. 2. Explain the functions and operations of the engine and
transmission management system. 3. Interpret the code in On-Board Diagnosis (OBD). 4. Operate equipment for testing and development of
electronic control units. 5. Design a flow chart for the engine and transmission
management system. Synopsis This course focuses on theory, operation and application of the engine and transmission management system. Topics covered include electronic fuel injection system (EFI), diesel engine management systems, electronic control unit (ECU), OBD system, electronic transmission control systems, sensors and actuators in the powertrain management system. References 1. Bosch, R., 2006, Gasoline-Engine Management : Systems
and Components, 3rd Edition, Wiley. 2. Bosch, R., 2006, Diesel-Engine Management : Systems and
Components, 4th Edition, Wiley. 3. Bosch, R., 2006, Bosch Automotive Handbook Bosch, 7th
Edition, Bentley Publishers. 4. Denton, T., 2000, Automobile Electrical & Electronic
System, 2nd Edition, Oxford : Butterworth-Heinemann. 5. Ribbens, William B. (1998), Understanding Automotive
Electronics, Warrendale (Society of Automotive Engineers International)
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
156
152
BTMA 3813 VEHICLE BRAKE SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Explaining the concept, operation, application and
maintenance of existing automotive brake system and a combination of new regenerative braking system.
2. Design the automotive brake system. 3. Analyze and improve the noise of the brake. 4. Evaluate the damage to the braking system Synopsis This subject provides an introduction of basic knowledge of hydraulic brake system comprising the existing system and a combination of regenerative braking control. This subject will assist students to understand the basic theory of operation of brakes, diagnosis, identify problems and repair procedures. This subject will also touch on the phenomenon of vibration and noise on the brakes in practice and theory and also identify ways to repair that necessary. Physical tests using the ''Dynamometer & Modal Testing'' and verification tools, ''Finite Element Simulation” will be used to increase the practical understanding of the subject. Among the topics to be enclosed are: Basic braking system and operations, maintenance of brake system, mechanical brake, hydraulic brake control, anti-lock brake system with electronic brake distribution, control of regenerative braking, brake noise and vibration issues. References 1. Bill, K. H. & Breuer, B. 2008. Brake Technology Handbook.
1st Edition. SAE International. 2. Crolla, D. A. 2009. Automotive Engineering: Powertrain,
Chassis System and Vehicle Body, 1st Edition, Elsevier, Oxford, UK.
3. Dietsche, K. H. & Klingebiel, M. 2008. BOSCH Automotive Handbook, 7th Edition, Bentley (Robert) Inc. USA.
4. Birch, T.W. 2000, Automotive Chassis Systems. Delmar Publishers. Albany, New York.
5. Gillespie. T.D. 2001. Fundamental of Vehicle Dynamics, Society of Automotive Engineer (SAE).
6. William C. Orthwein, 2004. Clutches and Brakes: Design and Selection. 2nd Edition. Marcel Dekker. Basel, New York.
BTMA 3823 VEHICLE DESIGN AND TESTING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Describe the history and future trend in vehicle engine
design. 2. Describe the process of engine design in automotive
industry. 3. Determine important parameters in the engine design. 4. Measure the performance of internal combustion engines. 5. Perform the engine performance tests using engine
dynamometer. Synopsis This course covers the design concept and testing of the internal combustion engine with the principles of design and development process in accordance with the current and future trends in the automotive industry. It covers the fundamental approach to the design and testing engines in accordance with changes in technology. References 1. Julian Happian-Smith. 2002. An Introduction to Modern
Vehicle Design. Butterworth-Heinemann. 2. John, B.H. (1998). Internal Combustion Engine
Fundamentals. McGraw-Hill Science. 3. Richard, D.A. (2009). An Introduction to Engine Testing and
Development. SAE International. 4. Martyr, A.J. and Plint, M.A. (2007). Engine Testing Theory
and Practice. Elsevier. 3rd edition. 5. Victor Hillier, Peter Coombes (2005). Fundamentals of
Motor Vehicle Technology, GreenGate Publishing Service.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
157
153
BTMA 3833 AUTOMOTIVE ERGONOMICS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Describe the characteristics and importance of ergonomics
in automotive design technology. 2. Identify relevant automotive design standards with regard
to ergonomics. 3. Design a vehicle system based on automotive design
standards with regard to ergonomics. 4. Analyze vehicle design performance related to ergonomic
aspect.
Synopsis This course provides an introduction to students about the nature and importance of ergonomics in the automotive design technology. Ergonomic aspects of the relevant international standards in automotive design also introduced. Students will be exposed to the vehicle design process especially in ergonomic aspects such as using human antopometric and the student also learn to analyze vehicle design performance related to ergonomic by using Catia V5 software. References 1. Julian Happian-Smith. 2002. An Introduction to Modern
Vehicle Design. Butterworth-Heinemann. 2. SAE Standards: Human Factors and Ergonomics. Society of
Automotive Engineers International. http://standards.sae.org/human-factors-ergonomics/standards/.
3. Vivek D. Bhise, 2011, Ergonomics in the Automotive Design Process, CRC Press
4. B. Peacock, Waldemar Karwowski, 1993, Automotive Ergonomics, CRC Press
BTMA 3883 AUTOMOTIVE PROJECT 1 Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Carry out a research project or study to resolve
engineering problem academically. 2. Work independently, manage time wisely and plan and
perform the work entrusted with a systematic and efficient method.
Synopsis Hardware uses is emphasized through case studies and outcome based approach. Students are required to plan and implement an individual project that has to do with design or engineering process. Conduct research or studies to solve the engineering problems faced by the industry in particular. Students should identify the problem by making scientific research including problem statement, objectives, literature review, provide solutions and prepare or develop equipment, tools and procedures that can lead to achievement the objectives. Students are required to provide the Automotive Project Report I to be evaluated by their supervisor.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
158
154
BTMA 4843 VEHICLE SUSPENSION SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Apply kinematics and dynamics principle to determine
suspension forces due to chassis loads and tire contact forces.
2. Solve the problems related with the effects of suspension parameters to the chassis dynamics in vertical, lateral and longitudinal directions.
3. Undertake some basic tests for determining suspension parameters in the form of force-velocity and force displacement characteristics.
4. Undertake some basic tests for determining the performance criteria in suspension design.
5. Explain the concept and the working principles of some advanced suspension systems such as active and semi-active suspension system.
Synopsis Introduction to chassis load and tire contact forces. Modelling of chassis dynamics in vertical, lateral and longitudal directions. Performance criteria in suspension design. The use of suspension test machine for investigating the suspension characteristics. Effects of suspension parameters to the chassis dynamics. Semi-active and active suspension system. References 1. John C. Dixon, 2009, Suspension Analysis and
Computational Geometry, 1st Edition, Wiley – Professional Engineering Publishing Series.
2. Emanuele Guglielmino, Tudor Sireteanu, Charles W. Stammers, Gheorghe Ghita. Marius Giuclea, 2008, Semi-Active and Active Suspension Control, 1st Edition, Springer.
3. August P. Staiforth, 1999, Design, Construction and Tuning of Car Suspension, Hayness Press.
4. Bosch, R. 2005. Automotive Handbook. SAE 7th Edition. John Wiley and Sons. USA.
BTMA 4854 VEHICLE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Identify types of vehicle power transmission, history and
future technology of the transmission. 2. Explain the basis of vehicle transmission system. 3. Explain the principle characteristics of the vehicle
transmission performance. 4. Apply the principles of general and specific design on
vehicle transmission system. 5. Conduct vehicle transmission performance test using
chassis dynamometer.
Synopsis Vehicle transmission design engineering has been enriched with many variations, such as automatic transmissions, continuously variable transmissions (CVT), the torque converter clutch transmission, dual clutch transmission, four wheel drive transmission. The purpose of this subject is to explain the development of a motor vehicle transmission as part of the development of vehicle systems. The aim is to explain the basic relationship between the drive unit, motor and transmission system and transmission system functions such as selecting the appropriate gear, the right gear, power profile, fuel consumption, life and reliability. References 1. Abut, H., Hansen, J. and Takeda, K. (2007), Advances for in-
vehicle and mobile systems, Springer Science. 2. Haideri, F. (2006), Transmmision System Design, Nirali
Prakashan Publishing. 3. Erjavec, J. (2005). Automatic Transmission. 1st ed. Cengage
Learning Publisher, USA. 4. Birch, T.W. (2005). Automatic Transmission and
Transaxles. Prentice Hall. 5. Lechner, G. and Naunheimer, H. (2004). Automotive
Transmission. 2nd ed. Springer Verlag, Germany.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
159
155
BTMA 4863 AUTOMOTIVE SAFETY & COMFORT SYSTEM Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Identify components in modern automotive systems 2. Describe function and operation of driver assisting system
and automotive comfort. 3. Arrange equipment for testing and development of
automotive and safety systems 4. Install tools for simulation in automotive and comfort
system. 5. Construct comfort system for automotive application.
Synopsis This course will focus on theory, operation and application for electrical and electronic system in modern vehicle and comfort system. Topics discussed include antilock braking system, traction control system, electronic stability program, adaptive cruise control, passenger protection system, driving assistance system, and X-by wire system. References 1. Bosch, R., 2007, Safety, Comfort and Convenience Systems,
3rd Edition, Wiley. 2. Bosch, R., 2006, Bosch Automotive Handbook Bosch, 7th
Edition, Bentley Publishers. 3. Bosch, R, 2003, ACC Adapative Cruise Control, Robert
Bosch GmbH. 4. Denton, T., 2000, Automobile Electrical & Electronic
System, 2nd Edition, Oxford : Butterworth-Heinemann. 5. Ribbens, William B. (1998), Understanding Automotive
Electronics, Warrendale (Society of Automotive Engineers International)
BTMA 4873 DESIGN AND SIMULATION VEHICLE SYSTEM Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Operate an industry standard dynamic analysis program
(ADAMS) using Graphical User Interface (GUI) and programming approach
2. Plan, model, simulate and analyze kinematic and dynamic problem for simple mechanical system as well as for vehicle sub-system
3. Explain the underlying theory and mathematical formulation used in solving multi-body systems simulation
4. Explain testing and modelling technique required to produce a full vehicle model
5. Evaluate and interpret the simulation results based on mechanical engineering knowledge.
Synopsis This module is intended to expose student in modeling, simulating and analyzing vehicle system using Multi-body System Software (MBS).It will covers general simple kinematics and dynamic problem, kinematics problem of a vehicle sub-system such as simple engine component, suspension system and anti-roll bars and also behavior of a vehicle using full vehicle model system. This module will also briefly cover the theoretical aspect in MBS modeling which is the mathematical formulation of a model and the relationship with computer modeling. Student will be introduced to the most well known of these programs; ADAMS (Automatic Dynamic Analysis of Mechanical Systems) References 1. Blundell M.V and Harty D. 2006. Multibody System
Approach to Vehicle Dynamics, Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann
2. Thomas D. Gillespie. 1992. Fundamentals of Vehicle Dynamics, Society of Automotive Engineers.
3. Wong J. Y. 2001. Theory of Ground Vehicles, 3rd Edition. John Wiley & Sons.
4. Johnston, B. 1999. Vector Mechanics for Engineer -Dynamics, 3rd Edition. McGraw-Hill Ryerson.
5. Hibbeler R C. 2002. Engineering Mechanics – Static, 2nd Edition. Pearson
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
160
156
BTMA 4893 AUTOMOTIVE PROJECT 2 Learning Outcomes After completing the course, students will be able to: 1. Conducting a research project or research to solve a
problem scientifically. 2. Work more independently, manage time wisely and plan
and perform the work entrusted to him by a systematic and efficient.
3. To train students to prepare technical reports, working papers for the work carried out investigations and then present them in a seminar arranged.
Synopsis Automotive Project 2 emphasizes the implementation of more rigorous experiments with instruments, equipment and procedures made during the Automotive Project I. It involves the processing, data collection and analysis, and lead to the survey results, graphs, charts, tables, data, decision analysis, discussion, conclusions and recommendations for further study. Students are required to provide reports Automotive Project II to be evaluated by their supervisor. Bound thesis which includes writings Automotive Projects Automotive Projects I and II should be submitted to the FTK at the end of Semester 2 in partial fulfilment of the requirements for award of the degree.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
161
157
BTMH 2713 FUNDAMENTAL OF HVAC AND REFRIGERATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Understand the basic cycle of thermal and heat transfer. 2. Explain, discuss and apply the underlying thermodynamics
principles to the field of refrigeration and air conditioning systems.
3. Differentiate and apply the vapour and absorption refrigeration systems.
4. List and discuss the relevancy of the working fluids such as refrigerants that are available in the respective industries.
Synopsis This subject deals with an introduction to the refrigeration and air conditioning system. Carnot cycle and thermodynamics properties phase diagrams such as p-h, T-s and p-v. Vapour compression and absorption refrigeration system. Working media used in the heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) system. References 1. Mcquiston. F. C. and Parker J. D. 1982. Heating Ventilation
and Air Conditioning: Analysis and Design. 2nd Ed. New York: John Wiley.
2. Yunus A.C. & Michael A.Boles. 1994. Thermodynamic An Engineering Approach. 2nd Ed. Singapore: Mc Graw Hill Inc.
3. Jones W.P. 1980. Air Conditioning Applications and Design. New York: Edward Arnold (Publisher) Ltd.
4. Jones W.P. 1985. Air Conditioning Engineering. New York: Edward Arnold (Publisher) Ltd.
5. Johnson W.M. 1997. Practical Cooling Technology. New York: Delmar Publisher USA
BTMH 3623 HEAT TRANSFER Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Explain the basic concepts of conduction, convection and
heat radiation and heat and mass transfer applications in the industry.
2. Analyze problems related to performance evaluation and design of heat and mass transfer equipment.
3. Problem solving (analytical and numerical), based on theoretical concepts such as laminar and turbulent boundary layer.
4. Combining the knowledge gained in a variety of design systems.
Synopsis The introduction of the concept and definition of heat transfer engineering, energy, work, material thermal properties, mass transfer, the laws of the theory, empirical and analytical relationships. Numerical rules. Unsteady state conduction. Numerical analysis. Heat Transfer Simulation solution. Natural convection. Forced convection in laminar and turbulent flow in the plane and pipes. Phase change heat transfer. Thermal radiation on the body and a black surface. Low rate of heat transfer. Evaporation and condensation. References 1. Holman, J.P (2001). Heat Transfer. 8th SI Edition. McGraw
Hill: Singapore. 2. Incopera, F.P. & Dewitt, D.P. (2002). Fundamental of Heat
and Mass Transfer. 4th Edition, John Wiley and Sons: Toronto.
3. Cengel, Yunus A. (2003). Heat transfer: A Practical Approach. 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill: New York.
BTMH Course Core Subjects (K)
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
162
158
BTMH 3723 BASIC COMPONENTS OF AIR CONDITIONING & REFRIGERATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Identify and distinguish the basic components of the
cooling machine and air conditioning. 2. Understand the functions and how to manage the basic
components of refrigeration and air conditioning machines.
3. Know the needs and use of accessories in the refrigeration and air conditioning systems.
Synopsis Explanations to the components in configuring refrigeration and air conditioning systems equipped as compressors, piping, condensers, valves, etc. ducts and piping systems, pumps and fans, cooling and dehumidification coil; compression control equipment; throttling valve, the condensation and evaporation. References 1. McQuiston and Parker, 1998, Heating, Ventilation and Air
Conditioning Analysis and Design, 3rd Edition, Wiley. 2. Edward G Pita, 2000, Air Conditioning Principles and
System: An Energy Approach, 4th Edition, John Wiley. 3. Jan F. Kreider and Ari Rabl, 1987, Heating and Cooling of
Buidings: Design For Efficiency, McGraw Hill. 4. ASHRAE Handbooks Volume 1,2,3 & 4.
BTMH 3733 CLASSIFICATION OF AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Recognize, distinguish types of systems and absorption
cooling system steam. 2. Apply design-systems and absorption cooling system to
suit the use of steam. 3. Understand the function and method of handling each
type of refrigeration and air conditioning systems. Synopsis Introduction to the components in configuring refrigeration and air conditioning systems equipped as compressors, piping, condensers, valves, condensation, and so on. References 1. McQuiston and Parker, 1998, Heating, Ventilation and Air
Conditioning Analysis and Design, 3rd Edition, Wiley. 2. Edward G Pita, 2000, Air Conditioning Principles and
System: An Energy Approach, 4th Edition, John Wiley. 3. Jan F. Kreider and Ari Rabl, 1987, Heating and Cooling of
Buidings: Design For Efficiency, McGraw Hill. 4. ASHRAE Handbooks Volume 1,2,3 & 4.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
163
159
BTMH 3753 HEATING & COOLING LOAD Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Using medium heat loss calculation procedure. 2. Know the nature of the material terms of the building, the
influence of air infiltration and ventilation. 3. Understanding the basic concepts and methods for
determining the cooling load, the effect of the windows, walls, roof, partition the load and internal load base types.
4. Using the method CLTD. Synopsis The burden of cooling and heating can take place using various means of conduction, convection and radiation. Other factors such as weather, the nature of the materials used and the ventilation system also plays a role in cooling and heating load calculations. References 1. ASHRAE Press, 2007, Air Conditioning System Design
Manual, 2nd Edition, Butterworth-Heinneman. 2. Jan, F.K., Peter S.C., and Ari R., 2009, Heating and Cooling
of Buildings: Design for Efficiency, 2nd Edition, CRC Press. 3. McQuiston F.C., Jerald D.P., and Jeffrey D.S., 2004,
Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Analysis & Design, 6th Edition, Wiley.
4. Howard D.G. and Esko T., 2001, Industrial Ventilation Design Handbook, 1st Edition, Academic Press.
5. Thomas E.M., 1997, HVAC Principles and Applications Manual, 1st Edition, McGraw Hill Professional.
BTMH 3763 HVAC SOFTWARE & CFD Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Understand the operations and processes that occur in
HVAC software. 2. Apply the use of several types of HVAC software. 3. Knowing the advantages and limitations in the use of
numerical simulation in the channel. 4. Identify critical evaluation method simulation results. 5. Apply a systematic approach to simulate fluid flow in the
channel system. 6. Perform the numerical simulation of fluid flows easily. Synopsis HVAC software is related to the software psychometric, sizing piping and others. Introduction to computer-aided fluid dynamics (Computational Fluid Dynamics, CFD). Law of conservation of fluid flow and boundary conditions. Finite volume methods for diffusion problems. Finite volume methods for diffusion-flow problems. Solution algorithm for pressure-velocity relationship for steady flow. Solution to discredited equation. Finite volume method for unsteady flow. The use and role of the boundary method. References 1. Peerless HVAC (C-20) Software Only, 2009. 2. Versteeg, H.K. and Malalasekera, W., 2007, An
Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics: The Finite Volume Method, 2nd Ed, Pearson Education Limited, Great Britain.
3. Anderson, J.D.A, 1995, Computational Fluid Dynamics, McGraw Hill Books Company, New York.
4. Tannehill, J., 1997, Computational Fluid Dynamics and Heat Transfer, 2nd Ed, Taylor and Francis.
5. Date, A.W., 2005, Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics, Cambridge University Press.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
164
160
BTMH 3773 TRANSPORTATION AIR-CONDITIONING & REFRIGERATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Know the concept and design of the vehicle cooling
system and coolant. 2. Identifying the specific components in the vehicle air
cooling systems. 3. Detailed explanation of the problem and repair the
vehicle cooling system Synopsis Detailed explanation of the reality of vehicle cooling systems in learning to adapt to various cooling systems. References 1. Thomas S.B., 2009, Automotive Heating & Air
Conditioning, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall. 2. John H., 2000, Haynes Automotive Heating and Air
Conditioning Systems Manual, 3rd Edition, Haynes Manuals Inc.
3. Boyce D., 2001, Automotive Air Conditioning, 8th Edition, Delmar Cengage Learning.
4. James H., 2005, Marine Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, Cornell Maritime Press.
5. John V.A., and Milton R., 1991, Auto Air Conditioning Technology, Goodheart-Wilcox Publisher.
BTMH 3813 MAINTENANCE OF HVAC SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Explaining the maintenance of the pipe system and
ventilation. 2. Describe the components and systems technology in air
movement. 3. Identify the maintenance system in cooling devices such
as cooling towers, compressors, condensation units and chillers.
4. Elaborating on the factors and the impact of air quality in heating and air conditioning systems.
5. Applying maintenance management system Synopsis Environment in the HVAC, the average temperature. Energy Economics: units, day-degrees, the thermal terms. Calculation of heat loss in district heating, heat pump, absorption, storage heaters. Ventilation and air-cooled heat is felt, mechanical ventilation. Supply of hot water and cold water. References 1. Robert C.Rosaler, 1998, HVAC Maintenance and Operation
Handbook, McGraw-Hill Professional. 2. David W. Bearg, 1993, Indoor Air Quality and HVAC
System, Lewis Publishers. 3. Guy W.Gupton, 2002, HVAC Control: Operation and
Maintenance, the Fairmont Press, Inc. 4. Samuel C.Sugarman, 2005, HVAC Fundamentals, the
Fairmont Press, Inc. 5. Samuel C.S., Samuel C.M., 1992, HVAC System:
Operations, Maintenance and Optimization, 1st Edition, Prentice Hall.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
165
161
BTMH 3823 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Identify and explain the definitions and terminology of the
airways. 2. Designing a measurement of the airway with Aspect Ratio
and Ductulator. 3. Determine the types of materials and coating materials
and the type of diffuser and grill for HVAC industry. 4. Providing SLD and layout as well as understand the
concept of CAV and VAV.
Synopsis Introduction to the definition and airway terminology, channel design, channel measurement method with Aspect Ratio and Ductulator, Diffuser selection and grilles, material and coating material for the channel HVAC industry, the preparation of Single Line Diagram (SLD) and the layout, and concept of CAV and VAV References 1. S. Don Swenson, HVAC – Heating, Ventilating, and Air
Conditioning, ATP. 2. ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook. 2001, Chapter 34,
"Duct Design." Atlanta, GA: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
3. Awbi H.B., 2000, Air Distributions in Rooms, 1st Edition, Elsevier Science.
4. Naima, 1997, A Guide To Insulated Air Duct Systems. 5. Lama, Airflow in Ducts, Lama Book.
BTMH 3883 HVAC PROJECT 1 Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Conducting a research project or research to solve a
problem scientifically. 2. Work more independently, manage time wisely, plan and
perform the work entrusted to him by a systematic and efficient.
Synopsis Students are required to plan and implement an individual project that has to do with design or engineering process. Conduct research or studies to solve the engineering problems faced by the industry in particular. Students should identify the problem by making scientific research including problem statement, objectives, literature review, and provide solutions or develop equipment and procedures that can lead to the achievement of objectives. Students are required to provide HVAC Project Report I to be evaluated by their supervisor.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
166
162
BTMH 4843 GREEN TECHNOLOGY HVAC Learning Outcomes After completing the course, students will be able to: 1. Understand and explain the concept of
"Green HVAC" applied in the current industry. 2. Describe the air quality impact of factors within a
building by adopting the concept of "Green HVAC" 3. Discuss and explain the advantages of
using "Green HVAC" to customers. 4. Identify problems that occurred in
the existing HVAC system and discuss a new method to replace the old system by applying the concept of "Green HVAC".
Synopsis "Green HVAC" means a health system for consumers as well as more favourable to consumers and reduces environmental pollution and global warming, save energy and also save long term costs. References 1. David J. And Kim M., 2004, Green Remodeling: Changing
the World One Room at A Time, New Society Publishers. 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air
Conditioning Engineers, 2006, ASHRAE Green Guide: The Design, Construction, and Operation of Sustainable Buildings, 2nd Ed, Butterworth-Heinemann.
3. HVAC Excellence and Ferris State University, 2008, Green Mechanical System, 1st Edition, Esco Press.
4. Jayamaha L., 2006, Energy Efficient Building Systems: Green Strategies for Operations and Maintenance, 1st Edition, McGraw Hill Professional.
5. ASHRAE Press, 2007, Air Conditioning System Design Manual, 2nd Edition, Butterworth-Heinneman.
BTMH 4863 APPLIED ACOUSTIC & VIBRATION FOR HVAC Learning Outcomes 1. Able to identify the nature of the acoustics in
understanding the concept of including the echo. 2. Can take into account the term noise and vibration in
the cooling and refrigeration system design. 3. Noise control principles can be applied to
technology absorption, silencers and sound barrier. 4. Analyze the data distribution of sound waves in
the cooling system and reduce the sound. Synopsis Explaining the acoustical design gives an overview of basic understanding of how noise and vibration associated with refrigeration and air conditioning systems, topics include terminology, the acoustics, design criteria, the selection of equipment /user applications. In addition, special noise problems suggested solutions. References 1. Hall, F., Greeno, R., Building Services Handbook, 5th
Edition, Butterworth-Heinemann, U.K. 2. Strakosch, G.R., Caporale, R.S., 2010, The Vertical
Transportation Handbook, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New Jersey.
3. Chadderton, D.V., 2007, Building Services Engineering, Spon Press.
4. Wood, B., 2009, Building Maintenance, Wiley-Blackwell. 5. Chanter, B., Swallow, P., 2007, Building Maintenance
Management, 2nd Edition, Wiley-Blackwell.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
167
163
BTMH 4873 ELECTRICAL & CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC Learning Outcomes After completing the course, students will be able to: 1. Designing electrical systems in the
heating ventilation and air cooling. 2. Describe the configuration of the heat pump's electrical
system. 3. Identify electrical equipment in air-cooled. 4. Can use accurate modelling, optimization methods and
software to predict the optimum operating parameters of the selected control method.
5. Able to design HVAC control systems can provide thermal comfort and air quality with energy efficiency.
Synopsis Introduction to electricity in the HVAC system. Electrical components and measurement equipment. Analysis in the heat pump circuit. Phases and complex numbers, filters, transformers. References 1. Dale R. Patrick, Stephen W. Fardo ,Electrical Distibution
System, 2nd Ed. The Fairmont Press, Inc 2. Steven J. Marrano, Craig DiLouie, The Electrical System
Design & Specification Handbook For Industrial Facilities, The Fairmont Press, Inc
3. Robert McDowall, 2008, Fundamentals of HVAC Control System, Elsevier
4. Roger W. and Douglas C., 2006, Control Systems for Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning, Birkhäuser.
5. Thomas E.K., 2007, Electricity, Electronics and Control System for HVAC, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall.
BTMH 4893 HVAC PROJECT 2 Learning Outcomes After completing the course, students will be able to: 1. Conducting a research project or research to solve a
problem scientifically. 2. Work more independently, manage time wisely and plan
and perform the work entrusted to him by a systematic and efficient.
3. To train students to prepare technical reports, working papers for the work carried out investigations and then present them in a seminar arranged.
Synopsis HVAC Project 2 emphasizes the implementation of more rigorous experiments with instruments, equipment and procedures that made the HVAC Project 1. It involves the processing, data collection and analysis, and lead to the survey results, graphs, charts, tables, data, decision analysis, discussion, conclusions and recommendations for further study. Students are required to provide HVAC 2 Project Report for review by their supervisor. Bound thesis project that includes writing HVAC Project I and II should be submitted to the FTK at the end of Semester 2 in partial fulfilment of the requirements for award of the degree.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
168
164
BTMT 2433 MACHINE TOOL TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Identify the characteristics of machining in a
variety of machining processes. 2. Calculate and determine the machining
parameters to produce the products according to specifications.
3. Build a logical sequence in producing a product. 4. Identify and maintain the tool & die by the
specifications. Synopsis Introduction to the latest technology of machine tools such as Electro Discharge Machine (EDM), Chemical Attack (CM & ECM), Laser Cutting, and Computerized Numerical Control (CNC). Application of criteria such as speed machining cut, feed rate, and other machining geometry. Machining is not only used as the main method in the process of cutting, even as a method for the production of appliances and machines. Exposure to the specifications of tool and die. References 1. Kibbe, R.R., Neely, J.E., White, W.T, & Meyer, R.O., 2010,
Machine Tool Practices, 9th Edition, Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.
2. Prakash Joshi, 2007, Machine Tools Handbook, McGraw Hill Professional
3. DeGarmo, E. P., Black, J. T. and Kohser, R. A., 2002, Materials and Processes in Manufacturing, 9th Edition, Wiley, New York.
4. Kalpakjian, S., and Schmid, S. R., 2001, Manufacturing Engineering Technology, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall International.
5. Schey, Introduction to Manufacturing Process, 1999, McGraw-Hill.
BTMT 2443 FUNDAMENTAL OF MACHINE COMPONENTS Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Identify and explain the machine components found in
industry. 2. Understand the uses and functions of the machine
components in the industry. 3. Discuss the problems that often arise in the machine
components. 4. Identify the size and shape best suited for machine
components based on the critical parameters. 5. Report and explain any problems to specific machine
components.
Synopsis An introduction to machine components and functions such as gears, bearings, clutch, valve and so on. Static and fatigue failure. Flat Belts and V shape. Clutch, brake drums and discs. Spring, chain and sprocket. Students will also be exposed to the causes of machine failure. References 4. Dym, C. L. and Little, P., 2004, Engineering Design: A
Project-Based Introduction, John Wiley, New York. 5. Haik, Y. 2003, Engineering Design Process, Thomson
Learning, New York. 6. Norton, R. L., 2002, Design of Machine Elements, Prentice
Hall, New York. 7. Shigley, J. E. and Mischke, C. R. 1994, Mechanical
Engineering Design, 6th Metric Edition McGraw-Hill, New York.
8. Bhandari, V. B., 1994, Design of Machine Elements, Tata McGraw-Hill, Calcutta.
BTMT Course Core Subjects (K)
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
169
165
BTMT 2533 BASIC CONTROL ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Differentiate between open-loop system and closed-loop
system. 2. Interprets the basic concepts and terms used in control
system: transfer function, block diagram, poles, zeros etc.
3. Utilize Laplace transform theory as well as differential equation in control system.
4. Derive a mathematical model of dynamic systems. Synopsis Introduction to control systems. Revision on complex variable and functions, Laplace transform, inverse Laplace transform. Linear, time-invariant, differential equations. Transfer function, block diagram, linearization. Mathematical modelling of dynamic systems. Transient response and steady-state response analysis: impulse response, 1st order systems, 2nd order systems, higher order systems, characteristic equation, Routh’s stability criterion, effects on integral and derivative control actions on system performance, steady-state error analysis in unity-feedback control systems. Polar plot, Nyquist stability criterion, Bode plot. Root locus analysis. References 1. Dorf, R.C., H. Bishop, R.H. 2001. Modern Control Systems,
9th Edition. Prentice Hall. 2. Ogata, K. 2002. Modern Control Engineering, 4thh Edition.
Prentice Hall. 3. Nise, N.S. 2004. Control System Engineering, 4th Edition.
John Wiley & Sons. 4. Kuo, B.C. 1995. Automatic Control Systems, 7th Edition.
John Wiley & Sons. 5. Sudhir Gupta. 2002. Elements of Control Systems. Pearson
Education, Inc.
BTMT 2553 DYNAMICS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course the students should be able to: 1. Describe clearly the concept of position; velocity and
acceleration in determine the motion of particle and rigid body.
2. Calculate the problem involving rectilinear and curvilinear motion of particle and rigid body accurately.
3. Apply appropriate principle of force and acceleration, work energy and energy, impulse and momentum in solving the particle and rigid body problems.
4. Analyze the motion of the rigid body in particular of absolute and relative velocity and acceleration methods in plane motion.
Synopsis This course introduces to the principle of dynamics based on kinematics and kinetic. Understand the concept of position, velocity and acceleration, application of Newton second law, Principle of Work and Energy, Principle of Impulse and Momentum for particle and rigid body References 1. Beer, F. P. 2004. Vector Mechanics for Engineers,
Dynamics SI Units, 7th Edition. McGraw-Hill. 2. Hibbeler, R. C. 2002. Engineering Mechanics, Dynamics,
2nd Edition. Prentice Hall. 3. Meriam, J. L. And Kraige, L. G. 2003. Engineering
Mechanics, SI Version, 5th Edition. John Wiley & Sons. 4. Little, R. S. and Inman, D. 1999. Engineering Mechanics,
Dynamics. Prentice Hall.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
170
166
BTMT 2633 PNEUMATIC AND HYDRAULIC TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Describe fundamental principles that govern the behaviour
of fluid power systems. 2. Explain the common hydraulic and pneumatic components,
their use, symbols and their applications in industry. 3. Analyze mathematical models of hydraulic and pneumatic
circuits in order to produce efficient and desired fluid power system.
4. Design, simulate and analyze various hydraulic and pneumatic systems by using related computer software.
5. Construct, operate and troubleshoot the hydraulic and pneumatic system with manual and electrical control.
Synopsis This course covers the introduction of the hydraulic and pneumatic systems, types of pump, compressor and their working principles, types of valve, actuator and their usage, performance of the fluid power system, others fluid power system ancillaries and sensors, fluid power system circuit design and analysis with manual control and electrical control, fluid power symbols, the usage of computer software to design and simulate the fluid power system circuit, the usage of programmable logic controller in fluid power system circuit design and the application of fluid power in robotic and mobile hydraulic. References 1. Ilango S. 2007. Introduction to Hydraulics and Pneumatics.
Prentice Hall-India. New Delhi. 2. Esposito A. 2003. Fluid Power with Applications .6th Ed.
Prentice Hall. New Jersey. 3. Johnson, J.L. 2002. Introduction to Fluid Power. Delmar.
New York. 4. Majumdar SR. 2002. Oil Hydarulic System Principles and
Maintenance. Tata-McGraw Hill. New York. 5. Hehn A.H. 1993. Fluid Power Handbook.Vol 1. Gulf
Publishing Company. Texas.
BTMT 2643 BASIC TRIBOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Explain the current principles of tribology and its
importance in mechanical system. 2. Interpret tribological surface roughness measurement
precisely. 3. Differentiate between friction and wear and analyze factors
which lead to wear of metallic materials. 4. Determine the minimum thickness of bearing lubrication
based on principles of lubrication. 5. Evaluate condition monitoring of machine through oil
analysis accurately. Synopsis Introduction to basics and principles of Tribology, characterization of solid surface, interaction between solid surfaces, friction and wear, lubrication regimes and lubricants, rolling element bearing, tribological components failure, lube oil condition monitoring, micro/nano-Tribology. References 1. Raymond G., Bayer G. 2004. Mechanical Wear
Fundamentals and Testing, 2nd Edition. Marcel Dekker, New York.
2. Strafford K.N., Datta P.K., Grag J.S. Surface Engineering Practice, Ellis Horltoow.
3. Suh, N. P. 1986. Tribophysics. Englewood Cliffs, NJ. Prentice-Hall.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
171
167
BTMT 2712 INTRODUCTION TO MAINTENANCE
Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Understanding the principles in planning and implementing
a maintenance work. 2. Explaining the approach used in maintenance. 3. Explaining the existing maintenance practices with current
issues in the maintenance. 4. Combining an effective and productive maintenance
practices. 5. Selecting the appropriate techniques to be applied in
certain circumstances of maintenance work. Synopsis Introduction to the principles of engineering and maintenance management, Preventive Maintenance, Total Productive Maintenance, Total Quality Control, Total Employee Involvement and system for equipment maintenance. Revolution and issues in system maintenance as well as maintenance practices.
References 1. Mobley, R.K., Higgins, L. , Wikoff, D. , 2008, Maintenance
Engineering Handbook, McGraw-Hill Professional 2. Smith, R., Mobley,R.K., 2003, Industrial Machinery Repair:
Best Maintenance Practices Pocket Guide (Plant Engineering), Butterworth-Heinemann.
3. Mobley, R. K., 2002, An Introduction to Predictive Maintenance, 2nd Edition, Butterworth- Heinemann.
4. Joel Levitt, 2002, Complete Guide to Predictive and Preventive Maintenance, Industrial Press
5. Seiichi Nakajima , Norman Bodek, 1988, Introduction to TPM: Total Productive Maintenance, Productivity Press.
BTMT 3723 MAINTENANCE TECHNOLOGY & ASSET MANAGEMENT Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Understand the method and strategy for maintenance and
asset management. 2. Understand the quantitative analysis methods in economy,
risks and reliability data. 3. Explain the maintenance best practices. 4. Formulate the methods for accident prevention, fire
protection and lost control. 5. Apply maintenance software in maintenance management
system. Synopsis Students will be introduced to the maintenance strategy, calculating the life of each unit machine and instrument. Identifying maintenance workshop and scheduling, maintenance organisation, effective use of maintenance resources, maintenance system, maintenance best practices, engineering economy such as weibull and pareto analysis, cost estimation, asset replacement analysis, risk analysis and control, application of reliability data, accident prevention, fire protection and cost control. References 1. Terry Wireman, Benchmarking Best Practices in
Management Maintenance, Industrial Press, 2010. 2. John D. Campbell, Andrew K.S. Jardine, Joel McGlynn, Asset
Management Excellence: Optimizing Equipment Life-Cycle Decisions, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, 2010.
3. Nicholas Anthony John Hastings, Physical Asset Management, Springer, 2009.
4. John S. Mitchell, John E. Hickman, J.E. Amadi-Echendu and H. Paul Barringer, Physical Asset Management Handbook, 2006.
5. Terry Wireman, Developing Performance Indicators for Managing Maintenance, 2nd Edition, Industrial Press Inc., 2005.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
172
168
BTMT 3733 CONDITION BASED MAINTENANCE Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Understand and describe the condition based maintenance
(CBM) philosophy and methods. 2. Clarify the CBM methods to monitor and identify
engineering problems. 3. Outline the analysis techniques by using vibration, thermal,
lubricant and corrosion monitoring methods. 4. Analyse and diagnose the abnormality from the collected
CBM data. Synopsis Introduction of CBM and maintenance management, vibration monitoring method and fault detection, lubricant condition monitoring and fault detection, thermal monitoring condition, CBM in electrical machines, corrosion monitoring and non-destructive test (NDT) and non-destructive evaluation (NDE). References 1. Robert Bond Randall, Vibration-based Condition
Monitoring: Industrial, Aerospace and Automotive Applications, John Wiley and Sons, ISBN 978-0-470-74785-8, 2011.
2. R. Keith Mobley, Lindley R. Higgins, Darrin J. Wikoff, Maintenance Engineering Handbook, McGraw Hill, ISBN 978-0-071-54646-1, 2008.
3. Yardley, E.D., Condition Monitoring-Engineering the Practices, The Institution of Mechanical Engineer, ISBN 1-86058-361-X, 2002.
4. Alan Davies, Handbook of Condition Monitoring: Techniques and Methodology, Chapman and Hall, ISBN 0-412-61320-4, 1998.
5. Rao, B.K.N., Handbook of Condition Monitoring, Elsevier Science, ISBN 1-85617-234-1, 1996.
BTMT 3743 VIBRATION ANALYSIS AND MONITORING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Understand and describe the machinery vibration
monitoring methods and purposes. 2. Apply the frequency spectral analysis and other signal
processing methods to predict the machinery health condition.
3. Apply the computerised method of vibration monitoring for condition monitoring and fault diagnosis.
4. Outline the method of signal processing and identify machinery faults.
Synopsis Principle of vibration analysis, principle of vibration measurement and instrumentation, signal processing (sampling rate, filtering, time domain and frequency domain, power spectral density etc.) model testing, vibration based condition monitoring on gear, shaft, bearing and motor. References 1. Robert Bond Randall, Vibration-based Condition
Monitoring: Industrial, Aerospace and Automotive Applications, John Wiley and Sons, ISBN 978-0-470-74785-8, 2011.
2. Allan G. Piersol, Thomas L. Paez, Cyril M. Harris, Harris’ Shock and Vibration Handbook, McGraw Hill Professional, ISBN 978-0-071-50819-3, 2009.
3. Clarence W. De Silva, Vibration Monitoring, Testing and Instrumentation, CRC Press/Taylor & Francis, ISBN 978-1-420-05319-7, 2007.
4. Kenneth G. McConnel, Vibration Testing: Theory and Practice, John Wiley and Sons, ISBN 0-471-30435-2, 1995.
5. Victor Wowk, Machinery Vibration - Measurement and Analysis, McGraw Hill, ISBN 0-07-071936-5, 1991
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
173
169
BTMT 3813 TRANMISSION TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Explain the basic component in transmission system. 2. Understand the function of transmission system. 3. Combined the quality and cost factor in designing
transmission system. 4. Apply proper method in analyzing transmission system
maintenance. Synopsis Introduction to gear drive: arrangement and tooth forms. Gearbox rating. Bearings and seals. Lubrication systems. Materials and heat treatments. Gear quality. Effect of quantity on cost. Planetary gear arrangement analysis. Gearbox installation. Gear unit operation: testing, start-up, condition monitoring. Maintenance analysis: scheduled maintenance References 1. Jack Erjavec, Today’s Technician: Manual Transmissions and
Transaxles, 5th Edition, Delmar Cengage Learning, 2010. 2. Lynwander, Gear Drive System: Design and Application,
BBS, 2009. 3. Thomas S. Birch and Chuck Rockwood, Automatic
Transmissions & Transaxles,4t.h Edition, Prentice Hall, 2009. 4. Illes Dudas, The Theory and Practice of Worm Gear Drives,
Butterworth-Heinemann, 2004. 5. Robert L. Mott, Machine Elements in Mechanical Design,
4th. Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
BTMT 3823 MAINTENANCE DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Explain and understand the principles and techniques of
machine diagnostics. 2. Apply and understand the methods of monitoring and
diagnostics data processing. 3. Using the methods of data analysis and diagnostics for
maintenance. 4. Report a result of diagnostics and troubleshooting and
suggest for improvement. Synopsis Students will be exposed to basic diagnostics techniques and methods used in identifying the failure of the machinery system. Fault tree analysis method is important for the purpose of monitoring data for maintenance of a machine system as well. This course will also discuss the diagnostics data processing and distribution of statistical diagnostics for smooth management of maintenance work. References 1. Fatih Camci, Process Monitoring, Diagnostics and
Prognostics in Machining Process: Condition Based Maintenance: Manage Failures by Monitoring, Detecting Lap, Lambert Academic Publishing, 2010.
2. J.H. Williams, A. Davies, P.R. Drake, Condition Based Maintenance and Machine Diagnostics, Springer, 2009.
3. Keith Mobly, Maintenance Engineering Handbook, McGraw Hill, 2008.
4. Geoff Klempner and Isidor Kerszenbaum, Handbook of Large Turbo Generator Operation and Maintenance, IEEE Press Series on Power Engineering, 2008.
5. D.C. Palmer, Maintenance Planning and Scheduling Handbook, McGraw Hill, 2005.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
174
170
BTMT 3833 INDUSTRIAL MOTOR Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Define basic principles that affected motor behaviour and
component of controller circuit. 2. Describe commonly use motor and driver components: its
functions, symbol and application in industry. 3. Apply motor controller and its components to observe how
the system work and its application in industry. 4. Analyse various motor controller system and its
relationship with other motor basic components. 5. Identify major factor in motor failure.
Synopsis This course mainly focuses on introduction of motor types. Symbols and schematic diagrams. Solid state relays. Rectifiers. SCR drivers. Variable frequency drivers with input and output to programmable controllers. Component side and its work principles. Pressure sensor. Limit switches. Temperature sensing devices. References 1. Jonathan Wood, The British Motor Industry, Shire, 2010. 2. Stephen L. Herman, Industrial Motor Control, Delmar
Cencage Learning, 2009. 3. Jay F. Hopper, Introduction to Industrial Motor Control,
Caroline Academic Press, 2009. 4. Riazollah Firoozian, Servo Motor and Industrial Control,
Springer US, 2009. 5. Rex Miller, Industrial Electricity and Motor Controls,
McGraw Hill, 2007.
BTMT 3843 MECHANICAL MACHINE MAINTENANCE Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. List and apply the machine maintenance techniques. 2. Conduct alignment and rotational balancing. 3. Disassemble, check, repair and reassemble mechanical
component. 4. Do preventive maintenance for mechanical machine. Synopsis The student will be exposed to the maintenance techniques, troubleshooting and fault diagnosis for mechanical equipment. Among the basic maintenance methods are: condition based monitoring, vibration analysis, alignment dynamic balancing and mechanical seals. Students also will be learned about troubleshooting and maintenance of various machines and components such as valve, pump, compressor, gear and turbine. The essential steps of disassemble, check, troubleshoot, repair and reassemble of mechanical components will be stressed in this course. All the works done will be written in the given report format. Some of the project or practical work will be done in group. High assessment mark will be given to assignment that implemented by following the procedure and completed in a period of time. References 1. Joel Levitt, TPM Reloaded: Total Productive Maintenance,
1st Edition, Industrial Press, 2010. 2. Larry Chastain, Industrial Mechanics and Maintenance, 3rd
Edition, Prentice Hall, 2008. 3. Richard R. Knotek, Mechanical Principles and Systems for
Industrial Maintenance, Prentice Hall, 2005. 4. R. Keith Mobley, Maintenance Fundamentals, 2nd Edition,
Butterworth-Heinemann, 2004. 5. Daniel E. Whitney, Mechanical Assemblies: Their Design,
Manufacture and Role in Product Development, Oxford University Press, 2004.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
175
171
BTMT 3863 INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, students should be able to: 1. Clarify the importance of calibration in order to get the
precise data. 2. Identify instruments need for scheduled calibration. 3. Show on how sensor and general calibrator functioned. 4. Perform industrial equipment calibration based on
acceptable standard. Synopsis Basically focuses on introduction to calibration whereby students are exposed to the importance of gathering precise and consistent data from test equipment. Students are also will be taught on how to maintain high quality calibration system. References 1. Icon Group, Self Calibration, Icon Group International,
2010. 2. Anthony J. Wheeler & Ahmad R. Ganji, Introduction to
Engineering Experimentation, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2009.
3. Jay L. Butcher, The Quality Calibration Handbook: Developing and Managing a Calibration Program, 1st Edition, ASQ Quality Press, 2006.
4. Mike Cable, Calibration: A Technician’s Guide, ISA: The Instrumentation, Systems and Automation Society, 2005.
5. Tormod Naes, User Friendly Guide to Multivariable Calibration and Classification, NIR Publication, 2002.
BTMT 3873 PLANT INSPECTION Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Explain and solve problems by systematically using tools
and appropriate technique related to plant inspection issues.
2. Apply and use appropriate inspections methos and techniques as well as analysis for the identified problem in related industries.
3. Using procedures or specific standards of inspections and compliance with government laws relating to factory inspection.
4. Report a problem identified from the inspection and suggest for improvements.
Synopsis Students will be exposed to basic plant facilities, equipment and plant operations as well as various methods of plant inspection and essential practical skills necessary to ensure smooth operation of a plant. Through this subject, students will acquire information and the latest methods of inspection related to the power plant, heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems, water sources and disposal requirements, mechanical power transmission, instrument and automatic control, pollution and waste control . References 1. Kevin Ruelle, Rick Kaletsky, OSHA Inspections: Preparation
and Response, 10th Printing, National Safety Council, 2006. 2. Clifford Matthews, Handbook of Mechanical In-Service
Inspection: Pressure Systems and Mechanical Plant, Wiley, 2004.
3. Ricky Smith & R. Keith Mobley, Industrial Machinery Repair: Best Maintenance Practices Pocket Guide (Plant Engineering) 1st Edition, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2003.
4. Robert Rosaler, Standard Handbook of Plant Engineering, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill Professional, 2002.
5. Britta Stengl & Reinhard Ematinger, SAP R/3 Plant Maintenance, Addison-Wesley Professional, 2001.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
176
172
BTMT 3883 MAINTENANCE PROJECT 1 Learning Outcomes Upon completion of this subject, the student should be able to: 1. Analyze types of maintenance problem. 2. Distinguish suitable maintenance methods that related to
maintenance issues. 3. Perform and solve maintenance issues with the aid of
available equipments. 4. Apply the knowledge of sciences, mathematics and
engineering in solving problems occurred from the project. 5. Suggest the cost saving of maintenance. 6. Complete the maintenance project progress report. Synopsis Students need to plan and implement the project individually related to the maintenance engineering field. The students should implement a project or study to solve the maintenance problems especially related with industrial machines or equipments. At the end, students should write a problem based learning report that covers problem statement, literature review and methodology to overcome the problem. The students need to achieve the objectives of the project and presented it in report.
BTMT 4763 RELIABILITY, MAINTAINABILITY AND RISK Learning Outcomes After completing the course, students will be able to: 1. Collect valuable data on reliability, maintainability and risk
engine. 2. Applying statistical methods used for failure analysis and
component reliability. 3. Demonstrate methods of maintainability analysis.
Synopsis Component failure statistics, decision analysis (Pareto analysis and trend analysis), analysis and access the component reliability (Weibull distribution and analysis, graphics), maintainability analysis, Fault Tree Analysis and Event Tree, design of security systems. References 1. Gulati, R, and Smith, R., 2009, Maintenance and Reliability
best practices, Industrial Press Inc 2. Stephen J, 2005, Improving maintenance and reliability
through culture change, Industrial Press Inc. 3. Narayan, V., 2004, Effective Maintenance Management:
Risk and reliability strategies for optimizing performance,Industrial Press Inc.
4. David John Smith, 2001, Reliability, Maintainability and Risk: Practical Methods for Engineer, Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann.
5. Dhillon B.S., 1999, Engineering Maintainability: How to Design for Reliability and Easy Maintenance, Gulf Publishing Company, ISBN 0-88415-257-X.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
177
173
BTMT 4773 BUILDING MAINTENANCE Learning Outcomes After completing the course, students will be able to: 1. Describe the system and the quality of electric power
supply to the building and the protection required. 2. Describing the carrier system and technology, HVAC,
water supply, fire protection and sewage. 3. Identification of national standards related. 4. Do building maintenance effectively.
Synopsis Basically in buildings: thermal comfort, the average temperature of the radiation, the index of the cold. Energy Economics: units, degree days, thermal conductivity. Calculation of heat loss: the thermal resistance, conductivity terms, polietana. Heating: district heating, heat pump, absorption, storage heaters. Ventilation and air cooling: thermal taste, mechanical ventilation. Water supply, hot and cold water: ball valve, zeolite, the secondary circulation. Sewage systems: close, sanitary equipment, ventilation flue. Irrigation: underground storage tanks, load flow, the flow holes, the pipe material. Underground irrigation: vapour barriers, vapour pressure, psychometric chart. Condensation in Buildings. Lighting: luminary, colour temperature, the fluorescent lights. Gas: gas pipelines, manometer, gas meter. Electrical installation: the excess flow device, distribution box, circuit loop. Room acoustics: sound pressure level, sound power level, the absorption coefficient. Fire Protection: Hydrant dry, smoke detectors. Service area and the plant: electricity sub-stations, mechanical aerators. References 1. Brian Wood, 2009, Building Maintenance, Wiley-Blackwell 2. Ryan Cuzan, 2009, Manager’s guide to building preventive
maintenance, CRC press. 3. Chanter B., and Swallow,P., 2007, Building Maintenance
management, Blackwell 4. Bernard L, and Richard P., 2007, Facilities Manager
maintenance handbook, McGraw Hill Book. 5. Liska, R.W., and Morrison, J., 2001, Building Maintenance:
Forms, Checklists and Procedures, Prentice Hall
BTMT 4783 OIL AND WEAR DEBRIS ANALYSIS Learning Outcomes After completing the course, students will be able to: 1. Collecting data in the form of particle content in
the lubricating oil in machinery components such as gears and bearings.
2. Determining the failure of machinery components through data analysis and oil debris analysis.
3. Determining the causes of increasing content of any dirt or debris in a lubricant
4. Determine the remaining time (onset of failure) life expectancy through the analysis engine oil components.
5. Propose actions to be taken against the machine components in a timely manner.
Synopsis Analysis of oil in terms of density, oil pollution, temperature, viscosity, and changes during the machine operation. Collecting samples at rates of regular oil. See the shape, number, and colour, surface debris resulting from the bearing or gear to fix the machine. Determine the onset of failure and make the maintenance of machinery components that are appropriate. References 1. Camci, F., 2010, Process Monitoring, Diagnostics and
Prognostics in Machining Processes: Condition Based Maintenance : Manage Failures by Monitoring, detecting. LAP Lambert Academic Publishing
2. Hunt, M.T., Evant, John S., 2008, Oil Analysis Handbook, Cooxmoor Publishing Company
3. Bartz, W. J.; Batchelor, A.W. ,2000, Engineering Tribology, 2nd Edition, Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann
4. Roylance, B.J.; Hunt, M. T., 1999, Wear Debris Analysis: Machine & Systems Condition Monitoring Series, Coxmoor publishing company.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
178
174
BTMT 4852 MAINTENANCE AWARENESS IN DESIGN Learning Outcomes After completing the course, students will be able to: 1. Identify factors that can increase the maintainability and
reliability. 2. Applying aspects of maintainability and reliability in the
design of an equipment or tools. 3. Measure of maintainability and reliability and can suggest
improvements. Synopsis Parameters that can be used when designing the MTTR, MTBF, MWT, learn from failure-feedback information to the machine design, FMEA, QFD, the house of quality, analysis of serial and parallel system, Redundancy concept, multiple criteria and resource allocation. References 1. Stephen J, 2005, Improving maintenance and reliability
through culture change, Industrial Press Inc 2. David John Smith, 2001, Reliability, Maintainability and
Risk: Practical Methods for Engineer, Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann
3. John Moubray, 1997, Reliability-Centered Maintenance, Industrial Press Company, ISBN 0831131-462.
4. Mohamed Modarres, 1999, Reliability Engineering and Risk Analysis: A Practical Guide, Marcel Dekker, ISBN 0-8247-2000-8.
5. Dhillon B.S., 1999, Engineering Maintainability: How to Design for Reliability and Easy Maintenance, Gulf Publishing Company, ISBN 0-88415-257-X.
6. Hunt, M. T.,1992, Handbook Of Wear Debris Analysis And Particle Detection In Liquids, Elsevier Science Publisher.
BTMT 4893 MAINTENANCE PROJECT 2 Learning Outcomes After completing the course, students will be able to: 1. Conducting a research project or research to solve a
problem scientifically. 2. Work more independently, manage time wisely and plan
and perform the work entrusted to him by a systematic and efficient.
3. To train students to prepare technical reports, working papers for the work carried out investigations and then present them in a seminar arranged.
Synopsis Maintenance Project 2 emphasizes the implementation of more rigorous experiments with instruments, equipment and procedures that made the Maintenance Project 2. It involves the processing, data collection and analysis, and lead to the survey results, graphs, charts, tables, data, decision analysis, discussion, conclusions and recommendations for further study. Students are required to provide Maintenance Project 2 Report for review by their supervisor. Bound thesis project that includes writing Maintenance Project 1 and 2 should be submitted to the FTK at the end of Semester 2 in partial fulfilment of the requirements for award of the degree.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
179
175
BTMU 4936 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Acquire on-job training or in-plant training in a working
environment relevant to the field of mechanical engineering.
2. Develop appropriate soft skills and professional engineering environment exposure throughout the duration of industrial training.
3. Apply all knowledge in order to solve common industrial problems as an individual and as a leader in a group or a member of a team.
4. Practice the ethics of social, environmental and cultural responsibilities appropriately during industrial training.
Synopsis Students in their 6th semester are required to undergo industrial training for a minimum of 20 weeks at the designated organisation. During the industrial training, students are given continuous supervision by an industrial supervisor as well as supervisor appointed by the faculty. Daily activities throughout the industrial training must be recorded in a log book provided by the faculty, which will be evaluated by the supervisors. Six credit-hours are given for this industrial training. Students must show satisfactory attendance and discipline in order to pass this course. The faculty’ supervisor will visit the students every five week during their training period.
BTMU 4946 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING REPORT Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Acquire on-job training or in-plant training in a working
environment relevant to the field of mechanical engineering.
2. Develop appropriate soft skills and professional engineering environment exposure throughout the duration of industrial training.
3. Apply all knowledge in order to solve common industrial problems as an individual and as a leader in a group or a member of a team.
4. Practice the ethics of social, environmental and cultural responsibilities appropriately during industrial training.
Synopsis During the training the student is required to prepare a progress report for every five weeks for evaluation purposes. The report should indicate all training and experience gathered from the industry, by following the format outlined by UTeM. These reports will be evaluated and will be graded. During the training student has to record all activities that being done every days in the provided log book. The log book also will be evaluated and will be graded.
BTMx Course Core Subjects (K)
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
180
176
BTPM 1113 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Find the multivariable function together with its domain
and range 2. Use the techniques of integration to calculate the area and
the volume of the region 3. Apply the integrals of the function with double and triple
integral by using various techniques 4. Apply the knowledge of vector-valued function in physical
and engineering fields
Synopsis This course consists of three chapters: Functions of Several Variables, Multiple Integrals and Vector-valued Functions. The syllabus is developed by introducing the concepts of the functions with several variables, integration and also vector-valued function, followed by learning various techniques in solving the problems and its application in physical and engineering fields.
References 1. Finney R.L., Weir M.D. and Giordano F.R. (2001) Thomas's
Calculus,10th Edition, Pearson 2. Anton H. (1992) Calculus, 8th Edition, John Wiley. 3. Smith R.T. and Minton R.B., (2002) Multivariable Calculus,
McGraw-Hill. 4. Stroud K.A. (2001) Engineering Mathematics, 5th Edition,
Palgrave Macmillan 5. Steward J. (2001) Calculus-Concepts and Contexts,
Brooks/Cole, 2nd Edition
BTPU 1123 ENGINEERING STATICS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Describe the basic principles of engineering statics. 2. Calculate the forces, torsion, and bending. 3. Apply the principles of statics in manufacturing
engineering. 4. Demonstrate the principles of statics through laboratory
experiments. Synopsis The subject of statics deals with forces acting on rigid bodies at rest, covering coplanar and non-coplanar forces concurrent and non-concurrent forces, friction forces, hydrostatics forces, centroid and moments of inertia, resultant forces for a variety of force systems, as well as analyzing forces acting on bodies to find the reacting forces supporting those bodies. References 1. Hibbeler, R.C. (2009) Statics and Mechanics of Materials, SI
Edition, Prentice Hall, New Jersey. 2. Morrow, H.W. and Kokernak, R.P. (2007), Statics and
Strength of Materials, 6th Edition, Prentice Hall, New Jersey. 3. Cheng, F.H. (1997) Statics and Strength of materials, 2nd
Edition, McGraw Hill, New York. 4. Gere, J.M. (2006) Mechanics of Materials, 6th Edition,
Thomson Canada Limited, Canada
SUBJECT DETAILS FOR JTKP PROGRAMMES
University Compulsory Subjects (W)
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
181
177
BTPU 1114 ENGINEERING DRAWINGS & CAD Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic graphic principles in generating an
engineering drawing. 2. Generate free sketching 3. Construct engineering drawing in CAD software 4. Create clear and legible sketches to represent roughly the
idea or object in mind. Synopsis The purpose of this course is to provide students with an understanding of the importance of engineering graphic communication to the design process and interpreting the engineering drawings. Student will gain hands-on experience creating freehand technical sketches, CAD technical drawings using orthographic projections, sections auxiliary views and isometric drawings. Emphasis is placed on creating drawings that are neat, correctly dimensioned using industry standards. Students will use freehand sketches methods and CAD software to develop visualization skills and create the engineering drawings. This course consists of lecture and practical session. A major part of the course consists of performing structured laboratory exercises. Classroom activities will complement and support the lab exercises with explanations and demonstrations of required activities. References 1. Giesecke, M., Spencer, H. & Dygdon, N. (2008) Technical
Drawing, 13th Edition, Prentice Hall. 2. Riley, D. (2006) Discovering AutoCAD 2006, Pentice Hall. 3. McAdam, D. & Winn, R. (2003) Engineering Graphics, 2nd
Edition, Pearson Education Canada Inc. 4. Marjom, Z. & Attan, H. (2008) Engineering Graphics &
CADD, for Engineering Students, FKP, UTeM.
BTPU 1133 MANUFACTURING PRACTICE Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Describe and demonstrate proper use of basic engineering
equipments and requirement. 2. Produce product based on technical drawing. 3. Fabricate products that meet specific tolerance.
Synopsis The practice consists of introduction to basic knowledge of using manual hand tools, cutting tools, machine tools, welding, fabrication, fitting, casting and milling. This course introduces common equipments for performing manufacturing works, such as: Lathe and milling machine, arc welding, TIG/MIG welding, sheet metal forming, basic foundry, etc. References 1. Kalpakjian, S. and Schmid R. (2006), Manufacturing
Engineering and Technology, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall. 2. Amstead, B.H. (1997) Manufacturing Processes, 3rd Edition,
John Wiley & Son. 3. Mikell, P. G. (1996) Fundamental of Modern
Manufacturing, Prentice Hall International Edition. 4. Kibbe, R., Meyer, R.O., Needy, J.E., and White, W.T. (1995)
Machine Tools Practice, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
182
178
BTPM 1213 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Solve second order linear differential equations with
constant coefficients by using Undetermined Coefficient and Variation of Parameters methods.
2. Solve linear differential equations with constant coefficients by using Laplace Transform method
3. Find the Fourier series of a periodic function and solving partial differential equations using the separation of variable method.
4. Apply the knowledge of ordinary and partial differential in solving engineering problems.
Synopsis This subject consists of five chapters: Introduction of ordinary and partial differential equations, second order linear differential equation with constant coefficients, Laplace Transform, Fourier series and Partial Differential Equations. The syllabuses are developed based on these three different stages which are exposing the students to fundamental concept of differential equation, various techniques to solve different type of differential equation and also various solving techniques in the engineering problems. References 1. Dennis G. Zill & Micheal R. Cullen (2005) Differential
Equations with Boundary-Value Problems, 6th Edition. Thomson Learning, Inc.
2. R. Kent Nagle, Edward B. Saff & Arthur David Snider (2008) Fundamentals of Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems, 5th Edition. Pearson Education Inc.
3. C. Henry Edwards & David E. Penney (2008) Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems, 4th Edition. Pearson Education Inc.
4. Werner Kohler & Lee Johnson (2004) Elementary Differential Equations with Boundary Value Problems, Pearson Education Inc.
BTPU 1213 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Describe the basic principles of strength of materials. 2. Calculate the shear, stress and strain. 3. Apply the principles of strength of materials in
manufacturing engineering. 4. Demonstrate the principles of strength of materials
through laboratory experiments. Synopsis The subjects contains topics of introduction, Stress, Strain, Hooke’s Law, Bending, Mechanical Properties, Transformation of stress, Axial Load, Transformation of Strain Torsion, Beam Bending, Transverse Shear, Combined Loadings, Deflection of Beams and Shafts and Mohr’s Circle. References 1. Hibbeler, R.C. (2009) Statics and Mechanics of Materials, SI
Edition, Prentice Hall, New Jersey. 2. Morrow, H.W. and Kokernak, R.P. (2007), Statics and
Strength of Materials, 6th Edition, Prentice Hall, New Jersey. 3. Gere, J.M. (2006) Mechanics of Materials, 6th Edition,
Thomson Canada Limited, Canada
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
183
179
BTEG 1213 PRINCIPLE OF ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the principle of electrical and electronics, the
theoretical and application methods of electrical circuit analysis.
2. Analyze various types of currents and voltages 3. Design, simulate and analyze using various types of simple
analog and digital circuits 4. Measure the outcome of various types of circuits through
lab sessions 5. Study and work either individually or in groups through
assignments and presentations Synopsis This subject will discuss electric and electronic principles; electric charge, electric force, Coulomb’s Law, Ohm’s Law, Lenz’s Law, transformer, capacitor, electrical power and energy, direct current generation, Alternating current generation and charge movement in solid, conductor, isolator and semiconductor. References 1. Thomas L. Floyd (2003) Principles of Electric Circuits, 7th
Edition, Prentice Hall. 2. Edward Hughes (2002) Electric and Electronic Technology,
Prentice Hall. 3. H. Robbins and W.C. Miller (2004) Circuit Analysis: Theory
and Practice, 3rd Ed, Thomson Delmar.
BTIG 1213 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain and convert problems into appropriate solutions. 2. Solve problems by using software engineering principles. 3. Produce program codes that applies suitable programming
structure. Synopsis In this course, students will be exposed to the basic principles of computer and software development methodology. The course also includes basic principles of programming such as syntax, semantic, compiling, and linking. Students will also learn programming techniques using C++ such as data type, operator, selection, repetition, function, array, file, and pointer. References 1. Malik, D. S. (2004) C++ Programming: From Problem
Analysis to Program Design, Thomson Online Technology. 2. Diane Zak (2008) An Introduction to Programming with C++,
5th Edition 3. John R.Hubbard (2007) Programming with C++”, McGraw
Hill. 4. D’ Orazio, T.B. (2004) Programming in C++: Lessons and
Application, McGraw Hill.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
184
180
BTPU 1223 MANUFACTURING PROCESSES Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Identify characteristics and capabilities of various
manufacturing processes. 2. Explain the fundamental concepts of manufacturing
processes. 3. Differentiate the ability of various manufacturing
processes. 4. Construct various skills of manufacturing techniques as an
individual or a group. 5. Produce products using related equipment and machinery. Synopsis In this module, students will be introduced to various manufacturing processes that can be categorized into three major focus areas; metal removal processes, near-net shape and forming processes and joining processes. For the metal removal processes, the students will be exposed to turning, milling and abrasive machining. In the area of near-net shape and forming processes, wide range of processes will be introduced such as casting, rolling, forming, forging and extrusion. In addition to that near-net-shape processes for plastic, ceramic and metal powder will also be covered. And finally, the joining processes will familiarize the students to fusion and solid state welding. References 1. Kalpakjian, S. and Schmid, R. (2006) Manufacturing
Engineering and Technology, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall. 2. Timing, R. and Tooley, M. (2001) Basic Manufacturing, 2nd
edition, Newnes. 3. Rao, P.N. (2000) Manufacturing Technology – Metal Cutting
and Machine Tool, Mc Graw Hill. 4. Schey, J.A. (2000) Introduction to Manufacturing Processes,
3rd edition, Mc Graw Hill.
BTPM 2113 STATISTICS AND PROBABILITIES Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Find probability by using probability concept and
probability distributions 2. Solve inferential statistics problem by using estimation and
hypothesis testing concept 3. Produce the linear relationship between two variables and
measure the strength of the linear relationship 4. Solve statistics problem using statistical software 5. Relate statistics to information technology
Synopsis Students are exposed to the concept of probability and inferential statistics. The course starts with Probability followed by Discrete Random Variables, Continuous Random Variables and Sampling Distribution. Main topics for Inferential statististics will start with Estimation. This will be followed by Hypothesis Testing, Estimation and Hypothesis Testing: Two Populations, Anova, Simple Linear Regression and Correlation. Besides that, this course will give some exposure to statistical software. Statistical software is used as a tool to obtain better accuracy for related problems. References 1. Sh. Sara, Hanissah, Fauziah, Nortazi, Farah Shahnaz (2008)
Introduction to Statistics & Probability A Study Guide, Pearson Prentice Hall
2. Douglas C. Montgomery, George C.Runger (2002) Applied Statistics and Probability for Engineers, 3rd Edition, John Wiley
3. Richard A. Johnson (2005) Probability and Statistics for Engineers, 7th Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall
4. Jay L. Devore (2000) Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences, 6th Edition, Thomson – Duxbury
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
185
181
BTPU 2133 ENGINEERING MATERIALS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic concept of Engineering Materials in term
of interatomic bonding and crystal structure. 2. Classify engineering materials based on its properties and
structure. 3. Demonstrate appropriate test to determine mechanical
properties of engineering materials according to the ASTM standard.
4. Apply the basic understanding of engineering materials properties to determine appropriate processing method.
Synopsis This course introduces basic concepts of engineering materials that covers introduction to engineering materials, interatomic bonding, crystalline structure and imperfections in solid. Explanation on different type of engineering materials (i.e. metal, polymer, ceramic, composite and semiconductor), its mechanical properties, basic application and processing are also included. Introduction to the binary phase diagrams (composition and microstructure correlation) is also given. References 1. Callister, W.D. Jr. (2006) Materials Science and Engineering
- An Introduction, 5th Edition. John Wiley & Sons Inc. 2. Smith, W.F. (1996) Principle of Materials Science &
Engineering, 3rd Edition, Mc. Graw Hill. 3. Shackelford, J.F. (2000) Materials Science and Engineering -
An Introduction, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall. 4. Bolton, W. (2001) Engineering Materials Technology, 3rd
Edition, BH Publisher. 5. Vernon, J. (2001) Introduction to Engineering Materials, 4th
Edition, Palgrave MacMilan.
BTPU 2144 PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Describe the principles of product design and development. 2. Analyze problems and synthesis solutions in design process. 3. Design the product through the principles of product
design and development. 4. Demonstrate ability to develop prototype. Synopsis This course blends the perspectives of marketing, design and manufacturing into a single approach to product development. This subject provides the students with real industrial practices and essential roles played by various members of product development teams. Throughout this subject, various attempts are used to strike a balance between theory and practical. References 1. Ulrich, K.T. & Eppinger, S.D. (2008) Product Design and
Development, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill Irwin. 2. Chitale, A.K. & Gupta, R.C. (2006) Product Design and
Manufacture, 3rd Prentice Hall, New Delhi, India. 3. Kalpakjian, S. & Schmid, S.R. (2001), Manufacturing
Engineering & Technology, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
186
182
BTPU 2123 MECHANICS OF MACHINES Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the concept of kinetics and kinematics motion of a
particle. 2. Apply the basic principles of mechanics of rigid body on
machines and its mechanism. 3. Solve problems related to rigid body in motion using
Newton’s Second and Third Law methods. 4. Analyze the mechanics of machines elements and measure
its performance. Synopsis This course consists of two parts namely Dynamics and Mechanics of Machines. Topics covered in Dynamics are kinematics of particles, kinetics of particles, kinematics of rigid bodies and kinetics of rigid bodies. Mechanics of Machines consists of power transmission system which includes belt drive, gear drive, dynamic balancing, governor, gyroscope and vibrations. References 1. Hibbeler, R. C. (2007) Engineering Mechanics Dynamics,
11th Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., Singapore. 2. Roslan A. R., Che Abas C. I. & Mohd Yunus A. (2003)
Mekanik Mesin, Universiti Teknologi Malayaisa, Johor. 3. Ramamurti, V. (2005) Mechanics of Machines, 2nd Edition,
Alpha Science International Ltd, U.K. 4. Vinogradov, O. (2000) Fundamentals of Kinematics and
Dynamics of Machines and Mechanisms, CRC Press, United States of America.
BTPU 2112 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH MANAGEMENT Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able: 1. Explain the different requirements of Factory and
Machinery Act, Occupational Safety and Health Act and Environmental Quality Act and its regulations.
2. Identify various safety, health and environment hazards that affect human being.
3. Apply various requirements on safety and health principles on working environment.
4. Analyse scenarios in manufacturing industries that are subjected to Factory and Machinery Act, Occupational Safety and Health Act and Environmental Quality Act and its regulations.
5. Evaluate potential workplace safety, health and environment hazards and propose methods to eliminate reduce or control them.
Synopsis The aim of this course is to expose students to industrial Laws in Malaysia specifically Factory and Machinery Act, Occupational Safety and Health Act and Environmental Quality Act and its regulations. Furthermore students will be thought safety, health and environment hazard that affects human being. The skills and knowledge of this area are crucial for students to accommodate them in the future. References 1. Goetsch, D. L. (2004). Occupational Safety and Health for
Technologists, Engineers, and Managers, 5th Edition, Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.
2. Reese, C. D. (2003). Occupational Health and Safety Management, A Practical Approach. Lewis Publishers, A CRC Press Company.
3. Undang-undang Malaysia, (2005). Akta Keselamatan dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan 1994 dan peraturan-peraturan, MDC Publishers Sdn Bhd.
4. Undang-undang Malaysia, (2005). Akta Kilang dan Jentera 1967 dan peraturan-peraturan, MDC Publishers Sdn Bhd
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
187
183
BTPU 2213 QUALITY CONTROL Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, student should be able to: 1. Explain the basic quality principles and practices, quality
solving techniques, and product reliability related to manufacturing practices.
2. Apply the quality solving techniques such as SPC, QFD, FMEA, Six Sigma and PDSA in order to improve quality.
3. Analyze the manufacturing process and capability using variable and attributes control;
4. Design sampling method for quality control. Synopsis There are four main sections consist in Quality and Reliability subject: quality principles and practices; quality solving techniques; reliability and additional quality tools. In quality principle and practices, its covers quality basic, quality gurus, introduction to total quality management, and quality awards. Quality solving techniques will cover statistical process control (7 QC tools). In reliability, it explains life and reliability testing plans for product and process. Additional quality tools are Quality Function Deployment (QFD), Failure Mode Effect & Analysis (FMEA), Six Sigma and PDSA. References 1. Besterfield, D. H. (2008) Quality Control, 8th Edition,
Prentice Hall. 2. Fryman, M.A. (2002) Quality and Process Improvement,
Thomson Learning. 3. Besterfield, D.H., Besterfield-Minhna, C., Besterfield, G. H.
and Besterfield-Sacre, M.(2003) Total Quality Management, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall.
4. Montgomery D. C., (2005) Introduction to Statistical Quality Control, 5th Edition, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.
BTPU 2223 CONTROL SYSTEMS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Identify basic control system theory such as transfer
function, Laplace Transform, stability analysis, linear equation, time respond and others.
2. Model linear and time invariant system using frequency domain and state space method.
3. Model linear, time in variant electrical, mechanical, and electromechanical systems by manipulating block diagrams and signal flow diagram.
4. Apply commercially available mathematical software to solve control theory problems.
Synopsis This subject focuses on the fundamental of control system theory. The system includes translational mechanical system, rotational mechanical system and electromechanical system, in linear and time invariant state. Student will also be exposed to solve stability and steady state problems in a system. Some of the methods used in solving these problems are dynamic system modelling, Laplace transform, block diagram and Routh-Huwirtz stability. Practical application on how to use commercially available mathematical software to solve control problem will also be introduced. References 1. Nise, Norman S. (2003) Control System Engineering, 4th
Edition, John Wiley. 2. Ogata, Katsuhiko (2002) Modern Control Engineering, 4th
Edition, Prentice Hall. 3. Palm W. J. (2002) Control System Engineering, John Wiley 4. Bishop, Dorf (2005) Modern Control Systems, 10th Edition,
Prentice Hall.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
188
184
BTPU 3114 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, student should be able to: 1. Explain the fundamental concepts, tools and techniques
applied in Industrial Engineering. 2. Analyze and solve problems that are related to Industrial
Engineering (IE). 3. Conduct experiments or laboratory tasks related to topics
discussed in IE. 4. Solve manufacturing operation scenarios using Industrial
Engineering tools and techniques. Synopsis This course is an introduction to Industrial Engineering (IE) . The course introduces fundamental concepts and technique in IE covering two major areas that are production systems and optimization. In production system, student will be taught to productivity concept, work study and measurements, facility planning, forecasting, material requirement planning, inventory control and production scheduling. In optimization , students will be exposed to queueing theory , simulation and modeling, lean manufacturing and project management. References 1. Heizer, J., and Render, B. (2008) Operations Management,
9th Edition, Prentice Hall. 2. Krawjewski, J.L., and Ritzman, P.L. (2008) Operation
Management; Process Value Chains, 8th Edition, Prentice Hall.
3. Salvendy, G. (2001) Handbook of Industrial Engineering: Technology and Operations Management, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall.
BTPU 3123 THERMO-FLUIDS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the thermodynamic properties of pure substances
using property data tables. 2. Apply the thermodynamic First Law and Second Law for
common steady-flow devices. 3. Use the Bernoulli Equation to solve various fluid flow
problems. 4. Demonstrate the principles of thermodynamics and fluid
mechanics through laboratory experiments. Synopsis The course introduces the students to the basic engineering of thermodynamics that involved study on the energy transformation, working fluids, theory and application of first and second laws of thermodynamics. The course also covers explanation on the steam and gas power plant as a direct application of the thermodynamic theory. Students will be exposed on refrigeration system as an application on the thermodynamics principles. The second part of this course is to introduce the students to the basic of fluid mechanics. This consists of fluid's static and dynamic analysis, buoyancy and stability, Bernoulli equation, momentum principle, flow behavior in pipe and also covers the basic principle of dimensional analysis. References 1. Cengel, Y.A., Turner, R. H. & Cimbala, J. M. (2008)
Fundamentals of Thermal-Fluid Sciences, 3rd Edition in SI Units, Mc Graw Hill.
2. Kaminsky, D. A. & Jensen, M.K. (2005) Introduction to Thermal and Fluid Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
3. Cengel, Y.A. & Michael, A.B. (2002) Thermodynamics: An Engineering Approach, 4th Edition, Mc Graw Hill.
4. Eastop, T.D. & McConkey, A. (2004) Applied Thermodynamics for Engineering Technologist, 5th Edition, Longman.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
189
185
BTPU 3214 BACHELOR DEGREE PROJECT I Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Identify the setting of project goals based on the problem
statements. 2. Initiate and layout problem solving elements - objectives &
scope. 3. Work independently to design, analyze, fabricate. 4. Evaluate any form of system or experimental rig using
available facilities including laboratory equipments, software and library resources.
5. Apply his/her knowledge in science, mathematics and engineering to solve the problems.
Synopsis Individual project in the student’s area of specialization under the guidance of supervisors. The work includes designing, evaluating, and analyzing components, assemblies, and systems. Develop products/manufacturing techniques demonstrating state-of-the-art technology. A written proposal, one or more written progress reports, and final written report are required. An oral presentation is required upon completion of the course.
References 1. Manual Projek Sarjana Muda (PSM), Fakulti Kejuruteraan
Pembuatan, Universiti Teknikal Malaysia Melaka.
BTPG 3212 TECHNOPRENEURSHIP Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain key entrepreneurship issues, including, ideas,
theory and practice of new venture creation and entrepreneurship processes, and innovation and technology management for new ventures.
2. Assess and evaluate viable business ideas, sources of new ideas, methods for generating ideas and screening, and creative problem solving.
3. Develop understanding of important areas of business and management with respect to the new product development process and the entrepreneurial business plan, including key sources of business support and finance, market and the steps required to research a market and protect the intellectual property for a business opportunity, the management of people and operations, and financial forecasts
Synopsis The course will facilitate students with the key entrepreneurship motivation and skills to inculcate entrepreneurial behaviors and competencies, incorporating theories and practices for new venture creation. Other topics include familiarizing students with the concepts, issues and techniques of venture creation and entrepreneurship. It will also explore issues concerning marketing and strategic management, risks and uncertainties, business sustainability and global opportunities by going international. The course will facilitate students’ understanding on the importance of protecting intellectual property. References 1. Thomas W. Zimmere & Norman M. Scarborough (2004)
Essentials of Entrepreneurship & Small Business Management, 4th Edition. New York, Prentice Hall
2. Kuratko, D. F. and Hodgets, R. M. (2004) Entrepreneurship Theory, Process and Practice, 6th Edition. New York, Thomson South Western.
3. Mankani, D. (2004) Technopreneurship, Singapore, Prentice Hall.
4. Dollinger, M. J. (2003) Entrepreneurship: Strategies and Resources, 3rd Edition, New Jersey, Prentice Hall
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
190
186
BTPU 4134 BACHELOR DEGREE PROJECT II Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Work independently to design, analyze, fabricate. 2. Evaluate any form of system or experimental rig using
available facilities including laboratory equipments, software and library resources.
3. Apply his/her knowledge in science, mathematics and engineering to solve the problems.
4. Develop the first practical experience or project conducted by the student before venturing into the real world working experience.
Synopsis Individul project in the student’s area of specialization under the guidance of supervisors. The work includes designing, evaluating, and analyzing components, assemblies, and systems. Develop products/manufacturing techniques demonstrating state-of-the-art technology. A written proposal, one or more written progress reports, and final written report are required. An oral presentation is required upon completion of the course. References 1. Manual Projek Sarjana Muda (PSM), Fakulti Kejuruteraan
Pembuatan, Universiti Teknikal Malaysia Melaka.
BTPU 4112 ENGINEERING ETHICS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Identify the principles of engineering ethics, law, and
professionalism. 2. Distinguish the relevant acts, authorizing body (Board of
Engineers Malaysia, BEM) and role of the professional engineering body (Institute of Engineers Malaysia, IEM.
3. Relate the engineering ethics, law, and professionalisms with current industrial situation.
4. Respect & uphold the importance of engineering ethics, law, and professionalism in the welfare and safety of society and industrial organization.
Synopsis Basically, the course structure will offer students to learn, understand and apply knowledge in engineering ethics and professionalisms in their future career. Engineering as a professional career, requires certain policy, guidelines, regulations, ethical codes and requirements so that an engineer (practitioner) can contribute effectively in industrial practices. Additionally engineers should be aware of the laws in engineering for example, Contract Law, Tort Law and Intellectual Property. References 1. Akta 138: Akta Pendaftaran Jurutera. 2. Peraturan-peraturan Pendaftaran Jurutera. 3. Johari, Mohd Janib (2001) Etika Profesional, Penerbit UTM,
Skudai. 4. Martin, Mike W. (2005) Ethics in Engineering, McGraw Hill. 5. Logeswaran, R. et. al (2006) Engineers in Society, 2nd
Edition, McGraw Hill. 6. Dyson, J.R. (1997) Accounting for non Accounting Students,
4th Edition, Pitman Publishing, London
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
191
187
BTPU 4123 SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, student should be able to: 1. Describe the elements of design for Dematerialization,
Detoxification, Revalorization and Renewal 2. Design, various product type with minimum environmental
effect 3. Analyze the environmental effect of product throughout its
lifecycle Synopsis Sustainable design or green product design is to incorporate product design to eliminate negative environmental impact completely through skillful, sensitive design. Manifestations of sustainable design require no non-renewable resources, impact the environment minimally, and relate people with the natural environment. References 1. Frederic P Miller, Agnes F Vandome, John McBrewster,
(2010) Design for Environment, VDM Publishing House Ltd. 2. Joseph Fiksel, Joseph R. Fiksel, (2009) Design for
environment: a guide to sustainable product development. McGraw Hill
3. Fabio Giudice, Guido La Rosa, Antonino Risitano, (2006) Product design for the environment: a life cycle approach, Taylor and Francis.
BTPU 4246 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Apply theory and skills acquired in class, workshop and labs
in actual industrial environment. 2. Solve the given technical problem during the industrial
training 3. Describe relevant process in company through report
writing, interview and presentation session 4. Describe relevant process in company through report
writing, interview and presentation session 5. Adopt professional practice and ethics in work. Obey
company rules and regulations. 6. Seek additional relevant information from various sources
related to the problem independently to make improvement
Synopsis Industrial training is a compulsory component for degree program students at Universiti Teknikal Malaysia Melaka (UTeM). The experiences and skills acquired from a period of placement can be invaluable and provide the advantage to the students when applying for employment after graduation. During the training period with the relevant industry, students are expected to involve in the following areas of training in order to achieve the underlying objectives, such as; Manufacturing / production process and / or its optimization process, Mechanical design and product / system development, Maintenance and repair of machineries or equipments, and Product testing & quality control. After completing those training, the students are expected to possess a certain level of “hands – on practical experience” related to their own field of studies particularly. References 1. Faculty Of Manufacturing Engineering Student ‘s Log
Book, (2008) FKP 2. Faculty Of Manufacturing Engineering Industrial
Training Guide Book, (2007) 2nd Edition, FKP.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
192
188
BTPP 2214 CAD/CAM Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain CAD/CAM systems and applications in industrial
manufacturing. 2. Apply basic principal CAD/CAM methodology into 2D, 3D,
surface modeling and CAM operation. 3. Plan machining strategies and toolpath methods for milling
and turning operations. 4. Investigate and simulate machining operations prior to the
machining process. Synopsis This course is an introducing to the CAD/CAM system and its application in industry. The students will be exposed to the application of high-end CAD/CAM software for generating geometric modeling and also part programming. The course covers generating 2D Graphic Elements, Geometric Modeling Systems, Generative/Interactive Drafting, CAD and CAM Integration and CAD/CAM Programming. By doing a group project, student will understand the link from CAD to CAM operation. Using CAD/CAM software, students will know how to simulate the part programming before start the machining operation. References 1. Karam, F. (2004) Using CATIA V5, Tomson (Delma Learning). 2. Rao, P.N. (2004) CAD/CAM Principles and Applications, 2nd
Edition, McGraw Hill. 3. Chang T.C., Wysk, R.A. & Wang, H.P. (2006) Computer-
Aided Manufacturing, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall. 4. McMahon, C. & Browne, J. (1998) CADCAM Principle,
Practise and Manufacturing Management, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall.
BTPP 2223 MEASUREMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Recognize the basic elements of common measurement
systems 2. Predict the behavior and applications for measurement
different physical quantities. 3. Evaluate measurement performance of a measurement
system. 4. Proposed and explain suitable measurement methods and
sensors
Synopsis This course provides the overall picture of measurement elements, which is divided into two main sections. The first section is regarding measurement performance which includes standards, characteristics, calibration, errors, measurement system analysis, signal, noise and etc. The second section, students will be introduced with various measurement methods such as pressure, fluid flow, strain, temperature etc. In this section also, the different sensors technology is taught. Student will have adequate knowledge in understanding the behaviors of measurement output and in selecting appropriate measurement tools for a specific measurement task. References 1. S. Morris, (2001), Measurement & Instrumentation
Principles. 1st Edition. Butterworth 2. T.G.Beckwith, R.D. Maragoni, J.H. Lienhard, (2006),
Mechanical Measurements. 6th edition, Pearson-Prentice Hall.
3. J.P. Bentley, (1995), Principles of Measurement System. 3rd Edition. Longman.
4. Robert, B., Northrop, (2005), Introduction to Instrumentation and Measurements. 2nd Edition. CRC Press.
Programme Core Subjects (P)
BTPP Course Core Subjects (K)
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
193
189
BTPP 2233 MATERIAL SELECTION Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic relationship between properties,
processing and performance of materials. 2. Analyze materials selection attributes in product design
and manufacturing. 3. Justify the suitability of a particular processing method for
a specific selected material and design activity using data, charts and software.
4. Select the right materials and processes to be used for products fabrication and commercialization.
Synopsis This course integrates all types of engineering materials (metals, polymers, ceramics and composites) and its properties (modulus, strength, hardness and toughness etc) for materials selection in any engineering design. Various processing techniques (shaping, joining and finishing etc) are also summarized. Case study and project work are used to reinforce the concept and capabilities in applying selection of materials utilizing materials properties charts, data and software. References 1. Ashby, M.F. (2005) Materials Selection In Mechanical
Design, 3rd Edition, Butterworth-Heinemann. 2. Mangonon, P.L. (1998) The Principles of Materials Selection
for Engineering Design, Pearson Education. 3. Cranes, F.A.A. & Charles, J.A. (1984) Selection and Use of
Engineering Materials, Butterworths, London. 4. Mahmoud M.F. (1989) Selection of Materials and
Manufacturing Processes for Engineering Design, Prentice Hall.
5. Kenneth G.B. (1988) Engineering Materials: Properties and Selection, Prentice Hall.
BTPP 3114 ADVANCED MACHINING Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic operation principles and control systems
of CNC machine. 2. Construct CNC Programming for turning and milling
operations 3. Analyze problem related with CNC Program using linear
moves, circular moves and canned cycles. 4. Use CNC lathe and CNC milling machines
Synopsis This course covers the knowledge of CNC technology and basics of CNC machining operations. Students will learn CAD/CAM and CNC machining using Mastercam software on PC based computers. The students will be exposed to the operation of CNC machines and methods of producing programming by using G-codes and M-codes. References 1. Krar, S., Gill, A., and Smid, P. (2000) Computer Numerical
Control Simplified, Industrial Press Inc. 2. Madison, J. (1996) CNC Machining Handbook, Industrial
Press Inc. 3. Thyer, G.E. (1991) Computer Numerical Control of Machine
Tools, 2nd Edition, Newnes. 4. Mattson, M. (2002) CNC Programming Principles and
Applications, Delmar.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
194
190
BTPP 3123 MATERIALS TESTING AND FRACTURE ANALYSIS Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the various methods of materials testing and the
fundamental and characteristics of different types of failures in materials.
2. Analyze the effects of external forces on the behavior of materials, and the test methods employed in determining various mechanical properties.
3. Classify the types of failure and fracture of materials in manufacturing and service
4. Demonstrate materials testing and fracture analysis through laboratory sessions.
Synopsis The course will introduce the student on how Identify the various methods of materials testing and able to explain the effects of external forces on the behavior of materials, and the test methods employed in determining various mechanical properties. Among the scope of the course are fundamental and characteristics of different types of failures in materials to apply the fracture mechanics principles to identify the types of fracture surfaces of different materials and able to perform failure analysis, to differentiate the types of failure and fracture of materials in manufacturing and service. References 1. The mechanical testing of metals and alloys, By P. Field
Foster, SIR ISAAC PITMAN & SONS, LTD., USA 2. Hand book of advanced materials testing, Nicholas P
Cheremisinoff, and Paul N Cheremisinoff, III SERIES, Materials engineering, MARECEL DEKKER INC., USA.1995
3. Mechanical Behavior of Materials: Engineering Methods for Deformation, Fracture & Fatigue (2nd Edition), by Norman E. Dowling, Publisher: Prentice Hall; 2nd edition (September 2, 1998)
BTPP 3133 ADVANCED MANUFACTURING PROCESSES Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the principles and operation of the advanced
manufacturing processes. 2. Select the most appropriate process for a given product
design, application requirements and cost constraint. 3. Recognize the safety measures in handling advanced
manufacturing machines. 4. Apply the knowledge of advanced manufacturing processes
by completing a design and fabricating project. Synopsis The course consists of non-traditional manufacturing processes and material removal methods, which include manufacturing processes using lasers technology, electron beam, abrasive water jet, electro discharge machining and electro chemical machining. Moreover, it will also include the introduction to aerospace material machining, automotive stamping, coating technology and electronic manufacturing processes. References 1. Mikell, P.G. (2007) Fundamental of Modern Manufacturing
Process, 3rd Edition, Prentice hall. 2. Gregg, R. (2004) Modern Materials and Manufacturing
Processes, Prentice Hall. 3. Degarmo, B.K. (1997) Materials and Processes in
Manufacturing, 8th Edition, Prentice hall.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
195
191
BTPP 3213 JIG & FIXTURES Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain requirements for jigs and fixtures. 2. Design and construct jigs and fixtures. 3. Determine and implement locating and clamping principles. Synopsis This course starts with an introduction of jigs and fixtures that is used to facilitate production works, making interchangeable pieces of work possible at a savings in cost production. Jigs and fixture are used to locate and hold the work that is to be machined. Also, the use of this device can result in such a degree of accuracy that workpieces can be assembled with a minimum amount of fitting. A jig and fixture can be designed for a particular job. The form to be used depends on the shape and requirement of the workpiece to be machined. References 1. E.G. Hoffman (2004) Jig and Fixture Design 5th edition,
Thomson Delmar Learning Publisher. 2. E.K. Henriksen (1973) Jig and Fixture Design Manual,
Industrial Press, New York.
BTPP 3223 PLASTIC TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the fundamental principles of engineering polymers
in term of classification and application. 2. Describes the relationship of structure, behavior and
properties of polymer with its processing and final application.
3. Justify the selection of appropriate polymer for specific applications by considering its properties and processing techniques.
Synopsis This course provides an introduction to engineering polymers, which covers its classifications (thermoplastic, thermoset and elastomer), mechanical, rheological and physical properties as well as polymer product processing. Basic concept of polymer blends and raw materials formulation are also included. Emphasis is made on polymer based product manufacturing, relations between processing and final properties as well as environmental effects (disposal and recycling). References 1. McCrum, N.G., Buckley, C.P. and Bucknall, C.B. (2004)
Principles of Polymer Engineering, Oxford Science Publication.
2. Brent, S.A. (2006) Plastics Materials and Processing, 2nd Edition, Butterworth Heinemann.
3. Bahadur, P. and Sastry, N.V. (2005) Principles of Polymer Science, 2nd Edition, Alpha Science.
4. Fried, J.R. (2003) Polymer Science & Technology, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall
5. Crawford, R.J. (2001) Plastic Engineering, Butterworth Heinemann.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
196
192
BTPP 3233 JOINING TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Identify types of joining processes applied in manufacturing
sector. 2. Explain the characteristics of joining in terms of process,
equipment and setup. 3. Analyze the quality of joints using some testing methods. 4. Practice the joining processes using certain equipment to
make variety of joints. Synopsis Joining Process is another very important element in manufacturing and assembly processes. Where nearly all products, from a relatively simple to the most complex, are assembled from single parts or components. Therefore, this subject shall covering each of related joining process and its equipment, inclusive welding, brazing, soldering, adhesive bonding and mechanical fastening. Furthermore, its also provides an engineering applications of using some of the equipment and tools of joining processes. References 1. Serope Kalpakjian & Steve Schmid, (2006) Manufacturing
Process and Technology, Prentice Hall 2. Klas Weman & Gunnar Linden, (2006) MIG welding guide,
Woodhead Publishing Limited. 3. Jeffus L, (2004) Welding Priciples and Aplication, Thomson. 4. Howard C., (2002) Modern Welding Technology, Prentice
Hall.
BTPP 3243 LEAN MANUFACTURING Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, student should be able to: 1. Explain the philosophy and foundation of lean
manufacturing. 2. Use appropriate analytical technique to identify and
eliminate the types of wastes apparent in a manufacturing system.
3. Apply Value Stream Mapping to appraise the current state and to develop a vision for the future.
4. Construct work flow based on lean manufacturing principles.
Synopsis Lean Manufacturing is based upon the principle of eliminating waste at all levels throughout the manufacturing system. This module reviews the skills and techniques required to analyse manufacturing systems and to design improved methods and layouts. It will use Value Stream Mapping to understand and appraise the current state ; future state mapping will be used to develop a vision of value added flow. The focus of this module will be on the application of the technique through case studies and industrial experience, and will identify the benefits to be gained by their successful. References 1. William, M.F. (2000), Lean Manufacturing: Tools,
Techniques, and How to Use Them, St. Lucie Press 2. Tapping, D., Luyster,T. and Shuker, T (2002) Value Stream
Management, Productivity Press. 3. Womack, J. P. and Jones, D.T., (1999) Lean Thinking,
Simon & Schuster. 4. Shingo, S. (1989) A study of the Toyota Production System
from an Industrial Engineering Viewpoint, Productivity Press
5. Womack, J.P., Jones, D.T. and Roos, D. (1995) The Machine That Changed the World: The Story of Lean Production, Rawson Associates
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
197
193
BTPP 4113 SHEET METAL TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, student should be able to: 1. Explain the application of sheet metal technology. 2. Recognize and work safely in the sheet metal shop 3. Use all automation machines such as laser cutting, turret
punch and press brake to produce complex finish product. Synopsis This subject covers the introduction to safety, tools, machinery, materials, and fasteners used in the sheet metal trade. It covers processes such as cutting, forming and joining methods in fabrication of sheet metal and also including application of advanced machine such as CNC Tube Bending, CNC Laser Cutting, CNC Turret Punch and CNC Press Brake. References 1. Vukota, Boljanovic, (2004) ”Sheet Metal Forming Processes
and Die Design”, Industrial Press Inc. 2. R.E Wakeford, (2002) Sheet Metal Work, Biddles Ltd. 3. Steve D. Benson, (1997) Press Brake Technology: A Guide to
Precision Sheet Metal Bending, Society of Manufacturing Engineers.
4. Leo A. Mayer, (1995) Sheet Metal, American Technical Publishers Inc.
BTPP 4124 MANUFACTURING SYSTEM Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, student should be able to: 1. Describe and apply the principles and techniques of
simulation. 2. Construct models of discrete event simulation for
manufacturing systems. 3. Use simulation software to design and analyse
manufacturing systems using statistical technique. 4. Construct and deduce result for simulation based
experiments. Synopsis Modeling and simulation introduces the students to principles and techniques of discrete event simulation. This is a powerful system tool for analyzing a wide variety of complex engineering and business problems. Students will learn to model a real system, use the main computational and programming instruments, and simulation language, to program the model. Student also will be exposed to design and evaluate simulation experiments. References 1. Harrington, H.J. and Kerim T. (2000) Simulation Modeling
Methods: To Reduce Risks and Increasing Performance, McGraw Hill.
2. Severance, F. L. (2001) System Modeling and Simulation: An Introduction, John Wiley & Sons.
3. Averill, L. and Kelton, W.D., (1999) Simulation Modeling and Analysis (Industrial Engineering and Management Science Series), 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill Science/Engineering/Math.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
198
194
BTPP 4134 AUTOMOTIVE COMPONENT MANUFACTURING Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, student should be able to: 1. Explain the proper use of hand tools, power tools, electric
tools and machines and PPE. 2. Identify the different automotive joining process such as
welding, adhesive bonding and mechanical fastening 3. Describe the finishing process involved in automotive
manufacturing. 4. Apply the knowledge of surface treatment such as blasting
and painting technology. Synopsis This subject provides strong fundamental concepts and techniques related to various type of finishing method that are applied in automotive industries. This subject covers three major techniques used in finishing process such as machine process, joining process and surface treatment. The subject is practical oriented where students apply their knowledge as well as capable to operate the relevant equipment. References 1. Serope Kalpakjian, (2002) Manufacturing Engineering &
Technology, 4th edition, Prentice Hall 2. R.L. Timings, (1998) Manufacturing Technology, vol 1, 3rd
edition , Wesley Longman 3. P.N RAO, (2000) Manufacturing Technology-Metal cutting
& Machine Tools, McGraw Hill. 4. H.S .Bawa, (2004) Manufacturing processes, McGraw Hill 5. Robert. GmBH, (2005) Automotive Handbook, 6th edition.
Society of Automotive Engineer (SAE)
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
199
195
BTPD 2213 COMPUTER AIDED MANUFACTURING Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain CAM systems and applications in industrial
manufacturing. 2. Apply basic principal CAM methodology into 2D, 3D,
surface modeling and CAM operation. 3. Plan machining strategies and toolpath methods for milling
and turning operations. 4. Investigate and simulate machining operations prior to the
machining process. Synopsis This course is an introducing to the CAD/CAM system and its application in industry. The students will be exposed to the application of high-end CAD/CAM software for generating geometric modeling and also part programming. The course covers generating 2D Graphic Elements, Geometric Modeling Systems, Generative/Interactive Drafting, CAD and CAM Integration and CAD/CAM Programming. By doing a group project, student will understand the link from CAD to CAM operation. Using CAD/CAM software, students will know how to simulate the part programming before start the machining operation. References 1. Karam, F. (2004) Using CATIA V5, Tomson (Delma Learning). 2. Rao, P.N. (2004) CAD/CAM Principles and Applications, 2nd
Edition, McGraw Hill. 3. Chang T.C., Wysk, R.A. & Wang, H.P. (2006) Computer-
Aided Manufacturing, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall. 4. McMahon, C. & Browne, J. (1998) CADCAM Principle,
Practise and Manufacturing Management, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall.
BTPD 2224 ADVANCED ENGINEERING DRAWINGS & CADD Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic graphic principles in generating an
engineering drawing. 2. Apply the suitable design tools and reate clear and legible
sketches to represent roughly the idea or object in mind. 3. Generate engineering drawing in CAD software that can be
interpreted by engineering professionals. 4. Apply engineering tools and methodology in producing
technical drawing of a product.
Synopsis The purpose of this course is to provide students with an understanding of the importance of engineering graphic communication to the design process and interpreting the engineering drawings. Student will gain hands-on experience creating freehand technical sketches, CAD technical drawings using orthographic projections, sections auxiliary views and isometric drawings.Emphasis is placed on creating drawings that are neat, correctly dimensioned using industry standards. Students will use freehand sketches methods and CAD software to develop visualization skills and create the engineering drawings. This course is consists of lecture and practical session. A major part of the course consists of performing structured laboratory exercises. Classroom activities will complement and support the lab exercises with explanations and demonstrations of required activities. References 1. Giesecke, Mitchell, Spencer, Hill, Dygdon and Novak,
(2008), Technical Drawing, 13th Edition, Prentice Hall. 2. Dix R., (2006), Discovering AutoCAD 2006, Pentice Hall. 3. McAdam, D. and Winn, R., (2003), Engineering Graphics,
2nd Edition, Pearson Education Canada Inc. 4. Zolkarnain M., and Hassan A., (2008), Engineering Graphics
& CADD, for Engineering Students, FKP, UTeM.
BTPD Course Core Subjects (K)
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
200
196
BTPD 2233 ERGONOMICS DESIGN Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, student should be able to: 1. Describe human capabilities and limitations in performing
the jobs/activities; 2. Apply ergonomics principles to create safe, healthy,
efficient and effective activities in the workplace; 3. Analyze the effectiveness of the work system designed; 4. Design a work system by taken into consideration human
capabilities and limitations. Synopsis This course provides the students with the rationale for providing an occupationally safe and healthy work environment in industry. Three main elements of this course: human, equipment and work environment. These three elements are classified into different areas, however correlations of them are discussed and exemplified in each topic. Through human study, students will be explained about the human anthropometric, physiology, psychology as well as capabilities and limitations of human. Meanwhile, through ergonomic design of equipment, students will learn on how to design the hand tools and workstations that are safe to the users. Last but not least, the students also will be exposed on how to manage work environment such as thermal comfort, noise, etc. This will contribute better understanding to occupational health of industries. References 1. Wickens, C.D. (2007) An Introduction to Human Factors
Engineering, 2nd Edition, Pearson education International. 2. Salvendy, G. (2006) Handbook of Human Factor and
Ergonomics, 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons. 3. Kroemer, K.H.E, K.B Kroemer and K.E Kroemer (2000)
Ergonomic : How To Design For Ease and Efficiency, Prentice Hall.
4. Karwowski, W. and Marras, W. S. (2003) Occupational Ergonomics: Principles of Work Design, CRC Press.
5. Peter, V. (2004) Comfort and Design. Principles and Good Practice, CRC Press
BTPD 3113 CNC TECHNOLOGY Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Describe the concept of CNC system. 2. Produce correct programming code. 3. Create product modeling. 4. Produce product using CNC machine. Synopsis This course covers the knowledge of CNC technology and basics of CNC machining operations. Students will learn CAD/CAM and CNC machining using Mastercam software on PC based computers. The students will be exposed to the operation of CNC machines and methods of producing programming by using G-codes and M-codes. References 1. Krar, S., Gill, A., and Smid, P. (2000) Computer Numerical
Control Simplified, Industrial Press Inc. 2. Madison, J. (1996) CNC Machining Handbook, Industrial
Press Inc. 3. Thyer, G.E. (1991) Computer Numerical Control of Machine
Tools, 2nd Edition, Newnes. 4. Mattson, M. (2002) CNC Programming Principles and
Applications, Delmar.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
201
197
BTPD 3123 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING AND ASSEMBLY Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the principles of DMFA in product design. 2. Apply the concept of DFMA in design process. 3. Analyze the product through DFMA approach. 4. Produce product design improvement and demonstrate the
ideas through presentation. Synopsis The Design for Manufacture and Assembly (DFMA) is an approach of a decision making in improving product design from the earliest concept design stages of a new product, based on concurrent engineering philosophy. The course structure exposes students to learn, understand and apply requirements of DFMA in ensuring the design of product that is ease and less expensive to manufacture and assemble, with retaining quality of product. References 1. Boothroyd, G., Dewhurst, P. & Knight, W. (2002) Product
Design For Manufacture and Assembly, 2nd Edition Revised and Expanded, Marcel Dekker.
2. Corrado, P. (2001) Design for Manufacturing A Structured Approach, Butterworth Heinemann.
3. Ulrich, K.T. & Eppinger, S.D. (2004) Product Design and Development, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill Irwin.
4. Lindbeck, J.R. & Waygant, R.M. (1995) Product Design and Manufacture, Prentice Hall.
BTPD 3133 RAPID MANUFACTURING Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the process for rapid tooling activities. 2. Select the best rapid prototyping technology for a
particular part or design. 3. Perform various types of rapid prototyping technologies
such as selective laser sintering, stereolithography and etc. 4. Perform reverse engineering activities for rapid
reproduction and design alteration Synopsis Product development requires the building and testing of prototypes. A prototype is an approximation of the product on one or more dimensions of interest. Prototypes are used for learning, communication, integration and milestones. This course will provide the study of different prototyping methodologies and technologies. References 1. Hopkinson, N., Hague, R.J.M. & Dickens, P.M. (2006) Rapid
Manufacturing: An Industrial Revolution for the Digital Age, Chicester, John Wiley & Sons.
2. Wright, P.K. (2001) 21st Century Manufacturing Practice, Prentice Hall.
3. Pham, D.T. (2001) Rapid manufacturing the Technologies and Applications of Rapid Prototyping and Rapid Tooling, London: Springer.
4. Azapagic, A., Millington, A. & Collett, A. (2004) Sustainable Development in Practice: Case Studies for Engineers and Scientists, John Wiley & Sons.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
202
198
BTPD 3213 PRODUCTION TOOL DESIGN Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic principles and methods of designing
production tool in manufacturing field. 2. Apply the basic principles and methods of designing with
current industrial practice. 3. Design efficient production tools for manufacturing,
assembly and inspection processes. 4. Demonstrate an ability to organize and communicate
thoughts and ideas on device through oral presentation for manufacture.
Synopsis This course is an introduction to the basic principles and methods of designing production tools such as jigs and fixtures for material removal processes, manual work operations, joining processes and inspection processes. The students will be exposed to the application of industrial work holding devices, drawings and designs. The working drawings will be aided by engineering drawing standards, company catalogs and handbooks. The jigs and fixtures focus on the locating elements such as; clamping elements, tool guiding and setting elements. In this course, students will also use CAD software. References 1. Hoffman, E.G. (2002) Jig & Fixture Design, 5th Edition,
Delmar Publisher. 2. Joshi, P.H. (2003) Jigs and Fixtures Design Manual, 2nd
Edition, McGraw-Hill. 3. Orady, E. (2008) Jigs & Fixtures Design, Workshop Material,
BATC UTM.
BTPD 3223 INDUSTRIAL DESIGN Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain a systematic approach to the design process in all
studio projects. 2. Apply design and creative skills learned in one studio to
problems encountered in the new context of a successive studio.
3. Develop an understanding of and familiarity with the tools and methods of the design trade.
4. Demonstrate proficiency in model-making techniques using various materials.
Synopsis Industrial design deals with the planning and development for production of a variety of objects and interrelated systems. Consumer appliances, tools, safety equipment, business machines, furniture, medical equipment, architectural products, and transportation devices make up a partial list of those areas of specialization in industrial design. Industrial design falls within a broader category of design, which is the professional area of activity concerned with planning and developing a wide variety of objects and spaces. Relationships among the users of the designed item, the efficient production of the designed item, and the aesthetic characteristics of the designed item are of particular importance. References 1. Chengalur, S.N., Rodgers, S.H. & Bernard, T.E. (2004)
Kodak’s Ergonomic Design for People at Work, 2nd Edition, Wiley.
2. Wickens, C.D. (2004) An Introduction to Human Factors Engineering, 2nd Edition, Pearson education International.
3. Cacciabue, P.C. (2004) Guide to Applying Human Factors Methods: Human Error and Accident Management in Safety-Critical Systems, Springer.
4. Radwin, R.S. (2007) Lecture Notes on IE 564 (Ergonomics and Occupational Safety), University of Wisconsin – Madison.
5. Smith, M. (2006) Lecture Notes on IE 342 (Introduction to Human Factors), University of Wisconsin – Madison.
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
203
199
BTPD 3233 DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENT Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Describe the basic theory of common machine elements. 2. Apply the theory of common machine elements to design
machine elements. 3. Analyze machine elements using finite element analysis. 4. Optimize the design of machine elements using finite
element analysis. Synopsis The course introduces students to the design and theory of common machine elements including clutches, brakes, bearings, springs and gears. It also gives students experience in solving design problems involving machine elements. Finite element analysis approach will also be introduced to analyze, evaluate and optimize the mechanical structure of machine elements.
References 1. Juvinall, R. C., and Marshek, K. M., (2006), Fundamental of
Machine Component Design, 2nd Ed., Wiley. 2. Nortan, R. L., (2004), Design of Machinery, Tata McGraw-
Hill Book Co. 3. Logan, D. L., (2002), A First Course in the Finite Element
Method, 3rd Edition, Brooks/Cole, Pacific Grove, CA. 4. Chandrupatla, T. R., and Belgundu, A. D., (1997),
Introduction to the Finite Elements in Engineering, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
BTPD 3244 DESIGN PROJECT Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Define problem, objectives and scope of the project. 2. Conduct a literature review and produce a project
methodology. 3. Design and analyze the project using appropriate tools. 4. Demonstrate the project findings in a group design project. Synopsis This course develops the student’s competence and self-confidence as designers. Design projects are drawn from manufacturing engineering problems. The aims of this course is to expose students with design and research methodology which consists of project background, literature review, project methodology, design, analysis and presentation. The design projects must incorporate engineering standards and realistic constraints that include economic, environmental, sustainability, manufacturability, ethical, health and safety. References 1. Walker, D.J. (2000) Creative Techniques in Product and
Engineering Design: A Practical Workbook, Woodhead Publication, Abington, Cambridge.
2. Matthews, C. (1998) Case Studies in Engineering Design, London: Arnold.
3. Ulrich, K. (2004) Product Design and Development, McGraw Hill.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
204
200
BTPD 4113 CAE Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, students should be able to: 1. Explain the basic principles of finite element analysis. 2. Apply finite element modeling and equation to solve
mechanical structure,heat transfer and fluid flow analysis problems in design.
3. Design the finite element models using CAD. 4. Demonstrate and analyze finite element models using CAE
software.
Synopsis The course will introduce the students to the fundamental concepts of the finite element method and analysis in the context of practical application with emphasis on the engineering issues References 1. Chandrupatla T.R and Belgundu, A.D (1997), Introduction to
the Finite Elements in Engineering, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, New Jersey
2. Huebner K.H and Dewhirst D.L(2001), The finite Element Method for Engineers, 4th Edition,John Wiley and Sons Inc, Toronto Canada
3. Cook R.D (1995), Finite Element Modeling for Stress Analysis, John Wiley and Son Inc
4. Logan D.L (2002), A First Course in the Finite Element Method, 3rd Edition Brooks/Cole, Pacific Grove, CA
BTPD 4134 AUTOMOTIVE COMPONENT MANUFACTURING Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, student should be able to: 1. Explain the proper use of hand tools, power tools, electric
tools and machines and PPE. 2. Identify the different automotive joining process such as
welding, adhesive bonding and mechanical fastening 3. Describe the finishing process involved in automotive
manufacturing. 4. Apply the knowledge of surface treatment such as blasting
and painting technology. Synopsis This subject provides strong fundamental concepts and techniques related to various type of finishing method that are applied in automotive industries. This subject covers three major techniques used in finishing process such as machine process, joining process and surface treatment. The subject is practical oriented where students apply their knowledge as well as capable to operate the relevant equipment. References 1. Serope Kalpakjian, (2002) Manufacturing Engineering &
Technology, 4th edition, Prentice Hall 2. R.L. Timings, (1998) Manufacturing Technology, vol 1, 3rd
edition , Wesley Longman 3. P.N RAO, (2000) Manufacturing Technology-Metal cutting
& Machine Tools, McGraw Hill. 4. J.L.Stauffer, (1993) Finishing Systems design &
Implementation, Published by association of Finishing process of the Society of Manufacturing Engineers.(SME)
5. H.S .Bawa, (2004) Manufacturing processes, McGraw Hill 6. Robert. GmBH, (2005) Automotive Handbook, 6th edition.
Society of Automotive Engineer (SAE)
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
205
201
BTPD 4124 MOULD DESIGN Learning Outcomes At the end of this course, student should be able to: 1. Identify design components requirements for mould 2. Design and fabricate mould 3. Determine the runner and gating system for mould Synopsis This course is an introduction to the basic principles and method of designing mould components such as cavity, core, sprue, cooling system, gate and ejectors system. The students will be exposed to the application of industrial work holding devices, drawing engineering standard, design catalogs and mold design handbooks. References 1. Herbert Rees, Mold Engineering 2nd Edition, 2. Hoffman, E.G. (2002) Jig & Fixture Design, 5th Edition,
Delmar Publisher. 3. Joshi, P.H. (2003) Jigs and Fixtures Design Manual, 2nd
Edition, McGraw-Hill. 4. Orady, E. (2008) Jigs & Fixtures Design, Workshop Material,
BATC UTM.
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
206
202
Assoc. Prof. MOHD RAHIMI BIN YUSOFF Dean : [email protected] : 06-234 6510 : Dean’s Office, 2nd Floor
AHMAD ZUBIR BIN JAMIL Deputy Dean (Academic) : [email protected] : 06-234 6511 : GD1, 2nd Floor
ROHANA BINTI ABDULLAH Deputy Dean (Research & Postgraduate Studies) : [email protected] : 06-234 6512 : TDP’s Office, 2nd Floor
Engr. ASRI BIN DIN Head of Department (Electric) : [email protected] : 06-234 6506 : D8, 2nd Floor
ROSTAM AFFENDI BIN HAMZAH Head of Department (Electronic & Computer) : [email protected] : 06-234 6508 : D10, 2nd Floor
NUR RASHID BIN MAT NURI @ MD DIN Head of Department (Mechanical) : [email protected] : 06-234 6517 : D13, 2nd Floor
FACULTY STAFF
Administration
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
207
203
Engr. ZOLKARNAIN BIN MARJOM Head of Department (Manufacturing) : [email protected] : 06-234 6523 : D15, 2nd Floor
AZHAR BIN MOHD SALLEH Principal Assistant Registrar : [email protected] : 06-234 6527 : D5, 2nd Floor
MOHAMAD FUAD BIN JA’AFAR Senior Assistant Administrative Officer : [email protected] : 06-234 6524 : D7, 2nd Floor
NOR'EMYLIA BINTI MOHAMED Office Secretary : [email protected] : 06-234 6528 : Admin, 2nd Floor
ZULRIDAH BINTI ZULKEFLE Assistant Accountant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
HASLINA BINTI ABU Account Assistant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
FADZLY BIN NORDIN Administrative Assistant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
NOOR HAFIZA BINTI OTHMAN Administrative Assistant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
AZHAN BIN ABDUL RAUB Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
MOHD HEDZUAN BIN HASBULLAH Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
204
IZWAN BIN HAMDAN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
AZIZI BIN OSMAN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
MOHD SYAKIR BIN MOHTARUDIN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
MOHD SAUFI BIN ALIMAT Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
FAKHRULNAIM BIN IBRAHIM Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
JANATUL HAFIZ BIN BASIR Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
AHMAD FITRI BIN ADAM General Office Assistant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
208
205
AHMAD ZUBIR BIN JAMIL Deputy Dean (Academic) / Lecturer M.Sc. (Automatic Control and System Engineering), University of Sheffield, UK P.Grad Diploma (Industrial Education and Training) RMIT, Melbourne B.Eng. (Hons) Electrical & Electronic, University of Strathclyde, UK Area of Interest : Industrial Automation, Industrial Education and Training (VTET) Computer Maintenance Management System : [email protected] : 234 6631/234 6505 : BP2/D08
Engr. ASRI BIN DIN Head of Department / Lecturer M.Eng. (Electrical Energy & Power System) Universiti Malaya B.Eng. (Electrical Engineering), UTM Area of Interest : Electrical Power System, Renewable Energy, Energy Efficiency. : [email protected] : 234 6632 : BP1, 1st Floor
SULAIMAN BIN SABIKAN Lecturer M.Sc Electrical Engineering, Universiti Teknikal Malaysia Melaka B.Eng in Electrical Engineering (Mechatronics) Universiti Teknologi Malaysia Area of Interest : Mechatronics Systems, Machine Vision System, Automated Guided Vehicle and Robotics : [email protected] : 234 6548 : BP3, 1st Floor
MOHD FARRIZ BIN HJ MD BASAR Lecturer M.Eng. Electrical Engineering (High Voltage), UTM B.Eng. Electrical Engineering, UTM Area of Interest : Renewable Energy Technologies and Applications : [email protected] : 234 6588 : BP10, 1st Floor
AMINURRASHID BIN NOORDIN Lecturer M.Eng. (Electrical - Mechatronics and Automatic Control), UTM B.Eng. (Electrical - Mechatronics), UTM Area of Interest : Robotics, Automatic Control, Artificial Intelligence : [email protected] : 234 6625 : BP14, 1st Floor
MOHD RAZALI BIN MOHAMAD SAPIEE Lecturer M.Eng. (Electrical - Mechatronics and Automatic control), UTM B.Eng (Hons.) Mechatronics, University of Leeds Area of Interest : Mechatronics, Adaptive Control : [email protected] : 234 6578 : BP24, 1st Floor
MUHAMMAD SHARIL BIN YAHAYA Lecturer M.Sc. Power Distribution Engineering, Newcastle University, UK B.Eng. (Hons) Electrical Engineering, UTM Area of Interest : Power System, Power Distribution, High Voltage : [email protected] : 234 6625 : BP14, 1st Floor
MOHD YUNOS BIN ALI Senior Teaching Engineer B.Eng Electrical Electrical Engineering (Power System), Universiti Teknologi Malaysia Area of Interest : Power Electronics, Electric Motor & Drives. : [email protected] : 234 6640 : BP5, 1st Floor
Department of Electrical Engineering Technology
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
209
206
MOHD HATTA BIN JOPRI Teaching Engineer Msc. Electrical Power Engineering, Rheinisch-WestfälischeTechnische Hochschule, Aachen, Germany B.Eng. in Electrical Engineering, UTM Area of Interest : Power System Eng., Electrical Machine, Power Electronics, Actuator and Drives : [email protected] : 234 6587 : BP9, 1st Floor
MUSTAFA BIN MANAP Teaching Engineer B.Eng. in Electrical Engineering (Control and Instrumentation), UTM Diploma in Electrical Power Engineering, UTM Area of Interest : Instrumentation, PLC, SCADA : [email protected] : 234 6546 : BP4, 1st Floor
ZULKIFLI BIN IBRAHIM Teaching Engineer M.Sc in Electrical Power Engineering, TU Darmstädt, Germany B.Eng.(Hons.) in Electrical Power Engineering, UNITEN Area of Interest : High Voltage,Energy Conversion : [email protected] : 234 6591 : BP12, 1st Floor
MOHD HANIF BIN CHE HASAN Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Mechatronics), UTM Area of Interest : VB Programming, Embedded System, PC & PLC Based Automation, SCADA, System Integration, Design & Application : [email protected] : 234 6639 : BP6, 1st Floor
SYAHRUL HISHAM BIN MOHAMAD @ ABD. RAHMAN Teaching Engineer B.Eng. Electrical and Electronic (Hons), Uniten Area of Interest : Power Electronic and Drives, Electrical and Electronic System, Embedded, System, PC & PLC Based Automation, SCADA : [email protected] : 234 6589 : BP11, 1st Floor
KHALIL AZHA BIN MOHD ANNUAR Teaching Engineer B. Eng. In Electrical(Electronic) Engineering UTM Area of Interest : Electronics, Embedded Control Design & Application : [email protected] : 234 6593 : BP13, 1st Floor
MOHD FIRDAUS BIN MOHD AB HALIM Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Electrical Engineering), UNITEN Area of Interest : Power Electronics, Electric Motor & Drives, Reliability of Power Electronics : [email protected] : 234 6638 : BP8, 1st Floor
MADIHA BTE ZAHARI Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) Electrical & Electronics, UTP Area of Interest : Control & Instrumentation : [email protected] : 234 6586 : BP15, 1st Floor
MUHAMAD FAIZAL BIN YAAKUB Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Electrical-Electronic), UTM Area of Interest : Power Electronics, Automotive Electronics, Renewable Energy : [email protected] : 234 6637 : BP7, 1st Floor
SUZIANA BINTI AHMAD Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Hons) Electrical Engineering (Telecommunication), UTM Area of Interest : Power Systems, Power Quality & Management : [email protected] : 234 6585 : BP16, 1st Floor
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
210
207
RAMLAN BIN LATIP Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Hons) Electrical Engineering (Control & Instrumentation), UTM Area of Interest : Power System, Control & Automation. : [email protected] : 234 6560 : BP19, 1st Floor
CHE WAN MOHD FAIZAL BIN CHE WAN MOHD ZALANI Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) Electrical Engineering (Power), UTM Area of Interest : Power System, High Voltage, Transmission Line. : [email protected] : - : BP93, 2nd Floor
203
Engr. ZOLKARNAIN BIN MARJOM Head of Department (Manufacturing) : [email protected] : 06-234 6523 : D15, 2nd Floor
AZHAR BIN MOHD SALLEH Principal Assistant Registrar : [email protected] : 06-234 6527 : D5, 2nd Floor
MOHAMAD FUAD BIN JA’AFAR Senior Assistant Administrative Officer : [email protected] : 06-234 6524 : D7, 2nd Floor
NOR'EMYLIA BINTI MOHAMED Office Secretary : [email protected] : 06-234 6528 : Admin, 2nd Floor
ZULRIDAH BINTI ZULKEFLE Assistant Accountant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
HASLINA BINTI ABU Account Assistant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
FADZLY BIN NORDIN Administrative Assistant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
NOOR HAFIZA BINTI OTHMAN Administrative Assistant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
AZHAN BIN ABDUL RAUB Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
MOHD HEDZUAN BIN HASBULLAH Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
211
208
ROSTAM AFFENDI BIN HAMZAH Head of Department / Lecturer M. Sc (Electronic System Design Engineering), USM B. Eng (Electrical & Electronics Engineering),UTM Area of Interest : Embedded System, Digital Image Processing, Stereo Vision : [email protected] : 06-234 6508 : D10, 2nd Floor
KHAIRUL AZHA BIN A AZIZ Lecturer M. Eng (Electrical-Mechatronics & Automatic Control), UTM B. Eng. (Hons) in Electronic Engineering, USM Area of Interest : Control & Automation : [email protected] : 06-234 6536 : BP61, 1st Floor
ELIYANA BINTI ROSLAN Lecturer M. Eng in Engineering (Electric-Electronic & Telecommunication), UTM B. Eng in Electrical Engineering, UM Area of Interest : RF, Microwave & Antenna Propagation : [email protected] : 06-234 6570 : BP30, 1st Floor
ABDUL HALIM BIN DAHALAN Senior Teaching Engineer B. Eng. in Electrical Engineering (Communication), UTM Area of Interest : Mobile Radio & Satellite Communication : [email protected] : 06-234 6544 : BP50, 1st Floor
Engr. MOHD SYAHRIN AMRI BIN MOHD NOH Senior Teaching Engineer B. Eng. in Electrical Engineering, UTM Area of Interest : Microelectronics : [email protected] : 06-234 6535 : BP60, 1st Floor
SAIFULLAH BIN SALAM Teaching Engineer B.Eng. Electrical Engineering, UTM Area of Interest : Control System : [email protected] : 06-234 6550 : BP46, 1st Floor
Ir. NIK AZRAN BIN ABDUL HADI Teaching Engineer B.Eng (Hons) Electrical & Electronic, University of Plymouth Area of Interest : Biomedical & Instrumentation : [email protected] : 06-234 6534 : BP59, 1st Floor
NORLEZAH BINTI HASHIM Teaching Engineer B. Eng. in Telecommunication Engineering, UM Area of Interest : Optical Communication & Wireless Communication : [email protected] : 06-234 6571 : BP31, 1st Floor
Department of Electronic & Computer Engineering Technology
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
212
209
HASRUL’ NISHAM BIN ROSLY Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) in Electronic Engineering (Computer), UTeM Area of Interest : Programmable Devices & Computer System : [email protected] : 06-234 6551 : BP47, 1st Floor
MOHD SAAD BIN HAMID Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Hons) Electronics (Computer), MMU Area of Interest : Programmable Devices & Computer System : [email protected] : 06-234 6561 : BP36, 1st Floor
SHAMSUL FAKHAR BIN ABD GANI Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) in Computer Engineering, UniMAP Area of Interest : Programmable Devices & Computer System : [email protected] : 06-234 6552 : BP48, 1st Floor
Engr. AHMAD FAUZAN BIN KADMIN Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) in Electronic Engineering, USM Area of Interest : Network System : [email protected] : 06-234 6542 : BP61, 1st Floor
Engr. SITI HALMA BINTI JOHARI Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) in Electronic Engineering (Industrial Electronic), UTeM Area of Interest : Industrial Electronic : [email protected] : 06-234 6608 : BP32, 1st Floor
MOHD FAUZI BIN AB RAHMAN Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) in Electronic Engineering, Tokai University, Japan Area of Interest : Control & Automation : [email protected] : 06-234 6545 : BP49, 1st Floor
ROSELIZA BINTI YATIM Teaching Engineer B. Eng (Hons) Electrical & Electronic, USM Area of Interest : Microelectronics : [email protected] : 06-234 6609 : BP33, 1st Floor
Engr. AHMAD SAYUTHI BIN MOHAMAD SHOKRI Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) in Electronic Engineering (Computer), UTeM Area of Interest : Medical Image Processing, Programming, Network, Digital Signal Processing : [email protected] : 06-234 6562 : BP35, 1st Floor
NURLIYANA BINTI ABD MUTALIB Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) in Electrical Engineering, UTHM Area of Interest : Microelectronics : [email protected] : 06-234 6605 : BP34, 1st Floor
EFFENDY ONN BIN SIAM Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) in Electronic & Computer, UPM Area of Interest : Industrial Electronic, Control & Automation : [email protected] : 06-234 6569 : BP29, 1st Floor
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
213
210
MD ASHADI BIN MD JOHARI Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) in Electronic Engineering (Industrial Electronic), UTeM Area of Interest : Optic Sensors & Telecommunication : [email protected] : 06-234 6535 : BP63, 1st Floor
NADZRIE BIN MOHAMOOD Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons) in Electronic Engineering, USM Area of Interest : Computer Networking : [email protected] : 06-234 6557 : BP40, 1st Floor
204
IZWAN BIN HAMDAN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
AZIZI BIN OSMAN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
MOHD SYAKIR BIN MOHTARUDIN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
MOHD SAUFI BIN ALIMAT Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
FAKHRULNAIM BIN IBRAHIM Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
JANATUL HAFIZ BIN BASIR Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
AHMAD FITRI BIN ADAM General Office Assistant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
214
211
NUR RASHID BIN MAT NURI @ MD DIN Head of Department / Lecturer M.Eng. (Mechanical), UTM B.Eng. (Mechanical) Okayama University, Japan Area of Interest : Vehicle Aerodynamics, Vehicle Control & Dynamics. : [email protected] : 234 6517 : BP39/D13
MOHD IRMAN BIN RAMLI Lecturer MSc (Manufacturing Systems Engineering) Coventry University. B. Eng (Mechatronics and Precision Engineering), Tohoku University, Japan. Area of Interest: Maintenance, Welding and Metal Joining, Green Technology : [email protected] : 234 6557 : BP26
MAZLAN BIN AHMAD MANSOR Lecturer M. Innovation & Engineering Design, UPM B. Eng. (Mechatronics & Precision Engineering), Tohoku University, Japan. Area of Interest: Automotive Structure & Design. : [email protected] : 234 6624 : BP25
NOR AZAZI BIN NGATIMAN Lecturer M. Eng. (Manufacturing Systems Engineering), UPM. B. Eng. (Hons.) Mechanical Engineering, UKM. Area of Interest: Powertrain, Hybrid Car. : [email protected] : 234 6582 : BP18
OMAR BIN ASAROON Senior Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Hons.) Mechanical Engineering, UTM. Area of Interest : Maintenance, Welding Metal Joining. : [email protected] : 234 6569 : BP29
AHMAD NIZAM BIN JAMALUDIN Teaching Engineer B. Eng (Mechanical/Systems), Hons., UPM. Area of Interest: Maintenance Management, Green Technology and Renewable Energy. : [email protected] : 234 6553 : BP42
Department of Mechanical Engineering Technology
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
215
212
MUHAMMED NOOR BIN HASHIM Teaching Engineer B. Eng (Mechanical), Kitami Institute Of Technology, Japan. Area of Interest: Green Technology, Robocar & Human Powered Vehicle. : [email protected] : 234 6559 : BP38
AZRIN BIN AHMAD Teaching Engineer B. Eng. (Hons.) Mechanical Engineering, UTP. Area of Interest: Plant Maintenance & Product Design. : [email protected] : 234 6581 : BP20
MOHD FARUQ BIN ABDUL LATIF Teaching Engineer B. Eng Mechanical (Design & Innovation), Hons. UTeM. Area of Interest: Green Technology, Automotive Product design, Plastic Injection Molding, & Material Tolerances. : [email protected] : 234 6554 : BP41
MOHD. FARID BIN ISMAIL Teaching Engineer B. Eng (Hons.) Aerospace Engineering, USM. Area of Interest: Design Simulation, Reverse Engineering, Aerostructure Maintenance, Renewable Energy. : [email protected] : 234 6564 : BP28
MUHAMMAD NUR BIN OTHMAN Teaching Engineer B. Eng Mechanical (Automotive). Hons. IIUM. Area of Interest: Green Technology, Solar & Hybrid Car, Renewable Energy : [email protected] : 234 6563 : BP27
MUHAMMAD FAIRUZ BIN ABU BAKAR Teaching Engineer B. Eng Mechanical (Thermal Fluids), Hons. UTeM. Area of Interest: Thermal and fluid application, Automotive. : [email protected] : 234 6580 : BP21
204
IZWAN BIN HAMDAN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
AZIZI BIN OSMAN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
MOHD SYAKIR BIN MOHTARUDIN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
MOHD SAUFI BIN ALIMAT Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
FAKHRULNAIM BIN IBRAHIM Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
JANATUL HAFIZ BIN BASIR Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
AHMAD FITRI BIN ADAM General Office Assistant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
204
IZWAN BIN HAMDAN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
AZIZI BIN OSMAN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
MOHD SYAKIR BIN MOHTARUDIN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
MOHD SAUFI BIN ALIMAT Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
FAKHRULNAIM BIN IBRAHIM Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
JANATUL HAFIZ BIN BASIR Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
AHMAD FITRI BIN ADAM General Office Assistant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
204
IZWAN BIN HAMDAN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
AZIZI BIN OSMAN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
MOHD SYAKIR BIN MOHTARUDIN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
MOHD SAUFI BIN ALIMAT Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
FAKHRULNAIM BIN IBRAHIM Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
JANATUL HAFIZ BIN BASIR Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
AHMAD FITRI BIN ADAM General Office Assistant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
204
IZWAN BIN HAMDAN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
AZIZI BIN OSMAN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
MOHD SYAKIR BIN MOHTARUDIN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
MOHD SAUFI BIN ALIMAT Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
FAKHRULNAIM BIN IBRAHIM Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
JANATUL HAFIZ BIN BASIR Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
AHMAD FITRI BIN ADAM General Office Assistant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
216
213
ROHANA BINTI ABDULLAH Deputy Dean (Research & Industrial Link) / Lecturer M.Sc Manufacturing Engineering, Universiti Teknikal Malaysia Melaka B.Sc in Industrial Engineering, State University of New York, USA Area of Interest : Work Study, Productivity, Lean Six Sigma : [email protected] : 234 6512 : BTD2
Engr. ZOLKARNAIN BIN MARJOM Head of Department / Lecturer M.Eng. Manufacturing Systems Engineering, UPM B.Eng. (Hons) Manufacturing Systems Engineering, University of Portsmouth, UK Diploma of Mechanical & Manufacturing Engineering, UiTM Area of Interest : CADCAM, Rapid Manufacturing, Product Design & Development : [email protected] : 234 6523 : BKJ4
NUZAIMAH BINTI MUSTAFA Lecturer M.Sc in Materials Engineering,USM B.Eng. (Hons) Materials Engineering, USM Area of Interest : Composite, polymer. : [email protected] : - : BP17
MOHD FA’IZ BIN WAHID Lecturer M.Sc. Innovation & Engineering Design, UPM B.Eng. (CAD/CAM), UM Area of Interest : Product Design, CAD/CAM : [email protected] : - : BP92
KHAIRUM BIN HAMZAH Lecturer M.Sc Mathematics, USM B.Sc Mathematics, UITM Diploma Science, UITM Area of Interest : Pure Maths, CAGD, Fuzzy Maths : [email protected] : - : BP94
Engr. HASSAN BIN ATTAN Senior Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Hons) Manufacturing Systems Engineering, University of Portsmouth, UK Diploma of Manufacturing Technology, PPD. Area of Interest : CADCAM, Product Design & Development, Metal Fabrication : [email protected] : 234 6531 : BP58
Department of Manufacturing Engineering Technology
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
217
214
HAMBALI BIN BOEJANG Senior Teaching Engineer M.Sc In Rapid Product Development (De Montfort, UK) B. Mech Engineering (Pennstate University USA) Area of Interest :Product Design & Rapid Prototyping, Tooling and Manufacturing Reverse Engineering. : [email protected] : 234 6539 : BP14
KHAIRUL ANUAR BIN RAHMAN Senior Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Electronics Information) Gifu University, Japan Area of Interest : Vision System, Image Processing, : [email protected] : 2346532 : BP57
SYAHRUL AZWAN BIN SUNDI @ SUANDI Senior Teaching Engineer M.Sc. In Manufacturing Engineering, UTeM B.Eng.(Mechanical), USM Area of Interest : Machining, CAD/CAM : [email protected] : - : -
MUHAMMAD SYAFIK BIN JUMALI Teaching Engineer B.Eng. Mechanical and Manufacturing Systems , UNIMAS Area of Interest : CNC Machining, Cutting Tool : [email protected] : 234 6645 : BP43
HAIRUL EFFENDY BIN AB MAULOD Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Materials) Hons, USM Area of Interest : Composite Processing, Composite Materials, : [email protected] : 2346549
: BP45
Engr. HANIZAM BIN HASHIM Teaching Engineer B.Eng. Manufacturing System with Mechanical Engineering, Bradford University of United Kingdom Area of Interest : Thin Film Coating, Printed Circuit Boards Assembly, Box Build Assembly : [email protected] : 234 6533 : BP58
Engr. MOHD SOUFHWEE BIN ABD RAHMAN Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Mechanical) Industry, UTM Area of Interest : Quality Control & Management and Industrial Engineering : [email protected] : 234 6541 : BP52
Engr. MOHD FAIZAL BIN HALIM Teaching Engineer B.Eng. (Hons), Mechanical- Manufacturing, UTM Diploma of Mechanical engineering, UTM Area of Interest : Concurrent Engineering, Product Design & Development. : [email protected] : 2346575 : BP44
SALLEH BIN ABOO HASSAN Teaching Engineer (Certified Six Sigma Black Belt) B.Eng.(Agricultural), UPM Area of Interest : Plastic Processing, Quality System & Six Sigma : [email protected] : 234 6540 : BP53
NOORIRINAH BT OMAR Teaching Engineer M.Sc in Materials Engineering,USM B.Eng. (Hons) Materials Engineering, USM Area of Interest : Application of nanotechnology and nano composite. : [email protected] : 234 6582 : BP18
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
218204
IZWAN BIN HAMDAN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
AZIZI BIN OSMAN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
MOHD SYAKIR BIN MOHTARUDIN Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
MOHD SAUFI BIN ALIMAT Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
FAKHRULNAIM BIN IBRAHIM Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
JANATUL HAFIZ BIN BASIR Technician : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
AHMAD FITRI BIN ADAM General Office Assistant : [email protected] : 06-234 6623 : Admin, 2nd Floor
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
219
215
FACULTY of MECHANICAL ENGINEERING (FKM) LAB LOCATIONS:
1. Main Entrance 2. Fabrication & Fitting Workshop 3. Welding Workshop 4. Computer-Aided Drawing Studio 2
5. Computer-Aided Drawing Studio 1 6. Material Science & Technology Lab 7. Computer-Aided Drawing Studio 3 8. Prayer Room, Toilet
MAPS & LOCATIONS
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
220
216
FACULTY of MECHANICAL ENGINEERING (FKM) LECTURE ROOMS:
216
FACULTY of MECHANICAL ENGINEERING (FKM) LECTURE ROOMS:
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
221
217
FACULTY of ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY (FTK) LAB LOCATIONS:
1. JTKP Lab 2. JTKM Lab 3. JTKE Lab 4. JTKEK Lab 5. JTKP Lab 6. JTKM Lab
FKM Labs: 7. Engineering Drawing Studio 1 8. Engineering Drawing Studio 2 9. Chemical Lab 10. Static Lab 11. Experiment Technique Lab
UTeMFACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
222
218
FACULTY of ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY (FTK) ACADEMIC BUILDING:
13. Admin Office 14. KPP Room 15. KJ JTKE Room 16. KJ JTKEK Room 17. KJ JTKM Room 18. KJ JTKP Room 19. Dean’s Office 20. Dean’s Room 21. TDA Room 22. TDP1 Room 23. TDP2 Room
24. BK1/BK5 25. BK2/BK6 26. BK3 27. BK4 28. UTeM Holdings
6. JTKP Lecturer Rooms 7. JTKM Lecturer Rooms 8. JTKEK Lecturer Rooms 9. JTKE Lecturer Rooms 10. Language Lab 11. JTKEK Lab 12. JTKE Lab
1. Main Lobby 2. UTeM Hall 1 3. Prayer Room 4. JTKM Lab 5. JTKP Lab
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGYACADEMIC HANDBOOK SESSION 2011 / 2012
UTeM
223
219
FTK PUBLICATION COMMITTEE:
ADVISOR
Assoc. Prof. Mohd Rahimi bin Yusoff
CHAIRMAN Rostam Affendi bin Hamzah
EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
Ahmad Zubir bin Jamil Rohana binti Abdullah
Engr. Asri bin Din Nur Rashid bin Mat Nuri @ Md Din
Engr. Zolkarnain bin Marjom Azhar bin Mohd Salleh
SECRETARY
Shamsul Fakhar bin Abd Gani
COMMITTEE Aminurrashid bin Noordin
Muhammad Faizal bin Mohd Yaakub Mohd Saad bin Hamid Siti Halma binti Johari
Saifullah bin Salam Muhammed Noor bin Hashim
Mazlan bin Ahmad Mansor Muhammad Syafik bin Jumali
Salleh bin Aboo Hassan
CREDITS